Yamaha RX-A670BL Gebruikershandleiding

Merk: Yamaha

Model: RX-A670BL

Categorie: AV-ontvangers

Type: Gebruikershandleiding

Deze handleiding is ook geschikt voor

RX-A670

AV Receiver

Owner's Manual

• This unit is a product for enjoying video and music at home.

• This manual explains preparations and operations for everyday users of the unit.

• Read the supplied booklet “Quick Start Guide” before using the unit.

CONTENTS

BEFORE USING THE UNIT 5

Accessories................................................................................................ 5

How to use this manual............................................................................ 5

Remote control.......................................................................................... 6

Insert the batteries................................................................................................................................................................... 6

Operating range of the remote control........................................................................................................................... 6

FEATURES 7

What you can do with the unit................................................................. 7

Part names and functions...................................................................... 11

Front panel............................................................................................................................................................................... 11

Front display (indicators).................................................................................................................................................... 12

Rear panel................................................................................................................................................................................. 13

Remote control....................................................................................................................................................................... 14

PREPARATIONS 15

1 Placing speakers............................................................................... 16

Typical speaker layouts....................................................................................................................................................... 17

Other speaker layouts.......................................................................................................................................................... 19

Presence speaker layout..................................................................................................................................................... 21

Setting the speaker impedance....................................................................................................................................... 22

2 Connecting speakers........................................................................ 23

Connecting speaker cables................................................................................................................................................ 24

Connecting the subwoofer (with built-in amplifier)................................................................................................. 24

Connecting front speakers that support bi-amp connections............................................................................. 24

Connecting Zone B speakers............................................................................................................................................. 24

3 Connecting a TV/playback devices.................................................. 25

Input/output jacks and cables.......................................................................................................................................... 25

Connecting a TV..................................................................................................................................................................... 26

Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players).............................................................................................. 27

Connecting audio devices (such as CD players)......................................................................................................... 29

Connecting to the jack on the front panel................................................................................................................... 29

4 Connecting the radio antennas....................................................... 30

FM/AM antennas (Except for U.K., Europe, Australia and Russia models)........................................................ 30

DAB/FM antenna (U.K., Europe, Australia and Russia models).............................................................................. 30

5 Preparing for connecting to a network........................................... 31

Connecting a network cable............................................................................................................................................. 31

Preparing a wireless antenna............................................................................................................................................ 31

6 Connecting the power cable............................................................ 32

7 Selecting an on-screen menu language.......................................... 33

8 Configuring the necessary speaker settings.................................. 34

9 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)................ 35

Error messages....................................................................................................................................................................... 37

Warning messages................................................................................................................................................................ 38

10 Connecting to a network wirelessly................................................ 39

Selecting the connection method................................................................................................................................... 39

Connecting the unit to a wireless network.................................................................................................................. 40

Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly (Wireless Direct)...................................................................... 45

11 Setting the MusicCast....................................................................... 47

MusicCast CONTROLLER..................................................................................................................................................... 47

Adding the unit to the MusicCast network.................................................................................................................. 47

PLAYBACK 48

Basic playback procedure...................................................................... 48

Enjoying playback................................................................................................................................................................. 48

Switching information on the front display................................................................................................................. 49

Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch

(SCENE).................................................................................................... 50

Selecting a registered scene.............................................................................................................................................. 50

Registering a scene............................................................................................................................................................... 50

Selecting the sound mode..................................................................... 51

Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP 3D)............................................................................................ 52

Enjoying unprocessed playback...................................................................................................................................... 54

Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (direct playback)................................................................................................. 55

Enhancing the bass (Extra Bass)....................................................................................................................................... 55

Playing back digitally compressed formats (such as MP3, etc.) with enriched sound (Compressed

Music Enhancer)

..................................................................................................................................................................... 55

Listening to FM/AM radio (Except for U.K., Europe, Australia and

Russia models)........................................................................................ 56

Selecting a frequency for reception............................................................................................................................... 56

Registering favorite radio stations (presets)................................................................................................................ 57

Listening to DAB radio (U.K., Europe, Australia and Russia models)

.................................................................................................................. 60

Preparing the DAB tuning.................................................................................................................................................. 60

Selecting a DAB radio station for reception................................................................................................................. 61

Registering favorite DAB radio stations (presets)...................................................................................................... 62

Displaying the DAB information...................................................................................................................................... 63

Checking reception strength of each DAB channel label....................................................................................... 64

Listening to FM radio (U.K., Europe, Australia and Russia models)

.................................................................................................................. 65

Selecting a frequency for reception............................................................................................................................... 65

Registering favorite FM radio stations (presets)......................................................................................................... 65

Radio Data System tuning.................................................................................................................................................. 68

Playing back music stored on a Bluetooth® device.............................. 69

Playback Bluetooth® device music on the unit........................................................................................................... 69

Enjoying audio using Bluetooth® speakers/headphones....................................................................................... 70

Playing back music with AirPlay............................................................ 71

Playback of iTunes/iPhone music contents................................................................................................................. 71

Playing back music stored on a USB storage device............................ 73

Connecting a USB storage device................................................................................................................................... 73

Playback of USB storage device contents..................................................................................................................... 73

Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)...................... 76

Media sharing setup............................................................................................................................................................. 76

Playback of PC music contents......................................................................................................................................... 77

Listening to Internet radio..................................................................... 79

Playback of Internet radio.................................................................................................................................................. 79

Registering favorite Internet radio stations................................................................................................................. 80

Playing back more high-quality sounds with bi-amp connections

.................................................................................................................. 81

Connecting front speakers that support bi-amp connections............................................................................. 81

Playing back music in multiple rooms.................................................. 82

Connecting Zone B speakers............................................................................................................................................. 82

Operating the Zone B........................................................................................................................................................... 83

Useful functions...................................................................................... 85

Registering favorite items (shortcut).............................................................................................................................. 85

Configuring playback settings for different playback sources

(Option menu)......................................................................................... 87

Option menu items............................................................................................................................................................... 87

CONFIGURATIONS 91

Configuring various functions (Setup Menu)....................................... 91

Setup menu items................................................................................................................................................................. 92

Speaker...................................................................................................................................................................................... 94

HDMI........................................................................................................................................................................................... 99

Sound...................................................................................................................................................................................... 101

ECO........................................................................................................................................................................................... 104

Function.................................................................................................................................................................................. 105

Network.................................................................................................................................................................................. 108

Bluetooth............................................................................................................................................................................... 110

Language............................................................................................................................................................................... 111

Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu)............ 112

ADVANCED SETUP menu items..................................................................................................................................... 112

Changing the speaker impedance setting (SP IMP.).............................................................................................. 112

Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE ID).......................................................................................................... 113

Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT)......................................................................................................... 113

Selecting the HDMI 4K signal format (4K MODE).................................................................................................... 113

DTS Format Notification Setting (DTS MODE).......................................................................................................... 114

Restoring the default settings (INIT)............................................................................................................................. 114

Updating the firmware (UPDATE)................................................................................................................................. 114

Checking the firmware version (VERSION)................................................................................................................. 114

Updating the unit’s firmware via the network................................... 115

Updating the unit’s firmware immediately............................................................................................................... 115

Updating the unit’s firmware at power off................................................................................................................ 115

APPENDIX 117

Frequently asked questions................................................................ 117

Troubleshooting................................................................................... 119

First, check the following:................................................................................................................................................ 119

Power, system and remote control............................................................................................................................... 119

Audio....................................................................................................................................................................................... 120

Video........................................................................................................................................................................................ 122

FM/AM radio (AM radio feature is available except for U.K., Europe, Australia and Russia models).... 123

DAB radio (U.K., Europe, Australia and Russia models)......................................................................................... 123

USB and network................................................................................................................................................................. 124

Bluetooth®............................................................................................................................................................................. 125

Error indications on the front display................................................. 126

Glossary................................................................................................. 127

Audio information.............................................................................................................................................................. 127

HDMI and video information.......................................................................................................................................... 128

Network information......................................................................................................................................................... 129

Yamaha technologies........................................................................................................................................................ 129

Supported devices and file formats.................................................... 130

Supported devices.............................................................................................................................................................. 130

File formats............................................................................................................................................................................ 130

Video signal flow.................................................................................. 131

Information on HDMI........................................................................... 132

HDMI Control........................................................................................................................................................................ 132

Audio Return Channel (ARC)........................................................................................................................................... 134

HDMI signal compatibility............................................................................................................................................... 134

Trademarks........................................................................................... 135

Specifications........................................................................................ 136

BEFORE USING THE UNIT

Accessories

Check that the following accessories are supplied with the product.

£ AM antenna (except for U.K., Europe,

Australia and Russia models)

£ FM antenna (except for U.K., Europe,

Australia and Russia models)

* One of the above is supplied depending on

the region of purchase.

£ DAB/FM antenna (U.K., Europe, Australia and

Russia models)

£ YPAO microphone

£ Remote control

£ Batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) (x2)

£ CD-ROM (Owner's Manual

)

£ Quick Start Guide

How to use this manual

• The illustrations of the main unit used in this manual are of the U.S.A. model, unless

otherwise specified.

• Some features are not available in certain regions.

• Due to product improvements, specifications and appearance are subject to

change without notice.

• This manual explains operations using the supplied remote control.

• This manual describes all the “iPod touch”, “iPhone” and “iPad” as the “iPhone”.

“iPhone” refers to “iPod touch”, “iPhone” and “iPad”, unless otherwise specified.

Notice:

Indicates precautions for use to avoid the possibility of malfunction/damage to the unit.

Note:

Indicates instructions and supplementary explanations for optimum use.

Remote control

The supplied remote control is used as follows.

Insert the batteries

Insert the batteries the right way round.

Operating range of the remote control

Point the remote control at the remote control sensor on the unit and remain within the

operating range shown below.

Within 6 m (20 ft)

30° 30°

FEATURES

What you can do with the unit

The unit is equipped with full of useful functions.

Supports 2- to 7.1-channel

speaker system

You can enjoy your favorite acoustic spaces in various

styles.

YPAO automatically optimizes the speaker

settings to suit your room.

• “Optimizing the speaker settings automatically

(YPAO)”

(p.35)

CINEMA DSP allows you to create stereo or

multichannel sounds with the sound fields

like actual movie theaters and concert halls in

your own room.

• “Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP

3D)” (p.52)

You can enjoy compressed music with

enhanced sound (Compressed Music

Enhancer).

• “Playing back digitally compressed formats (such as

MP3, etc.) with enriched sound (Compressed Music

Enhancer)” (p.55)

The Zone A/B function allows you to playback

an input source in the room where the unit is

installed (Zone A) and in another room (Zone

B).

• “Playing back music in multiple rooms” (p.82)

Change the input source and

favorite settings with one touch

(SCENE)

The SCENE function allows you to select the input

source and settings registered to the corresponding

scene, such as sound program and Compressed

Music Enhancer on/off, with just one touch.

• “Selecting the input source and favorite settings with

one touch (SCENE)”

(p.50)

4K Ultra HD signal and HDCP 2.2

supported

You can enjoy the high definition video quality of 4K

with HDCP 2.2 that complies with the latest copyright

protection.

• “Selecting the HDMI 4K signal format (4K

MODE)” (p.113)

Support for the Latest Surround

Format, Dolby Atmos® and

DTS:X™ with presence speakers

The unit supports Dolby Atmos and DTS:X that will fill

the room with multidimensional sound. You can enjoy

Dolby Atmos, DTS:X or CINEMA DSP 3D with the layout

for presence speakers that suits your listening

environment.

• “Typical speaker layouts” (p.17)

• “Presence speaker layout” (p.21)

Wide variety of supported

content via network

When the unit is connected to a network by

establishing a wired or wireless connection, you can

enjoy various contents via network on the unit.

You can select a wired or wireless connection

to a network.

• “Preparing for connecting to a network” (p.31)

• “Connecting to a network wirelessly” (p.39)

You can play back music files stored on your

PC or DLNA-compatible NAS on the unit.

• “Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/

NAS)” (p.

76)

You can listen to Internet radio stations from

all over the world.

• “Listening to Internet radio” (p.79)

The AirPlay function allows you to play back

iTunes or iPhone/iPad/iPod touch music on

the unit via network.

• “Playing back music with AirPlay” (p.71)

The ECO mode (power saving

function) allows you to create an

eco-friendly home theater system

When the ECO mode is enabled, you can reduce the

unit's power consumption.

• “ECO Mode” (p.104)

Sequential operation of a TV, AV

receiver, and BD/DVD player

(HDMI Control)

When the unit is connected to an HDMI Control-

compatible TV and BD/DVD player with each HDMI

cable, you can control the unit (such as power and

volume) and BD/DVD player with TV remote control

operations.

• “HDMI Control” (p.132)

Supports Bluetooth® devices

You can play back music stored on a Bluetooth device.

• “Playing back music stored on a Bluetooth

device”

(p.69)

Supports USB storage devices

You can play back music stored on a USB storage

device.

• “Playing back music stored on a USB storage

device”

(p.73)

Connecting various devices

A number of HDMI jacks and various input/output jacks

on the unit allow you to connect video devices (such as

BD/DVD players), audio devices (such as CD players),

game consoles, portable audio player, and other

devices.

• “Connecting a TV/playback devices” (p.25)

Playing back TV audio in

surround sound with a single

HDMI cable connection (Audio

Return Channel: ARC)

When using an ARC-compatible TV, you only need one

HDMI cable to enable video output to the TV, audio

input from the TV, and the transmission of HDMI Control

signals.

• “Connecting a TV” (p.26)

Creating 3-dimensional sound

fields

Connecting presence speakers allows you to create a

natural 3-dimensional sound field in your own room

(CINEMA DSP 3D). Even when no presence speakers

are connected, the Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS)

function produces 3D surround sound. In addition, the

unit creates Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS)

using the surround speakers to add a sense of depth to

the rear sound field even when no surround back

speakers are connected.

• “Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP

3D)” (p.52)

Surround playback with 5

speakers placed in front

You can enjoy the surround sound even when the

surround speakers are placed in front.

• “Enjoying surround sound with 5 speakers placed in

front (Virtual CINEMA FRONT)” (p.53)

Enjoying pure high fidelity sound

When the direct playback mode is enabled, the unit

plays back the selected source with the least circuitry,

which lets you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound quality.

• “Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (direct

playback)” (p.55)

Enhanced bass reproduction

Extra Bass allows you to enjoy enhanced bass

reproduction that does not depend on the speakers

used.

• “Enhancing the bass (Extra Bass)” (p.55)

Listening to FM/AM radio (Except

for U.K., Europe, Australia and

Russia models)

The unit is equipped with a built-in FM/AM tuner. You

can register up to 40 favorite radio stations as presets.

• “Listening to FM/AM radio (Except for U.K., Europe,

Australia and Russia models)”

(p.56)

Listening to DAB/FM radio (U.K.,

Europe, Australia and Russia

models)

The unit is equipped with a built-in DAB/FM tuner. DAB

(Digital Audio Broadcasting) uses digital signals for

clearer sound and more stable reception compared to

analog signals. You can register up to 40 favorite radio

stations as presets.

• “Listening to DAB radio (U.K., Europe, Australia and

Russia models)” (p.60

)

• “Listening to FM radio (U.K., Europe, Australia and

Russia models)” (p.65

)

Easy operation with a TV screen

You can operate the USB storage device, view

information, or easily configure the settings using the

on-screen menu.

Auto Rename function

The unit automatically creates input source names

according to the HDMI-compatible devices connected,

and displays the respective input source names on the

front display.

• “Input Rename” (p.105)

Useful applications

The useful application for connections and operations

of the unit is as follows.

Application for tablets “AV SETUP

GUIDE”

AV SETUP GUIDE is an application that assists

you with cable connections between AV Receiver

and source devices as well as AV Receiver

setup.

This app guides you through the various settings

such as speaker connections, TV and source

device connections and assigning the power

amp.

Functions:

1) Connection support guide

– Speaker connection

– TV/source devices connection

2) Setup support guide

– Automatic network setup of HDMI, power amp

assign, etc.

– Various setup assistance with illustrations.

– YPAO setting guidance

3) View Owner's Manual

* This application is for tablets only.

For details, search for “AV SETUP GUIDE” on the App

Store or Google Play™.

Application for smartphone /

tablets “AV CONTROLLER”

AV CONTROLLER is an application that assists

you with various operations of AV Receiver

without the remote control. This app allows you

not only to control the unit’s power and volume

but also to select the input source and start/stop

playback, as shown below.

Functions:

• Power on/off

•

Volume up/down

• Mute

• Music Play

• Input Selection

• DSP Mode Selection

• SCENE selection

• Blu-ray player fundamental control

• Seamless control between the Yamaha AV Receiver

and Blu-ray player

• Demo mode - Explains how to use this app

For details, search for “AV CONTROLLER” on the App

Store or Google Play.

Application for smartphone /

tablets "MusicCast CONTROLLER"

MusicCast CONTROLLER is an application that

allows you to link a MusicCast compatible device

to other MusicCast compatible devices in other

rooms and play them back simultaneously. This

app lets you use your smartphone or other mobile

device instead of the remote control to easily

select music to play back as well as configure the

unit and MusicCast compatible devices.

Functions:

• Selecting and playing back various content

– Play back music from your mobile device

– Select an Internet radio station

– Play back music files stored on media servers

(PCs/NAS)

– Play back music files stored on a USB storage

device

• Operating and configuring the unit

– Select the input source, adjust the volume and

mute the audio output

– Select from a wide variety of sound processing

features

For details, search for “MusicCast CONTROLLER” on

the App Store or Google Play.

Part names and functions

The part names and functions of the unit and the supplied remote control are as follows.

Front panel

PROGRAM

TONE CONTROL

STRAIGHT

(CONNECT)

AUX USB

AUDIO

5V 1A

SCENE

PHONES

SILENT CINEMA

YPAO MIC

DIRECT

VOLUME

INPUT

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

MEMORY

INFO (WPS)

PRESET

TUNING

3 4 6 7 8

51 09

B C D E F H I JG

(U.S.A. model)

z (power) key

Turns on/off (standby) the unit.

Standby indicator

Lights up when the unit is in standby mode under any of

the following conditions.

• HDMI Control is enabled (p.99)

• Standby Through is enabled (p.99)

• Network Standby is enabled (p.109)

YPAO MIC jack

For connecting the supplied YPAO microphone (p.35).

Remote control sensor

Receives remote control signals (p.6).

INFO (WPS) key

Selects the information displayed on the front display

(p.49).

Enters the wireless LAN connection setup (WPS button

configuration) by holding down for 3 seconds (

p.41).

MEMORY key

Registers radio stations as preset stations (p.57).

PRESET keys

Select a preset radio station (p.58).

FM and AM keys (except for U.K., Europe, Australia and

Russia models)

FM and DAB keys (U.K., Europe, Australia and Russia

models)

Switch between FM and AM (p.56) or FM and DAB

(p.

60).

TUNING keys

Select the radio frequency (p.56).

Front display

Displays information (p.12).

DIRECT key

Enables/disables the direct playback mode (p.55).

PHONES jack

For connecting headphones.

INPUT knob

Select an input source.

TONE CONTROL key

Adjusts the level of high-frequency range (Treble) and low-

frequency range (Bass

) individually (p.88).

SCENE keys

Select the registered input source and sound program with

one touch. Also, turns on the unit when it is in standby

mode (p.50).

PROGRAM keys

Select a sound program or a surround decoder (p.51).

STRAIGHT (CONNECT) key

Enables/disables the straight decode mode (p.54).

Enters the MusicCast network addition and the wireless

LAN setup by holding down for 5 seconds (p.

47).

AUX jack

For connecting devices, such as portable audio players

(p.29).

USB jack

For connecting a USB storage device (p.73).

VOLUME knob

Adjusts the volume.

Front display (indicators)

YPAO

VOL.

PARTY

ENHANCER

ECO

OUT

DRC

SLEEP

STEREO

TUNED

VOL.

SBL SB SBR

MUTE VIRTUAL

ZONE

LINK

MASTER

FPRFPL

1 5 7

9342 0 A6

CB C

FED G

HDMI

Lights up when HDMI signals are being input or output.

OUT

Lights up when HDMI signals are being output.

LINK MASTER

Lights up when the unit is the master device of the

MusicCast network.

Firmware update indicator

Lights up when a firmware update is available via the

network.

Bluetooth indicator

Light up while the unit is connected to a Bluetooth device.

CINEMA DSP

Lights up when CINEMA DSP (p.52) or CINEMA DSP 3D

(p.

52) is working.

SLEEP

Lights up when the sleep timer is on.

STEREO

Lights up when the unit is receiving a stereo FM radio

signal.

TUNED

Lights up when the unit is receiving an FM/AM radio station

(except for U.K., Europe, Australia and Russia models) or

FM radio station (U.K., Europe, Australia and Russia

models) signal.

ZONE indicators

Indicate the zone to which the sound is output (p.84).

A-DRC

Lights up when Adaptive DRC (p.88) is working.

Volume indicator

Indicates the current volume.

VIRTUAL

Lights up when the Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS)

(p.17), Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) (p.

52), Virtual

CINEMA DSP (p.53) or Virtual CINEMA FRONT (p.53) is

working.

ECO

Lights up when the eco mode (p.104) is enabled.

Cursor indicators

Indicate the remote control cursor keys currently

operational.

Information display

Displays the current status (such as input name and sound

mode name). You can switch the information by pressing

INFO (p.

49).

Signal strength indicator

Indicates the strength of the wireless signal (p.39).

Note

This indicator may light up when the unit is added to the

MusicCast network. For details, see

“Setting the

MusicCast” (p.47).

ENHANCER

Lights up when Compressed Music Enhancer (p.55) is

working.

Speaker indicators

Indicate speaker terminals from which signals are output.

A Front speaker (L)

S Front speaker (R)

D Center speaker

F Surround speaker (L)

G Surround speaker (R)

H Surround back speaker (L)

J Surround back speaker (R)

K Surround back speaker

B Presence speaker (L)

N Presence speaker (R)

L Subwoofer

MUTE

Blinks when audio is temporarily muted.

Rear panel

7 8

( U.S.A. model)

▪ The area around the video/audio output jacks is marked in white

on the actual product to prevent improper connections.

HDMI OUT jack

For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting

video/audio signals (

p.25). When using ARC, TV audio

signal can also be input through the HDMI OUT jack.

HDMI 1–4 jacks

For connecting to HDMI-compatible playback devices and

inputting video/audio signals (

p.27).

ANTENNA jacks

For connecting to the radio antennas (p.30).

NETWORK jack

For a wired connection to a network (p.31).

Wireless antenna

For a wireless (Wi-Fi) connection to a network (p.31) and

a Bluetooth connection (

p.69).

Power cable

For connecting to an AC wall outlet (p.32).

AV jacks

AUDIO jacks

For connecting to video/audio playback devices and

inputting video/audio signals (

p.27).

MONITOR OUT jack

For connecting to a TV and outputting video signals

(p.25).

SUBWOOFER PRE OUT 1–2 jacks

For connecting to a subwoofer (with built-in amplifier)

(p.

23).

SPEAKERS terminals

For connecting to speakers (p.23).

Remote control

STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS

ENTER

SETUP OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

SCENE

DVD

NET

RADIO

HDMI

AUDIO

1 2 3

BLUETOOTH

USB

1 2 3

1 2

NET

AUX

TUNING

PRESET

HOME

MEMORY

DISPLAY

RETURN

BLUE

YELLOWGREEN

RED

SLEEP

ZONE A ZONE B

9 E

(U.S.A. model)

Remote control signal transmitter

Transmits infrared signals.

z (receiver power) key

Turns on/off (standby) the unit.

SLEEP key

Pressing this key repeatedly will specify the time (120 min,

90 min, 60 min, 30 min, off), in which the unit switches to

the standby mode.

Input selection keys

Select an input source for playback.

You can select directly each input source by pressing the

following keys.

HDMI 1-4

HDMI 1-4 jacks

AV 1-3

AV 1-3 jacks

AUDIO 1–3

AUDIO 1–3 jacks

BLUETOOTH

Bluetooth device

USB

USB jack (on the front panel)

NET

SERVER, NET RADIO, MusicCast Link,

AirPlay and network sources (press

repeatedly to select a desired source)

AUX

AUX jack (on the front panel)

FM radio

AM or DAB

AM radio (except for U.K., Europe,

Australia and Russia models) or DAB

radio (U.K., Europe, Australia and Russia

models)

ZONE switch

Changes the zone that is controlled by the remote control

(p.

83).

SCENE keys

Select the registered input source and sound program with

one touch. Also, turn on the unit when it is in standby mode

(p.50).

PROGRAM keys

Select a sound program or a surround decoder (p.51).

SETUP key

Displays the setup menu (p.91).

Menu operation keys

Cursor keys

Select a menu or the parameter.

ENTER

Confirms a selected item.

RETURN

Returns to the previous screen.

8:A External device operation keys

Let you perform playback operations when “USB” or “NET”

is selected as the input source, or control playback of the

HDMI Control-compatible playback device.

Note

▪ The playback devices must support HDMI Control. Some

HDMI Control-compatible devices cannot be used.

▪ You can assign the unit's functions to the RED/GREEN/

YELLOW/BLUE keys (

p.107).

Radio keys

Operate the FM/AM/DAB radio when “TUNER” is selected

as the input source (p.56).

MEMORY

Registers radio stations as presets.

PRESET

Select a preset station.

TUNING

Select the radio frequency.

Sound mode keys

Select a sound mode (p.51).

VOLUME keys

Adjust the volume.

MUTE key

Mutes the audio output.

OPTION key

Displays the option menu (p.87).

DISPLAY key

Turns on/off the browse screen, playback screen, etc.

PREPARATIONS

General setup procedure

1 Placing speakers................................................................................................................................ (p.16)

2 Connecting speakers........................................................................................................................ (p.23)

3 Connecting a TV/playback devices.................................................................................................. (p.25)

4 Connecting the radio antennas....................................................................................................... (p.30)

5 Preparing for connecting to a network........................................................................................... (p.31)

6 Connecting the power cable............................................................................................................ (p.32)

7 Selecting an on-screen menu language.......................................................................................... (p.33)

8 Configuring the necessary speaker settings................................................................................... (p.34)

9 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)................................................................ (p.35)

10 Connecting to a network wirelessly................................................................................................ (p.39)

11 Setting the MusicCast....................................................................................................................... (p.47)

This completes all the preparations. Enjoy playing movies, music, radio and other content with the unit!

1 Placing speakers

Select the speaker layout for the number of speakers that you are using and place the speakers and subwoofer in your room. This section describes the representative speaker

layout examples.

Notice

▪ (U.S.A. and Canada models only)

Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When connecting 6-ohm speakers, set the unit’s speaker impedance to “6

Ω MIN”. For details, see “Setting the speaker impedance” (p.22).

▪ (Except for U.S.A. and Canada models)

Use speakers with an impedance of at least 6 W.

▪ Use a subwoofer with built-in amplifier.

▪ Be sure to connect the front left and right speakers.

Typical speaker layouts

5.1.2-channel system (using presence speakers)

This speaker system uses the presence speakers to produce a natural 3-dimensional

sound field, and also creates Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the

surround speakers to add a sense of depth to the rear sound field. This system is

suited for enjoying not only 5.1-channel but also for 7.1-channel contents.

39 9

E R

10° to 30° 10° to 30°

0.5 to 1 m

(1.6 to 3.3 ft)

0.5 to 1 m

(1.6 to 3.3 ft)

1.8 m (5.9 ft) 1.8 m (5.9 ft)

Speaker type Abbr. Function

Front (L/R)

1/2

Produce front left/right channel sounds (stereo sounds).

Center

Produces center channel sounds (such as movie dialogue

and vocals).

Surround (L/R)

4/5

Produce surround left/right channel sounds.

Presence (L/R)

E/R

Produce CINEMA DSP effect sounds or heights channel

sounds of Dolby Atmos and DTS:X contents.

Subwoofer

Produces LFE (low-frequency effect) channel sounds and

reinforces the bass parts of other channels. This channel

is counted as “0.1”. You can connect two subwoofers to

the unit and place them on the left/right (or front/rear)

sides of the room.

Note

▪ “5.1.2-channel” denotes “standard 5.1-channel plus 2 for overhead speaker channels”. For details on how

to place overhead speakers (presence speakers), see

“Presence speaker layout” (p.21).

▪ To have a full effect of Dolby Atmos contents, we recommend using this speaker system. However, you

can also play back Dolby Atmos contents with the 7.1 system (using surround back speakers).

▪ To have a full effect of DTS:X contents, we recommend using this speaker system.

▪ You can connect two subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to the unit. Two subwoofers connected to the unit

output the same sounds.

▪ When using only one subwoofer, you can place it either in the left or right side.

7.1-channel system

This speaker system creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center

and surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and also allows you to

enjoy extended surround sounds using the surround back speakers.

4 5

39 9

6 7

10° to 30° 10° to 30°

30 cm (1 ft) or more

Speaker type Abbr. Function

Front (L/R)

1/2

Produce front left/right channel sounds (stereo sounds).

Center

Produces center channel sounds (such as movie dialogue

and vocals).

Surround (L/R)

4/5

Produce surround left/right channel sounds.

Surround back (L/R)

6/7

Produce surround back left/right channel sounds.

Subwoofer

Produces LFE (low-frequency effect) channel sounds and

reinforces the bass parts of other channels. This channel

is counted as “0.1”. You can connect two subwoofers to

the unit and place them on the left/right (or front/rear)

sides of the room.

Note

▪ When using only one surround back speaker (6.1-channel system), place it straight behind the listening

position (middle of 6 and 7

in the diagram).

▪ You can connect two subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to the unit. Two subwoofers connected to the unit

output the same sounds.

▪ When using only one subwoofer, you can place it either in the left or right side.

Other speaker layouts

The following speaker layouts are also available.

5.1-channel system

4 5

1 2

10° to 30° 10° to 30°

Note

▪ You can enjoy surround sound even without the center speaker

(4.1-channel system).

▪ In addition to this speaker layout, you can use bi-amp connections

or the Zone B function that allows you to play back an input source

in another room (Zone B). For details, see

“Playing back more

high-quality sounds with bi-amp connections” (p.81) or “Playing

back music in multiple rooms” (p.82).

5.1 system (front 5.1-channel)

(using surround speakers)

1 2

4 5

Note

▪ To utilize this configuration, set “Virtual CINEMA FRONT” (p.97)

in the “Setup” menu to “

On”.

▪ You can enjoy surround sound even without the center speaker

(front 4.1-channel system).

▪ In addition to this speaker layout, you can use bi-amp connections

or the Zone B function that allows you to play back an input source

in another room (Zone B). For details, see

“Playing back more

high-quality sounds with bi-amp connections” (p.81) or “Playing

back music in multiple rooms” (p.82).

3.1.2 system

E R

Note

You can also play back Dolby Atmos and DTS:X contents with this

speaker system.

3.1-channel system

1 2

Note

In addition to this speaker layout, you can use bi-amp connections or the Zone B function that allows you to

play back an input source in another room (Zone B). For details, see

“Playing back more high-quality sounds

with bi-amp connections” (p.81) or “Playing back music in multiple rooms” (p.82).

2.1-channel system

1 2

Note

In addition to this speaker layout, you can use bi-amp connections or the Zone B function that allows you to

play back an input source in another room (Zone B). For details, see

“Playing back more high-quality sounds

with bi-amp connections” (p.81) or “Playing back music in multiple rooms” (p.82).

Presence speaker layout

The unit provides three layout patterns for presence speakers (Front Height, Overhead

and Dolby Enabled SP). Choose a layout pattern that suits your listening environment.

Note

▪ You can enjoy Dolby Atmos, DTS:X or Cinema DSP 3D with any layout pattern.

▪ When using presence speakers installed to the ceiling or when using the Dolby Enabled speakers as the

presence speakers, configure the “Layout” setting in the “

Setup” menu before performing YPAO (p.35).

Front Height

Install the presence speakers on the front wall.

It delivers a natural sound field with excellent linkage of left, right, top and bottom

sound spaces, and sound extensity effectively.

Overhead

Install the presence speakers to the ceiling above the listening position.

It delivers realistic overhead sound effects and sound field with excellent linkage of

front and rear sound spaces effectively.

Dolby Enabled SP

Use the Dolby Enabled speakers as the presence speakers.

This utilizes sounds reflected from ceiling and lets you enjoy overhead sounds only

from speakers that are placed at the same level as traditional speakers.

Note

Place the Dolby Enabled speakers on top of or near the traditional front speakers. A Dolby Enabled speaker

unit may be integrated into a traditional speaker. For details, refer to the instruction manual of the Dolby

Enabled speakers.

Notes on installation of ceiling speakers

When installing presence speakers to a ceiling, install them just above the listening

position, or the ceiling between the extensions of the front speakers and listening

position.

Notice

▪ Be sure to use speakers that are made for ceiling use and take anti-drop measures. Ask a qualified

contractor or dealer personnel for installation works.

Setting the speaker impedance

(U.S.A. and Canada models only)

Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When connecting

6-ohm speakers, set the speaker impedance to “6 Ω MIN”.

Before connecting speakers, connect the power cable to an AC

wall outlet.

While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press z

(power).

(power)

STRAIGHT

Check that “SP IMP.” is displayed on the front display.

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

STEREO

PARTY

TUNED

ZONE

3 B2 A

VOL .

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

MUT E VI RTU AL

SP IMP.••8¬MIN

Press STRAIGHT to select “6 Ω MIN”.

Press z (power) to set the unit to standby mode and remove the

power cable from the AC wall outlet.

You are now ready to connect the speakers.

2 Connecting speakers

Connect the speakers placed in your room to the unit. The following diagrams provide connections for 5.1- and 7.1-channel system as an example. For other systems, connect

speakers while referring to the connection diagram for the 5.1‑channel system.

Notice

▪ Remove the unit’s power cable from an AC wall outlet and turn off the subwoofer before connecting the speakers.

▪ The speaker has the polarity (+/-). Connect the speaker cable correctly between the positive (+) terminal of the unit and the speaker, and also between the negative (-) terminal of them.

Cables required for connection (commercially available)

Speaker cables (x the number of speakers)

–

Audio pin cable (x1: for connecting a subwoofer)

R E

2 1

7 6

Audio pin cable

Use a subwoofer with built-in amplifier.

Subwoofer

Surround (L)Surround (R)

CenterFront (R) Front (L)

10 mm

(3/8”)

Surround back (R) Surround back (L)

Presence (R) Presence (L)

* You cannot use the surround back speakers and the presence

speakers at the same time.

Precaution for connecting of the speaker cables

▪ Prepare speaker cables in a place away from the unit, to avoid accidentally dropping wire

strands into the unit's interior which could result in a short circuit or malfunction of the unit.

▪ Improper connecting of the speaker cables may cause short circuit and also damage the unit

or the speakers.

– Twist the bare wires of the speaker cables firmly together.

– Do not let the bare wires of the speaker cable touch one

another.

– Do not let the bare wires of the speaker cable come into

contact with the unit’s metal parts (rear panel and screws).

▪ If “Check SP Wires” appear on the front display when the unit is turned on, turn off the unit,

and then check the speaker cables short circuit.

Connecting speaker cables

Speaker cables have two wires. One is for connecting the negative (-) terminals of the

unit and the speaker to each other, and the other is for the positive (+) terminals. If the

wires are colored to prevent confusion, connect the black wire to the negative and the

other wire to the positive terminal.

Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from the ends of

the speaker cable, and twist the bare wires of the cable firmly

together.

Loosen the speaker terminal.

Insert the bare wires of the cable into the gap on the side (upper

right or bottom left) of the terminal.

Tighten the terminal.

FRONT

+ (red)

- (black)

Using a banana plug

(U.S.A. and Canada models only)

Tighten the speaker terminal.

Insert a banana plug into the end of the terminal.

FRONT

Banana plug

Connecting the subwoofer (with built-in amplifier)

Use an audio pin cable to connect the subwoofer.

AUDIO 3

Audio pin cable

Connecting front speakers that support bi-amp

connections

When using front speakers that support bi-amp connections, connect them to the

FRONT terminals and

SURROUND BACK/PRESENCE/BI-AMP/ZONE B terminals. For

details, see “Playing back more high-quality sounds with bi-amp

connections” (p.81).

Note

Surround back speakers, presence speakers, bi-amp speakers or Zone B speakers cannot be connected

simultaneously.

Connecting Zone B speakers

The Zone A/B function allows you to playback an input source in the room where the

unit is installed (Zone A) and in another room (Zone B). To connect the Zone B

speakers, see “Playing back music in multiple rooms”

(p.82).

Note

Surround back speakers, presence speakers, bi-amp speakers or Zone B speakers cannot be connected

simultaneously.

3 Connecting a TV/playback devices

The unit is equipped with a variety of input jacks

including HDMI input jacks to allow you to connect

different types of playback devices. For information on

how to connect a Bluetooth device or a USB storage

device, see the following pages.

• Connecting a Bluetooth device (p.69)

• Connecting a USB storage device (p.73)

Input/output jacks and cables

Video/audio jacks

HDMI jacks

Transmit digital video and digital sound through a

single jack. Use an HDMI cable.

HDMI cable

Note

▪ Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo. We

recommend using a cable less than 5.0 m (16.4 ft) long to

prevent signal quality degradation.

▪ The unit’s HDMI jacks support the HDMI Control, Audio

Return Channel (ARC), and 3D and 4K Ultra HD video

transmission (through output) features.

▪ Use a Premium High Speed HDMI Cable or Premium High

Speed Cable with Ethernet to enjoy 3D or 4K Ultra HD videos.

Video jacks

VIDEO jacks

Transmit analog video signals. Use a video pin

cable.

Video pin cable

Audio jacks

OPTICAL jack

Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital optical

cable. If there is a protective cap on the tip of the

cable, remove it before using the cable.

OPTICAL

Digital optical cable

COAXIAL jacks

Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital coaxial

cable.

Digital coaxial cable

AUDIO jacks

(Stereo L/R jacks)

Transmit analog stereo audio signals. Use a stereo

pin cable (RCA cable).

Stereo pin cable

(Stereo mini jack)

Transmits analog stereo audio signals. Use a

stereo mini-plug cable.

Stereo mini-plug cable

Connecting a TV

Connect a TV to the unit so that video input to the unit can be output to the TV. You

can also enjoy playback of TV audio on the unit.

To maximize the performance of the unit, we recommend connecting a TV with an

HDMI cable.

HDMI connection

Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and a digital optical cable.

HDMI

OPTICAL

O O

HDMI

OPTICAL

O O

The unit (rear)

AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL) jack

HDMI OUT jack HDMI input

Audio output

(digital optical)

Note

▪ A digital optical cable connection allows audio from the TV to be played back on the unit. A digital optical

cable connection is not needed in the following cases:

– If your TV supports Audio Return Channel (ARC)

– If you will receive TV broadcasts only from the set-top box

▪ If you connect a TV that supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit’s

power and volume with the TV’s remote control.

To use HDMI Control and ARC, you need to configure the HDMI settings on the unit.

For details on the settings, see “Information on HDMI”

(p.132).

About Audio Return Channel (ARC)

▪ ARC allows audio signals to travel both ways. If you connect a TV that supports ARC to the unit with a

single HDMI cable, you can output video/audio to the TV or input TV audio to the unit.

▪ When using ARC, connect a TV with an HDMI cable that supports ARC.

Composite video connection

When connecting any video device with a video pin cable, connect the TV to the

MONITOR OUT

(VIDEO) jack.

Note

▪ If you connect your TV to the unit with a cable other than HDMI, video input to the unit via HDMI cannot be

output to the TV.

▪ Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI.

▪ If you will receive TV broadcasts only from the set-top box, you do not need to make an audio cable

connection between the TV and the unit.

VIDEO (composite video) connection

Connect the TV to the unit with a video pin cable and a digital optical cable.

MONITOR OUT

VIDEO

OPTICAL

O O

The unit (rear)

AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL) jack

MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack

Video input

(composite video)

Audio output

(digital optical)

Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players)

Connect video devices such as BD/DVD players, set-top boxes (STBs) and game

consoles to the unit. Depending on the video/audio output jacks available on your

video device, choose one of the following connections. We recommend using an

HDMI connection if the video device has an HDMI output jack.

Note

If the combination of video/audio input jacks available on the unit does not match your video device, change

its combination according to the output jacks of your device (p.28).

HDMI connection

Connect a video device to the unit with an HDMI cable.

HDMI

The unit (rear)

HDMI OUT jack

HDMI 1–4 jacks

Video device

Note

To watch videos input to the HDMI 1–4 jacks, you need to connect your TV to the HDMI OUT jack of the unit

(p.26).

Composite video connection

Connect a video device to the unit with a video pin cable and an audio cable (digital

coaxial or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit) depending on the

audio output jacks available on your video device.

Output jacks on video device

Input jacks on the unit

Video Audio

Composite video

Digital coaxial AV 1 (VIDEO + COAXIAL)

Analog stereo AV 2–3 (VIDEO + AUDIO)

Digital optical

You need to change the combination

of video/audio input jacks (p.28).

COAXIAL

VIDEO

COAXIAL

VIDEO

AV 1

C C

The unit (rear)

AV 1 (COAXIAL) jack or AV 2–3

(AUDIO) jacks

AV 1–3 (VIDEO) jacks

Video output

(composite video)

Audio output

(digital coaxial or analog

stereo)

Video device

Note

If you connect a video device to the unit via composite video connection, you need to connect your TV to the

MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack of the unit (p.26).

Changing the combination of video/audio input jacks

If the combination of video/audio input jacks available on the unit does not match your

video device, change its combination according to the output jacks of your device.

You can connect a video device that has the following video/audio output jacks.

Output jacks on video device Input jacks on the unit

Video Audio Video Audio

HDMI

Digital optical HDMI 1–4 AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL)

Digital coaxial HDMI 1–4

AUDIO 2 (COAXIAL)

AV 1 (COAXIAL)

Analog stereo HDMI 1–4

AUDIO 3 (AUDIO)

AV 2–3 (AUDIO)

Composite video Digital optical AV 1–3 (VIDEO) AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL)

Necessary setting

For example, if you have connected a video device to AV 2 (VIDEO) and AUDIO 1

(OPTICAL) jack of the unit, change the combination setting as follows.

VIDEO

OPTICAL

O O

The unit (rear)

AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL) jack

AV 2 (VIDEO) jack

Video output

(composite video)

Audio output

(digital optical)

Set-top box

After connecting external devices (such as a TV and playback

devices) and power cable of the unit, turn on the unit.

Press INPUT to select “AV 2” (video input jack to be used) as

the input source.

Press OPTION.

ENTER

SETUP OPTION

TOP MENU

POP-UP/MENU

MEMORY

DISPLAY

RETURN

BLUE

YELLOWGREEN

RED

STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS

ENTER

SETUP OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

SCENE

DVD

NET

RADIO

HDMI

AUDIO

1 2 3

BLUETOOTH

USB

1 2 3

1 2 3 4

NET

AUX

TUNING PRESET

HOME

MEMORY

DISPLAY

RETURN

BLUE

YELLOWGREEN

RED

SLEEP

ZONE A ZONE B

SETU

P O

TOP MENU

POP-UP/MENU

MEMORY

DISPLAY

RETURN

BLUE

YELL

REE

P O

OPTION

ENTER

Cursor keys

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Audio In” and press

ENTER.

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

STEREO

PARTY

TUNED

ZONE

3 B2 A

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

MUT E VI RTU AL

VOL .

Audio In

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “AUDIO 1” (audio input

jack to be used).

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

STEREO

PARTY

TUNED

ZONE

3 B2 A

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

MUT E VI RTU AL

VOL .

Audio•••AUDIO1

Press OPTION.

This completes the necessary settings.

If you select “AV 2” as the input source by pressing INPUT, the video/audio

played back on the video device will be output from the unit.

Connecting audio devices (such as CD players)

Connect audio devices such as CD players and MD players to the unit. Depending on

the audio output jacks available on your audio device, choose one of the following

connections.

Audio output jacks on audio device Audio input jacks on the unit

Digital optical AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL)

Digital coaxial

AUDIO 2 (COAXIAL)

AV 1 (COAXIAL)

Analog stereo

AUDIO 3 (AUDIO)

AV 2–3 (AUDIO)

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

C C

O O

The unit (rear)

AV 1–3 jacks

AUDIO 1–3 jacks

Audio output

(either digital optical, digital coaxial,

or analog stereo)

Audio device

Connecting to the jack on the front panel

Use the AUX jack on the front panel to temporarily connect devices such as portable

audio players to the unit.

Before making a connection, stop playback on the device and turn down the volume

on the unit.

PROGRAM

TONE CONTROL

STRAIGHT

(CONNECT)

AUX USB

AUDIO

5V 1A

PHONES

SILENT CINEMA

The unit (front)

Portable audio player

If you select “AUX” as the input source by pressing AUX, the audio played back on the

device will be output from the unit.

Note

▪ You need to prepare the audio cable that matches the output jacks on your device.

▪ For details on how to connect a USB storage device, see “Connecting a USB storage device” (p.73).

4 Connecting the radio antennas

FM/AM antennas (Except for U.K., Europe, Australia

and Russia models)

Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit.

Fix the end of the FM antenna to a wall, and place the AM antenna on a flat surface.

The unit (rear)

FM antenna

AM antenna

Assembling and connecting the AM antenna

ReleaseHold down Insert

Note

▪ Unwind only the length of cable needed from the AM antenna unit.

▪ The wires of the AM antenna have no polarity.

DAB/FM antenna (U.K., Europe, Australia and Russia

models)

Connect the supplied DAB/FM antenna to the unit and fix the antenna ends to a wall.

The unit (rear)

DAB/FM antenna

Note

▪ The antenna should be stretched out horizontally.

▪ If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the height, direction or placement of the DAB/FM

antenna.

5 Preparing for connecting to a network

Connect the unit to a router (access point) with a network cable, or prepare the

wireless antenna for establishing a wireless network connection.

You can enjoy Internet radio or music files stored on media servers, such as PCs and

Network Attached Storage (NAS), on the unit.

Connecting a network cable

Connect the unit to your router with a commercially-available STP network cable

(CAT-5 or higher straight cable).

LAN

WAN

Network Attached Storage

(NAS)

Internet

Modem

Wireless

router

Network cable

The unit (rear)

Note

▪ If you are using a router that supports DHCP, you do not need to configure any network settings for the

unit, as the network parameters (such as the IP address) will be assigned automatically to it. You only

need to configure the network settings if your router does not support DHCP or if you want to configure the

network parameters manually (

p.108).

▪ You can check whether the network parameters (such as IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in

“Information” (p.108) in the “Setup” menu.

▪ Some security software installed on your PC or the firewall settings of network devices (such as a router)

may block the access of the unit to the network devices or the Internet. In these cases, configure the

security software or firewall settings appropriately.

▪ Each server must be connected to the same subnet as the unit.

▪ To use the service via the Internet, broadband connection is strongly recommended.

Preparing a wireless antenna

If you connect the unit wirelessly, erect the wireless antenna.

For information on how to connect the unit to a wireless network, see “Connecting to a

network wirelessly”

(p.39).

Erect the wireless antenna.

WIRELESS

Note

Do not apply excessive force on the wireless antenna. Doing so may damage the antenna.

6 Connecting the power cable

After all the connections are complete, plug in the power cable.

The unit (rear)

To an AC wall outlet

7 Selecting an on-screen menu language

Select the desired on-screen menu language.

Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.

Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the

unit (HDMI OUT jack).

Note

▪ Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. If

not, carry out operations while viewing the front display.

▪ When you turn on the unit for the first time, a message regarding the network setup appears.

You can switch the language on this message screen.

Press SETUP.

Use the cursor keys to select “Language” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys to select the desired language.

To exit from the menu, press SETUP.

Note

The information on the front display is provided in English only.

8 Configuring the necessary speaker settings

If you use any of the following speaker configurations, follow the procedure below to

configure the corresponding speaker settings manually before performing YPAO.

• Using surround back speakers (p.18), bi-amp connection (p.81) or Zone B

speakers (p.

82)

• Using the surround speakers for front 5.1-channel system (Virtual CINEMA FRONT)

(p.

19)

• Using the presence speakers for Dolby Atmos or DTS:X playback (p.21)

Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.

Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the

unit (HDMI OUT jack).

Note

If you turn on the unit for the first time, the message regarding the network setup appears. For now,

press RETURN and proceed to Step 3.

Press SETUP.

Use the Cursor keys to select “Speaker” and press ENTER.

Use the Cursor keys to select “Configuration” and press ENTER.

Configure the corresponding speaker settings.

▪ When using surround back speakers, bi-amp connections or Zone B

speakers, select

“Power Amp Assign” (p.94), then select your speaker

system.

▪ When using the surround speakers for front 5.1-channel system (Virtual

CINEMA FRONT), select “Virtual CINEMA FRONT” (p.97), then select

“On”.

▪ When using the presence speakers for Dolby Atmos or DTS:X playback,

select

“Layout” (p.96), then select your presence speaker layout.

To exit from the menu, press SETUP.

9 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)

The Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) function detects speaker

connections, measures the distances from them to your listening position(s), and then

automatically optimizes the speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic

parameters, to suit your room.

Note

▪ When you use the front 5.1-channel speaker (Virtual CINEMA FRONT) configuration (p.19), set “Virtual

CINEMA FRONT” (p.97) in the “

Setup

” menu to “On” beforehand.

▪ Please note the following when using YPAO.

– Use YPAO after connecting a TV and speakers to the unit.

– During the measuring process, test tones are output at high volume. Ensure that the test tones do not

frighten small children.

– During the measuring process, you cannot adjust the volume.

– During the measuring process, keep the room as quiet as possible.

– Do not connect headphones.

– Do not stand between the speakers and the YPAO microphone during the measurement process (about

3 minutes).

Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.

Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the

unit (HDMI OUT jack).

Note

Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. If

not, carry out operations while viewing the front display.

Turn on the subwoofer and set the volume to half. If the crossover

frequency is adjustable, set it to maximum.

VOLUME HIGH CUT

CROSSOVER/

MIN MAXMIN MAX

Place the YPAO microphone at your listening position and

connect it to the YPAO MIC jack on the front panel.

Note

Place the YPAO microphone at your listening position (same height as your ears). We recommend

the use of a tripod as a microphone stand. You can use the tripod screws to stabilize the

microphone.

1 2

4 5

The unit (front)

Ear height

The following screen appears on the TV.

“Power Amp Assign” setting (p.94)

To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to select “Start”

and press ENTER.

The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER to start the

measurement immediately.

Note

To stop the measurement temporarily, press RETURN and follow the procedure in “Error

messages”

(p.37).

The following screen appears on the TV when the measurement finishes.

The number of speakers (front side/rear side/subwoofer)

Speaker distance (nearest/farthest)

Adjustment range of speaker output level

Warning message (if available)

Note

▪ If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1) appears, see “Error

messages”

(p.37)

or “Warning messages” (p.38).

▪ A speaker with a problem is indicated by blinking of the speaker indicators in the front display.

▪ If multiple warnings are given (when operating with the front display), use the cursor keys (q/w)

to check the other warning messages.

Confirm the results displayed on the screen and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “SAVE” and press ENTER.

The adjusted speaker settings are applied.

Note

To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”.

Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.

This completes optimization of the speaker settings.

Notice

▪ The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere where it could be

exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on top of AV equipment).

Error messages

If any error message is displayed during the measurement, resolve the problem and

perform YPAO again.

Error message

TV screen

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

STEREO

PARTY

TUNED

ZONE

3 B2 A

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

MUT E VI RTU AL

E-5:NOISY

VOL .

E-5:NOISY

Front display

Procedure to handle errors

Check the content of error message and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select the desired operation.

To exit the YPAO measurement:

Select “EXIT” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Exit” and press ENTER.

Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.

To retry the YPAO measurement from beginning:

Select “RETRY” and press ENTER.

To proceed with the current YPAO measurement (for E-5 and E-9

only):

Select “PROCEED” and press ENTER.

Error message Cause Remedy

E-1:No Front SP

(E-1:NO FRNT SP)

Front speakers are not

detected.

Exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then

check the speaker connections.

E-2:No Sur. SP

(E-2:NO SUR SP)

One of the surround

speakers cannot be

detected.

E-3:No F.PRNS SP

(E-3:NO FPR SP)

One of the presence

speakers cannot be

detected.

E-4:SBR → SBL

(E-4:SBR → SBL)

A surround back speaker is

connected to the R side

only.

When using only one surround back

speaker, you need to connect it to the

SINGLE

jack (L side). Exit YPAO, turn off

the unit, and then reconnect the speaker.

E-5:Noisy

(

E-5:NOISY)

The noise is too loud.

Keep the room quiet and retry YPAO. If

you select “PROCEED”, YPAO takes the

measurement again and ignores any

noise detected.

E-6:Check Sur.

(E-6:CHECK SUR)

Surround back speakers are

connected, but no surround

speakers are connected.

Surround speakers need to be

connected in order to use surround back

speakers. Exit YPAO, turn off the unit,

and then reconnect the speakers.

E-7:No MIC

(E-7:NO MIC)

The YPAO microphone has

been removed.

Connect the YPAO microphone to the

YPAO MIC jack firmly and retry YPAO.

E-8:No Signal

(E-8:NO SIGNAL)

The YPAO microphone

cannot detect test tones.

Connect the YPAO microphone to the

YPAO MIC

jack firmly and retry YPAO. If

this error occurs repeatedly, contact the

nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or

service center.

E-9:User Cancel

(

E-9:CANCEL)

The measurement has been

canceled.

Retry or exit YPAO as necessary.

E-10:Internal Err.

(E-10:INTERNAL)

An internal error has

occurred.

Exit YPAO, and turn off and on the unit. If

this error occurs repeatedly, contact the

nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or

service center.

Note

Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.

Warning messages

If a warning message is displayed after the measurement, you can still save the

measurement results by following on-screen instructions.

However, we recommend you perform YPAO again in order to use the unit with the

optimal speaker settings.

Warning message

TV screen

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

STEREO

PARTY

TUNED

ZONE

3 B2 A

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

MUT E VI RTU AL

VOL .

W-1:PHASE

Problem speaker (blinks)

Front display

Procedure to handle warnings

Check the content of warning message and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select the desired operation.

To save the measurement results:

Select “SAVE” and press ENTER.

To discard the measurement result:

Select “CANCEL” and press ENTER.

Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.

Warning message Cause Remedy

W-1:Out of Phase

(W-1:PHASE)

A speaker cable may be

connected with the reverse

polarity (+/-).

Check the cable connections (+/-) of the

problem speaker.

If the speaker is connected incorrectly:

Turn off the unit, reconnect the speaker

cable.

If the speaker is connected correctly:

Depending on the type of speakers or

room environment, this message may

appear even if the speakers are

connected correctly. In this case, you

can ignore the message.

W-2:Over Distance

(W-2:DISTANCE)

A speaker is placed more

than 24 m (80 ft) from the

listening position.

Exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and place the

problem speaker within 24 m (80 ft) of the

listening position.

W-3:Level Error

(W-3:LEVEL)

There are significant volume

differences between the

speakers.

Check the usage environment and cable

connections (+/-) of each speaker, and

the volume of the subwoofer. If there is

any problem, exit YPAO, turn off the unit,

and then reconnect speaker cable or

correct the speaker positions. We

recommend using the same speakers or

speakers with specifications that are as

similar as possible.

Note

Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.

10 Connecting to a network wirelessly

Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point) or a mobile device by establishing

a wireless connection.

Note

When you connect the unit to a router with a network cable, you need not do this procedure.

Selecting the connection method

Select a connection method according to your network environment.

Connecting with a wireless router (access point)

Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point).

You can enjoy Internet radio, AirPlay, or music files stored on media servers (PC/NAS)

on the unit.

You can also use the application for smartphone / tablet “AV CONTROLLER” (p.9) to

control the unit from mobiles devices or enjoy music files stored on mobiles devices on

the unit.

Mobile device

(such as iPhone)

Internet

Modem

Wireless router

The unit

For details on connection, see “Connecting the unit to a wireless network” (p.40).

Note

▪ You cannot use the wireless LAN connection simultaneously with the wired LAN connection (p.31) or

Wireless Direct (

p.45).

▪ If the unit and the wireless router (access point) are too far apart, the unit may not connect to a wireless

router (access point). In such case, place them close to each other.

Connecting without a wireless router (access point)

Connect a mobile device to the unit directly.

You can use the application for smartphone / tablet “AV CONTROLLER” (p.9) to

control the unit from mobiles devices or enjoy music files stored on mobiles devices on

the unit.

Mobile device

(such as iPhone)

The unit

For details on connection, see “Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly

(Wireless Direct)”

(p.45).

Note

▪ You cannot use Wireless Direct simultaneously with the wired LAN connection (p.31) or the wireless LAN

connection (p.

40).

▪ When Wireless Direct is enabled, the unit cannot connect to the Internet. Therefore, you cannot use any

kind of Internet service such as Internet radio.

▪ Also the mobile device cannot connect to the Internet, so we recommend you disconnect the mobile

device from the unit.

Connecting the unit to a wireless network

There are several methods to connect the unit to a wireless network.

Select a connection method according to your environment.

• The connection setting to MusicCast network.

– “Setting the MusicCast” (p.47)

• The connection settings on iOS devices

– “Sharing the iOS device setting” (p.40)

• The WPS button configuration method

– “Using the WPS button configuration” (p.41)

• Other connection methods

– “Using other connection methods” (p.42)

Sharing the iOS device setting

You can easily setup a wireless connection by applying the connection settings on iOS

devices (iPhone/iPad/iPod touch).

Before proceeding, confirm that your iOS device is connected to a wireless router.

Note

▪ The sharing process will restore the default settings for the following.

– Network settings

– Bluetooth settings

– USB and network items registered as shortcuts

– Internet radio stations registered to “Favorites”

– Account information for the network services

▪ You need iOS device with iOS 7 or later. (The following procedure is a setup example for iOS 10.)

▪ This configuration does not work if the security method of your wireless router (access point) is WEP. In

this case, use other connection method.

Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.

Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the

unit (HDMI OUT jack).

Note

Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI.

Press SETUP.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network Connection” and

press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Wireless(Wi-Fi)” and press

ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “WAC(iOS)” and press

ENTER.

Read the on-screen description and press ENTER.

Note

When you use wired network connection, a warning message is displayed on the screen.

Disconnect the network cable from the unit, and then press

ENTER.

On the iOS device, select the unit as the AirPlay speaker in the Wi-

Fi screen.

iOS 10 (example of English version)

The name of the unit

Select the network (access point) of which you want to share the

settings with the unit.

The network currently selected

Tap here to start setup

When the sharing process finishes, the unit is automatically connected to

the selected network (access point) and “

Completed” appears on the

front display.

If “Not shared” or “Not connected” appears, press ENTER to repeat from

step 5 or try another connection method.

To exit from the menu, press SETUP.

Using the WPS button configuration

You can easily set up a wireless connection with one push of the WPS button.

Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.

Hold down INFO (WPS) on the front panel for 3 seconds.

“Press WPS button on Access Point” appears on the front display.

Push the WPS button on the wireless router (access point).

When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on the front

display.

If “Not connected” appears, repeat from step 1 or try another connection

method.

Note

▪ Depending on the model of the wireless router (access point), the unit may not connect to it. In this case,

try connection with “Access Point Scan” or “Manual Setting” (p.42).

▪ You can use “WPS Button” (p.42) in the “Setup” menu to set up a wireless connection with the WPS

button.

About WPS

▪ WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) is a standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance, which allows easy

establishment of a wireless home network.

Using other connection methods

If your wireless router (access point) does not support WPS button configuration

method, follow the procedure below to configure the wireless network settings.

Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.

Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the

unit (HDMI OUT jack).

Note

Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI.

Press SETUP.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network Connection” and

press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Wireless(Wi-Fi)” and press

ENTER.

Note

The unit may connect automatically to the access point to which it has connected previously. In this

case, the message indicating the successful connection will appear. You can ignore this message

and proceed to the next step.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select the desired connection

method and press ENTER.

The following connection methods are available.

WPS Button

You can set up a wireless connection with the WPS button while

viewing the TV screen. Follow the instructions displayed on the TV

screen.

WAC(iOS)

See “Sharing the iOS device setting” (p.40).

Access Point Scan

You can set up a wireless connection by searching for an access

point. For details on settings, see “Searching for an access

point” (p.43).

Manual Setting

You can setup a wireless connection by entering the required

information (such as SSID) manually. For details on settings, see

“Setting up the wireless connection manually”

(p.

44).

PIN Code

You can set up a wireless connection by entering the unit’s PIN

code into the wireless router (access point). The method is available

if the wireless router (access point) supports the WPS PIN code

method. For details on settings, see “Using the WPS PIN

code” (p.45).

Searching for an access point

If you select “Access Point Scan” as the connection method, the unit starts

searching for access points. After a while, the list of available access points

appears on the TV screen.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select the desired access point

and press ENTER.

The wireless connection setting screen appears on the TV.

Access Point X

Press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the security key.

Button functions

[¬]/[→]:

Moves the cursor left and right.

[Aa]: Switches the letter cases (upper/lower).

[BKSP]: Deletes the character to the left of the selected one.

[Space]: Enters a space.

[DEL]: Deletes the selected character.

When finished entering the key, select “OK” to return to the previous

screen.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Connect” and press

ENTER to start the connection process.

When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on the

TV screen.

If “Not connected” appears, repeat from step 1 or try another

connection method.

To exit from the menu, press SETUP.

Setting up the wireless connection manually

If you select “Manual Setting” as the connection method, the wireless connection

setting screen appears on the TV.

You need to setup the SSID (network name), encryption method and security key

for your network.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “SSID” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the SSID of the

access point.

When finished entering the key, select “OK” to return to the previous

screen.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Security” and the cursor

keys (e/r) to select the encryption method.

Choices

None, WEP, WPA-PSK(AES), Mixed Mode

Note

If you select “None”, the connection may be insecure since the communication is not

encrypted.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Security Key” and press

ENTER.

Note

If you select “None” in step 3, this item is not available.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the security key.

If you select “WEP” in step 3, enter either 5 or 13 character string, or

10 or 26 hexadecimal digits.

If you select the method other than “WEP” in step 3, enter either 8 to

63 character string, or 64 hexadecimal digits.

When finished entering the key, select “OK” to return to the previous

screen.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Connect” and press

ENTER to start the connection process.

When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on the

TV screen.

If “Not connected” appears, check that all the information is entered

correctly, and repeat from step 1.

To exit from the menu, press SETUP.

Using the WPS PIN code

If you select “PIN Code” as the connection method, the list of available access

points appears on the TV screen.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select the desired access point

and press ENTER.

The PIN code of the unit appears on the TV screen.

Enter the unit’s PIN code into the wireless router (access

point).

For details on settings, refer to the instruction manual of the wireless

router (access point).

Press ENTER to start the connection process.

When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on the

TV screen.

If “Not connected” appears, repeat from step 1 or try another

connection method.

To exit from the menu, press SETUP.

Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly

(Wireless Direct)

Follow the procedure below to connect a mobile device to the unit directly.

Note

Wireless Direct connection may be insecure since the communication is not strongly encrypted. The unit may

operate by playback operation on wireless devices connected to the unit without permission.

Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.

Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the

unit (HDMI OUT jack).

Note

Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI.

Press SETUP.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network Connection” and

press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Wireless Direct” and press

ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Security” and the cursor

keys (e/r) to select the encryption method.

Choices

None, WPA2-PSK(AES)

Note

If you select “None”, the connection may be insecure since the communication is not encrypted.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Security Key” and press

ENTER.

Note

If you select “None” in step 7, this item is not available.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the security key.

Enter either 8 to 63 character string, or 64 hexadecimal digits.

When finished entering the key, select “OK” to return to the previous

screen.

Note

Before proceeding to the next step, record the following information. These information will be

needed to configure the Wi-Fi setting of a mobile device.

▪ SSID displayed on the TV screen

▪ Security key you have just entered

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Save” and press ENTER to

save the setting.

This completes the settings and “Completed” appears on the TV screen.

Next, configure the Wi-Fi settings of a mobile device.

Configure the Wi-Fi settings of a mobile device.

For details on settings of your mobile device, refer to the instruction

manual of the mobile device.

Enable the Wi-Fi function on the mobile device.

Select the SSID displayed in step 9 from the list of available access

points.

When you are prompted for a password, enter the security key

displayed in step 9.

To exit from the menu, press SETUP.

11 Setting the MusicCast

MusicCast is a brand new wireless musical solution from Yamaha, allowing you to

share music among all of your rooms with a variety of devices. You can enjoy music

from your smartphone, PC, NAS drive and music streaming service anywhere in your

house with one easy-to-use application. For more details and a lineup of MusicCast

compatible products, refer to the following site:

http://www.yamaha.com/musiccast/

• Seamlessly control all MusicCast compatible devices with the dedicated application

“MusicCast CONTROLLER”.

• Link a MusicCast compatible device to another device in a different room and play

them back simultaneously.

• Play back music from music streaming services. (The compatible music streaming

services may differ depending on your region and product).

Note

Access the Yamaha Downloads site (http://download.yamaha.com/) to download MusicCast Setup Guide.

MusicCast CONTROLLER

To use the network features on the MusicCast compatible device, you need the

dedicated application “MusicCast CONTROLLER” for the operation. Search for the

free application “MusicCast CONTROLLER” on the App Store or Google Play and

install it to your device.

Adding the unit to the MusicCast network

Follow the procedure below to add the unit to the MusicCast network. You can also

configure the unit’s wireless network settings at once.

Note

The SSID and security key for your network will be needed.

Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.

Tap the “MusicCast CONTROLLER” application icon on your

mobile device and tap “Setup”.

Note

If you have already connected other MusicCast compatible devices to the network, tap “Settings”

and then “Add New Device”.

Operate the “MusicCast CONTROLLER” application following the

on screen instructions, then hold down CONNECT on the front

panel of the unit for 5 seconds.

CONNECT

Operate the “MusicCast CONTROLLER” application following the

onscreen instructions to set up the network.

Operate the “MusicCast CONTROLLER” application to playback.

Note

▪ AirPlay and DSD audio cannot be delivered.

▪ When the direct playback mode is enabled, input sources other than the network sources and

USB cannot be delivered.

▪ If you configure the unit's wireless settings with this method, the signal strength indicator of the

front display lights up when the unit is connecting to a network (even if a wired connection is

used).

▪ You can interlock the power of MusicCast devices with the power of the unit (the MusicCast

master). For details, see

“MusicCast Link Power Interlock” (p.110) in the “Setup” menu.

PLAYBACK

Basic playback procedure

Enjoying playback

Turn on the external devices (such as a TV or BD/DVD player)

connected to the unit.

Use the input selection keys to select an input source.

HDMI

AUDIO

1 2 3

BLUETOOTH

USB

1 2 3

1 2

NET

AUX

SLEEP

ZONE A ZONE B

STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS

ENTER

SETUP OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

SCENE

DVD

NET

RADIO

HDMI

AUDIO

1 2 3

BLUETOOTH

USB

1 2 3

1 2 3 4

NET

AUX

TUNING PRESET

HOME

MEMORY

DISPLAY

RETURN

BLUE

YELLOWGREEN

RED

SLEEP

ZONE A ZONE B

SLEEP

ZONE

Input selection keys

Start playback on the external device or select a radio station.

Refer to the instruction manual for the external device.

For details on the following operations, see the corresponding pages.

▪ “Listening to FM/AM radio (Except for U.K., Europe, Australia and Russia

models)” (p.56

)

▪ “Listening to DAB radio (U.K., Europe, Australia and Russia

models)” (p.60

)

▪ “Listening to FM radio (U.K., Europe, Australia and Russia

models)” (p.65

)

▪ “Playing back music stored on a Bluetooth

device” (p.69

)

▪ “Playing back music stored on a USB storage device” (p.73)

▪ “Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.76)

▪ “Listening to Internet radio” (p.79)

▪ “Playing back music with AirPlay” (p.71)

Press VOLUME to adjust the volume.

SETUP OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

SCENE

DVD

NET

RADIO

ZONE

A ZONE

STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS

ENTER

SETUP OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

SCENE

DVD

NET

RADIO

HDMI

AUDIO

1 2 3

BLUETOOTH

USB

1 2 3

1 2 3 4

NET

AUX

TUNING PRESET

HOME

MEMORY

DISPLAY

RETURN

BLUE

YELLOWGREEN

RED

SLEEP

ZONE A ZONE B

SETUP

OPTIO

TOP MENU

PROGRAM

POP-UP/MENU

SCENE

NET

RADI

ZONE

VOLUME

MUTE

Note

▪ To mute the audio output, press MUTE. Press MUTE again to unmute.

▪ To adjust the treble/bass settings, use the “Option” menu or TONE CONTROL on the front panel

(p.88).

Switching information on the front display

Press INFO repeatedly to select between the various display

items.

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

STEREO

PARTY

TUNED

ZONE

3 B2 A

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

MUT E VI RTU AL

VOL .

Audio Decoder

Item name

About 3 seconds after a display item is selected, its corresponding

information appears.

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

STEREO

PARTY

TUNED

ZONE

3 B2 A

SBL SB SBR

MUT E VI RTU AL

VOL .

†‡ Dsur

FPL FPR

Information

Note

Available items vary depending on the selected input source. The displayed item can also be

applied separately to each input group which is shown in the table below and divided by ruled lines.

Currently input source Item

HDMI

AUX

AUDIO

Input (input source name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio

Decoder (decoder name*)

Bluetooth

USB

Song (song title), Artist (artist name), Album (album name), DSP

Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*)

SERVER

AirPlay

Song (song title), Artist (artist name), Album (album name), DSP

Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*), IP

Address, Ethernet MAC, Wi-Fi MAC

NET RADIO

Song (song title), Album (album name), Station (station name), DSP

Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*), IP

Address, Ethernet MAC, Wi-Fi MAC

MusicCast Link

DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*),

IP Address, Ethernet MAC, Wi-Fi MAC

TUNER (FM/AM)

Frequency (frequency), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio

Decoder (decoder name*)

(U.K. and Europe models only)

Radio Data System data is also available when the unit is tuned into a

Radio Data System broadcasting station (p.68).

TUNER (DAB)

See “Displaying the DAB information” (p.63) for details.

* The name of the audio decoder currently activated is displayed. If no audio decoder

is activated, “Decoder Off” appears.

Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE)

The SCENE function allows you to select the assigned input source, sound program,

Compressed Music Enhancer on/off, and target zones with just one touch.

Selecting a registered scene

Press SCENE.

The input source and settings registered to the corresponding scene are

selected. The unit turns on automatically when it is in standby mode.

STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS

ENTER

SETUP OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

SCENE

DVD

NET

RADIO

HDMI

AUDIO

1 2 3

BLUETOOTH

USB

1 2 3

1 2 3 4

NET

AUX

TUNING PRESET

HOME

MEMORY

DISPLAY

RETURN

BLUE

YELLOWGREEN

RED

SLEEP

ZONE A ZONE B

SETUP OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

SCENE

DVD

NET

RADIO

ZONE

A ZONE

SETUP

OPTIO

TOP MENU

MUT

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

ZONE

SCENE

By default, the following settings are registered for each scene.

SCENE

Input

HDMI1 AUDIO1 NET RADIO TUNER

Sound program

Sci-Fi STRAIGHT 7ch Stereo 7ch Stereo

Compressed Music

Enhancer

Off On On On

SCENE link playback

On On Off Off

Target zone

Zone A Zone A Zone A Zone A

Note

The SCENE link playback function allows you to automatically turn on the TV or start playback of an external

device connected to the unit via HDMI, in conjunction with a scene selection. To enable SCENE link

playback, set “SCENE” (p.100) in the “Setup” menu to “On”.

Registering a scene

Perform the following operations to prepare the settings you want

to assign to a scene.

▪ Select an input source (p.48)

▪ Select a sound program (p.51) or straight decode (p.54)

▪ Enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer (p.55)

▪ Enable/disable the audio output to Zone A/B (p.83)

Hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET Complete” appears

on the front display.

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

STEREO

PARTY

TUNED

ZONE

3 B2 A

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

MUT E VI RTU AL

VOL .

SET Complete

Selecting the sound mode

The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs and surround decoders that

allow you to enjoy playback sources with your favorite sound mode (such as sound

field effect or stereo playback).

STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS

ENTER

SETUP OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

SCENE

DVD

NET

RADIO

HDMI

AUDIO

1 2 3

BLUETOOTH

USB

1 2 3

1 2 3 4

NET

AUX

TUNING PRESET

HOME

MEMORY

DISPLAY

RETURN

BLUE

YELLOWGREEN

RED

SLEEP

ZONE A ZONE B

STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS

TUNING

PRESET

HOME

MEMORY

BLUE

YELLOWGREEN

RED

TUNING

PRESET

HOME

MEMORY

BLUE

YELL

REE

STRAIGHT

DIRECT

ENHANCER

BASS

SETUP OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

SCENE

DVD

NET

RADIO

ZONE

A ZONE

SETUP

OPTIO

TOP MENU

MUT

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

SCENE

NET

RADI

ZONE

PROGRAM

I want to enjoy viewing video sources such as movies, TV programs, or

games.

• Select a sound program suitable for each video source by pressing PROGRAM

repeatedly (

p.52).

I want to enjoy listening to music sources or stereo playback.

• Select a sound program suitable for music or stereo playback by pressing

PROGRAM

repeatedly (p.53).

I want to enjoy multichannel playback from 2-channel sources.

• Select a surround decoder in the “Option” menu (p.87).

I want to enjoy unprocessed sounds in original channels.

• Switch to the straight decode mode by pressing STRAIGHT (p.54).

I want to enjoy pure high fidelity sounds.

• Enable the direct playback mode by pressing DIRECT (p.55).

This mode reduces the electrical noise from other circuitry to allow you to enjoy Hi-Fi

sound quality.

I want to enjoy enhanced bass sounds.

• Enable Extra Bass by pressing BASS (p.55).

I want to enjoy listening to compressed music.

• Enable Compressed Music Enhancer by pressing ENHANCER (p.55).

This mode lets you enjoy listening to compressed music from Bluetooth devices, USB

devices, etc. as it gives the music additional depth and breadth (p.55).

Note

▪ The sound mode can be applied separately to each input source.

▪ You can check which speakers are currently outputting sound by looking at the speaker indicators on the

unit’s front panel (p.12).

Precaution for enjoying Dolby Atmos

▪ Dolby Atmos contents are decoded as Dolby TrueHD or Dolby Digital Plus in the following situations.

(Dolby Atmos PCM format is always decoded as Dolby Atmos.)

– Any of CINEMA DSP programs is selected.

– Neither surround back nor presence speakers are used.

– Headphones are used (2-channel playback).

▪ When the Dolby Atmos decoder is working, virtual surround processing (such as Virtual CINEMA

FRONT) (p.52) or Compressed Music Enhancer (p.55) does not work.

Precaution for enjoying DTS:X™

▪ DTS:X contents are decoded as DTS-HD format when any of CINEMA DSP programs is selected.

▪ When the DTS:X decoder is working, virtual surround processing (such as Virtual CINEMA FRONT)

(p.52), Dialogue Level (p.102), Extra Bass (p.96) or Compressed Music Enhancer (p.55) does

not work.

▪ When DTS:X contents are played back, you can adjust the volume of dialogue sounds in “DTS

Dialogue Control”

(p.102) in the “Setup” menu.

Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP 3D)

The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs that utilize Yamaha's original

DSP technology (CINEMA DSP 3D). It allows you to easily create sound fields like

actual movie theaters or concert halls in your room and enjoy natural stereoscopic

sound fields.

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

PARTY

TUNED

ZONE

3 B2 A

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

MUT E VI RTU AL

SLEEP

STEREO

VOL .

Sci-Fi

Sound program category

“CINEMA DSP” lights up

Sound program

Note

▪ You can adjust the sound field effect level in “DSP Level (DSP Level)” (p.88) in the “Option” menu.

▪ To use the conventional CINEMA DSP, set “CINEMA DSP 3D Mode” (p.101) in the “Setup” menu to “Off”.

Sound programs suitable for movies (MOVIE)

The following sound programs are optimized for viewing video sources, such as

movies, TV programs, and games.

Standard

This program creates a sound field that emphasizes the surround feeling

without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multichannel audio,

such as Dolby Digital and DTS. Its design is based on the concept of the

ideal movie theater, in which the audience is surrounded by beautiful

reverberations from the left, right, and rear.

Spectacle

This program delivers the scale and grandeur of spectacular movie

productions. It delivers an expansive sound space to match the

cinemascope wide-screen, and boasts a broad dynamic range,

providing everything from small delicate sounds to powerful loud booms.

Sci-Fi

This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of

the latest Sci-Fi and SFX movies. You can enjoy a variety of

cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear

separation between dialogue, sound effects, and background music.

Adventure

This program is ideal for reproducing the sound design of action and

adventure movies precisely. The sound field restrains reverberations, but

puts emphasis on reproducing a sensation of expansiveness on both

sides, powerful space expanded widely to the left and right. The

restrained depth creates a clear and powerful space, while also

maintaining the articulation of the sounds and the separation of the

channels.

Drama

This program features stable reverberations that match a wide range of

movie genres, from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The

reverberations are modest, but suitably stereophonic. The sound effects

and background music are reproduced with a gentle echo that does not

impinge on the articulation of the dialogue. You’ll never get tired listening

for long periods.

Mono Movie

This program reproduces monaural video sources, such as classic

movies, in an atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program

creates a pleasant space with depth, by adding breadth and the

appropriate reverberation to the original audio.

Sports

This program allows listeners to enjoy the rich vividness of sport

broadcasts and light entertainment programs. In sports broadcasts, the

commentators’ voices are positioned clearly at the center, while the

atmosphere inside the stadium is realistically conveyed by the peripheral

delivery of the sounds of the fans in a suitable space.

Action Game

This program is suitable for action games, such as car racing and

fighting games. The reality of, and emphasis on, various effects makes

the player feel like they are right in the middle of the action, allowing for

greater concentration. Use this program in combination with Compressed

Music Enhancer for a more dynamic and strong sound field.

Roleplaying Game

This program is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. This

program adds depth to the sound field for natural and realistic

reproduction of background music, special effects, and dialogue from a

wide variety of scenes. Use this program in combination with

Compressed Music Enhancer for a clearer and more spatial sound field.

Sound programs suitable for music (MUSIC)

The following sound programs are optimized for listening to music sources.

Hall in Munich

This program simulates a Munich concert hall with approximately 2,500

seats that uses stylish wood for the interior finishing. Fine, beautiful

reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The

listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the arena.

Hall in Vienna

This program simulates a 1700-seat, middle-sized concert hall with a

shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings

create extremely complex reverberations from all around the audience,

producing a very full, rich sound.

Chamber

This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling, like an

audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are

suitable for courtly music and chamber music.

Cellar Club

This program simulates an intimate concert venue with a low ceiling and

homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field delivers powerful sounds

that make you feel as if you are sitting in the front row in front of a small

stage.

The Roxy Theatre

This program creates the sound field of a 460-seat rock music concert

venue in Los Angeles. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the

hall.

The Bottom Line

This program creates the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a

famous New York jazz club once. The floor can seat 300 people to the

left and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound.

Music Video

This program allows you to enjoy videos of pop, rock, and jazz concerts,

as if you were there yourself. Immerse yourself in the hot concert

atmosphere thanks to the vividness of the singers and solos on stage, a

presence sound field that emphasizes the beat of rhythm instruments,

and a surround sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall.

Sound programs suitable for stereo playback (STEREO)

You can select stereo playback.

2ch Stereo

Use this program to mix down multichannel sources to 2 channels. When

multichannel signals are input, they are down mixed to 2 channels and

output from the front speakers (this program does not utilize CINEMA

DSP).

7ch Stereo

Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back

multichannel sources, the unit mixes down the source to 2 channels, and

then outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger

sound field and is ideal for background music at parties.

Note

CINEMA DSP 3D (p.52) and Virtual CINEMA DSP (p.53) do not work when “2ch Stereo” or “7ch Stereo” is

selected.

Enjoying sound field effects without surround speakers

(Virtual CINEMA DSP)

If you select one of the sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo) when no

surround speakers are connected, the unit automatically creates the surround sound

field using the front-side speakers.

Enjoying surround sound with 5 speakers placed in

front (Virtual CINEMA FRONT)

You can enjoy the surround sound even when the surround speakers are placed in

front.

When “Virtual CINEMA FRONT” (p.97) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, the unit

creates the virtual surround speakers in the rear side to allow you to enjoy

multichannel surround sound with the 5 speakers placed in the front.

Enjoying surround sound with headphones (SILENT

CINEMA)

You can enjoy surround or sound field effects, like a multichannel speaker system, with

stereo headphones by connecting the headphones to the

PHONES jack and selecting

a sound program or a surround decoder.

Enjoying unprocessed playback

You can play back input sources without any sound field effect processing.

Playing back in original channels (straight decode)

When the straight decode mode is enabled, the unit produces stereo sound from the

front speakers for 2-channel sources such as CDs, and produces unprocessed

multichannel sounds for multichannel sources.

Press STRAIGHT.

Each time you press the key, the straight decode mode is enabled or

disabled.

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

DRC

ZONE

3 B2 A

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

MUT E VI RTU AL

SLEEP

STEREO

PARTY

TUNED

YPAO

VOL.

ENHANCER

VOL .

STRAIGHT

Note

If “Virtual CINEMA FRONT” (p.97) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, Virtual CINEMA FRONT (p.53) works

when multichannel source is played back.

Playing back 2-channel sources in multichannel

(surround decoder)

The surround decoder enables unprocessed multichannel playback from 2-channel

sources. When a multichannel source is input, it works the same way as the straight

decode mode.

For details on each decoder see “Glossary” (p.127).

Press PROGRAM repeatedly to select a surround decoder.

The previously selected surround decoder is selected. You can change

the surround decoder in “Sur.Decode

” (p.87) in the “Option” menu.

STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS

ENTER

SETUP OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

SCENE

DVD

NET

RADIO

HDMI

AUDIO

1 2 3

BLUETOOTH

USB

1 2 3

1 2 3 4

NET

AUX

TUNING PRESET

HOME

MEMORY

DISPLAY

RETURN

BLUE

YELLOWGREEN

RED

SLEEP

ZONE A ZONE B

SETUP OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

SCENE

DVD

NET

RADIO

ZONE

A ZONE

SETUP

OPTIO

TOP MENU

MUT

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

SCENE

NET

RADI

ZONE

PROGRAM

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

STEREO

PARTY

TUNED

ZONE

3 B2 A

SBL SB SBR

MUT E VI RTU AL

VOL .

†‡ Dsur

FPL FPR

“SUR. DECODE” appears

Auto

Uses the decoder automatically selected by input source. The

DTS Neural:X decoder is selected for DTS sources and the Dolby

Surround decoder is selected for other sources.

bDsur

Use the Dolby Surround decoder suitable for all sources. A real

acoustic space (including overhead) will be created especially

when object-based audio (such as Dolby Atmos content) is

played.

Neural:X

Use the DTS Neural:X decoder suitable for all sources. A real

acoustic space (including overhead) will be created especially

when object-based audio (such as DTS:X content) is played.

Neo:6 Cinema

Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder (or DTS-ES Matrix decoder)

suitable for movies. Sounds will be output from the surround/

surround back speakers.

Neo:6 Music

Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder (or DTS-ES Matrix decoder)

suitable for music. Sounds will be output from the surround/

surround back speakers.

Note

▪ You can adjust the surround decoder parameters in “DSP Parameter” (p.101) in the “Setup” menu.

▪ When the Dolby Surround decoder is selected, virtual surround processing (such as Virtual CINEMA

FRONT) (p.52) or Compressed Music Enhancer (p.55) does not work.

▪ If the Dolby Surround decoder is selected when only one surround back speaker is used, no sound is

output from the surround back speaker (except when a Dolby Atmos content is played).

▪ When the Neural:X decoder is selected, Dialogue Level (p.102), Extra Bass (p.96) or Compressed

Music Enhancer (p.

55) does not work.

▪ The selected surround decoder may not work for some input sources.

Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (direct playback)

When the direct playback mode is enabled, the unit plays back the selected source

with the least circuitry in order to reduce the electrical noise from other circuitry (such

as the front display). It allows you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound quality.

Press DIRECT.

Each time you press the key, the direct playback mode is enabled or

disabled.

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

STEREO

PARTY

TUNED

ZONE

3 B2 A

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

MUT E VI RTU AL

VOL .

DIRECT

Note

When the direct playback mode is enabled, the following functions are not available.

▪ Selecting sound programs

▪ Adjusting the tone control

▪ Operating the on-screen and “Option” menus

▪ Viewing information on the front display (when not in operation)

Enhancing the bass (Extra Bass)

Extra Bass allows you to enjoy enhanced bass sounds, regardless of the size of the

front speakers and the presence or absence of the subwoofer.

Press BASS.

Each time you press the key, Extra Bass is enabled or disabled.

Note

You can also use “Extra Bass” (p.96) in the “Setup” menu to enable/disable Extra Bass.

Playing back digitally compressed formats (such as

MP3, etc.) with enriched sound (Compressed Music

Enhancer)

Compressed Music Enhancer adds depth and breadth to the sound, allowing you to

enjoy a dynamic sound close to the original sound before it was compressed. This

function can be used along with any other sound modes.

Press ENHANCER.

Each time you press the key, Compressed Music Enhancer is enabled or

disabled.

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

DRC

SLEEP

STEREO

PARTY

TUNED

ZONE

3 B2 A

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

MUT E VI RTU AL

YPAO

VOL.

VOL .

Enhancer On

ENHANCER

“ENHANCER” lights up

Note

▪ Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on the following audio sources.

– Signals whose sampling frequency is over 48 kHz

– DSD audio

▪ You can also use “Enhancer (Enhancer)” (p.89) in the “Option” menu to enable/disable

Compressed Music Enhancer.

Listening to FM/AM radio (Except for U.K., Europe, Australia and Russia models)

You can tune into a radio station by specifying its frequency or selecting from

registered radio stations.

Note

If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the direction of the FM/AM antennas.

Selecting a frequency for reception

Press FM or AM to select a band.

“TUNER” is selected as the input source and then the frequency currently

selected is displayed.

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

STEREO

PARTY

TUNED

ZONE

3 B2 A

MUT E VI RTU AL

VOL .

FM 87.50MHz

Press TUNING repeatedly to set a frequency.

Hold down the key for about a second to search stations automatically.

STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS

TUNING

PRESET

HOME

MEMORY

BLUE

YELLOWGREEN

RED

STRAIGHT

DIRECT

ENHANCER

BASS

PRESET

HOME

MEMORY

BLUE

YELL

REE

TUNING

STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS

ENTER

SETUP OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

SCENE

DVD

NET

RADIO

HDMI

AUDIO

1 2 3

BLUETOOTH

USB

1 2 3

1 2 3 4

NET

AUX

TUNING PRESET

HOME

MEMORY

DISPLAY

RETURN

BLUE

YELLOWGREEN

RED

SLEEP

ZONE A ZONE B

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

PARTY

ZONE

3 B2 A

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

MUT E VI RTU AL

VOL .

STEREO

TUNED

FM 98.50MHz

“TUNED” lights up when the unit is receiving an FM/AM radio station

signal.

“STEREO” lights up when the unit is receiving a stereo FM radio signal.

Note

▪ You can switch between “Stereo” (stereo) and “Mono” (monaural) for FM radio reception by

selecting “

FM Mode” in the “Option” menu. When the signal reception for an FM radio station is

unstable, switching to monaural may improve it.

▪ You can watch videos input from external devices while listening to radio by selecting the video

input jack in

“Video Out (Video Out)” (p.90) in the “Option” menu.

Registering favorite radio stations (presets)

You can register up to 40 radio stations as presets. Once you have registered stations,

you can easily tune into them by selecting their preset numbers.

Registering radio stations automatically (Auto Preset)

Automatically register FM radio stations with strong signals (up to 40 stations).

Note

To register AM radio stations, follow “Registering a radio station manually” (p.58).

Press FM to select “TUNER” as the input source.

Press OPTION.

Use the cursor keys to select “Preset” and press ENTER.

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

STEREO

PARTY

TUNED

ZONE

3 B2 A

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

MUT E VI RTU AL

VOL .

Preset

To start the Auto Preset process, press ENTER.

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

PARTY

ZONE

3 B2 A

MUT E VI RTU AL

STEREO

TUNED

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

VOL .

01:FM 87.50MHz

“SEARCH” appears during Auto Preset

Preset number from which to start the registration

Note

▪ To specify the preset number from which to start the registration, press cursor keys (e/r) or

PRESET to select a preset number.

▪ To cancel the Auto Preset process, press RETURN.

When the Auto Preset process finishes, “FINISH” appears and the “Option” menu

closes automatically.

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

STEREO

PARTY

TUNED

ZONE

3 B2 A

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

MUT E VI RTU AL

VOL .

Auto Preset

Registering a radio station manually

Select a radio station manually and register it to a preset number.

Follow “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.56) to tune into

the desired radio station.

Hold down MEMORY for a few seconds.

The first time that you do register a station, the selected radio station will

be registered to the preset number “01”. Thereafter, each radio station

you select will be registered to the next empty (unused) preset number

after the most recently registered number.

STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS

ENTER

SETUP OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

SCENE

DVD

NET

RADIO

HDMI

AUDIO

1 2 3

BLUETOOTH

USB

1 2 3

1 2 3 4

NET

AUX

TUNING PRESET

HOME

MEMORY

DISPLAY

RETURN

BLUE

YELLOWGREEN

RED

SLEEP

ZONE A ZONE B

STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS

TUNING

PRESET

HOME

MEMORY

BLUE

YELLOWGREEN

RED

STRAIGHT

DIRECT

ENHANCER

BASS

TUNING

PRESET

HOME

BLUE

YELL

REE

MEMORY

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

PARTY

ZONE

3 B2 A

MUT E VI RTU AL

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

VOL .

01:FM 98.50MHz

STEREO

TUNED

Preset number

Note

To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning into the desired radio

station, press PRESET

to select a preset number, and then press MEMORY again.

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

PARTY

ZONE

3 B2 A

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

MUT E VI RTU AL

SLEEP

VOL .

02:Empty

TUNED

STEREO

“Empty” (not in use) or the frequency currently registered

Selecting a preset station

Tune into a registered radio station by selecting its preset number.

Press FM or AM to select “TUNER” as the input source.

Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired radio station.

STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS

ENTER

SETUP OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

SCENE

DVD

NET

RADIO

HDMI

AUDIO

1 2 3

BLUETOOTH

USB

1 2 3

1 2 3 4

NET

AUX

TUNING PRESET

HOME

MEMORY

DISPLAY

RETURN

BLUE

YELLOWGREEN

RED

SLEEP

ZONE A ZONE B

STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS

TUNING

PRESET

HOME

MEMORY

BLUE

YELLOWGREEN

RED

STRAIGHT

DIRECT

ENHANCER

BASS

TUNING

HOME

MEMORY

BLUE

YELL

REE

PRESET

ENHANCER

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

PARTY

ZONE

3 B2 A

MUT E VI RTU AL

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

VOL .

STEREO

TUNED

01:FM 98.50MHz

Note

“No Presets” appears when no radio stations are registered.

Clearing preset stations

Clear radio stations registered to the preset numbers.

Press FM or AM to select “TUNER” as the input source.

Press OPTION.

Use the cursor keys to select “Preset” and press ENTER.

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

STEREO

PARTY

TUNED

ZONE

3 B2 A

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

MUT E VI RTU AL

VOL .

Preset

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “CLEAR”.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a preset station to be cleared

and press ENTER.

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

PARTY

ZONE

3 B2 A

MUT E VI RTU AL

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

VOL .

STEREO

TUNED

01:FM 98.50MHz

Preset station to be cleared

If the preset station is cleared, “Cleared” appears and then the next in-use

preset number is displayed.

01:Cleared

Repeat step 5 until all desired preset stations are cleared.

To exit from the menu, press OPTION.

Listening to DAB radio (U.K., Europe, Australia and Russia models)

DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) uses digital signals for clearer sound and more

stable reception compared to analog signals. The unit can also receive DAB+ (an

upgraded version of DAB) that allows for more stations using MPEG-4 HE-AAC v2

audio codec, which has a more efficient transmission method.

Note

▪ The unit supports Band III (174 to 240 MHz) only.

▪ Be sure to check the DAB coverage in your area in that not all areas are currently being covered. For a list

of nationwide DAB statuses and worldwide DAB frequencies, check WorldDMB online at

http://www.worlddab.org/

▪ For details on the antenna connection, see “Connecting the radio antennas” (p.30).

Preparing the DAB tuning

Before tuning into DAB radio stations, follow the procedure below to perform an initial

scan.

Press DAB to select the DAB band.

The following message appears on the front panel if you have not

performed an initial scan yet.

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

PARTY

ZONE

3 B2 A

MUT E VI RTU AL

SBL SB SBR

FPRFPL

STEREO

TUNED

VOL .

Press [ENTER]

Press ENTER to start an initial scan.

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

PARTY

ZONE

3 B2 A

MUT E VI RTU AL

SBL SB SBR

FPRFPL

STEREO

TUNED

VOL .

>>>------- 30%

When the initial scan finishes, the unit automatically tunes into the first

DAB radio station as stored in station order.

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

PARTY

ZONE

3 B2 A

MUT E VI RTU AL

SBL SB SBR

FPRFPL

STEREO

TUNED

VOL .

BBC Radio 4

Note

▪ If no DAB radio stations are found by an initial scan, the message in Step 1 appears again.

Press

ENTER to start an initial scan again.

▪ You can check reception strength of each DAB channel label (p.64).

▪ To perform an initial scan again after some DAB radio stations are stored, select “Init Scan”

(p.87) in the “

Option” menu. If you perform an initial scan again, the DAB radio stations

currently registered to the preset numbers will be cleared.

Selecting a DAB radio station for reception

You can select a DAB radio station from the stations stored by the initial scan.

Press DAB to select the DAB band.

“TUNER” is selected as the input source and then the DAB radio station

currently selected is displayed.

Press TUNING repeatedly to select a DAB radio station.

STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS

TUNING

PRESET

HOME

MEMORY

BLUE

YELLOWGREEN

RED

STRAIGHT

DIRECT

ENHANCER

BASS

PRESET

HOME

MEMORY

BLUE

YELL

REE

TUNING

STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS

ENTER

SETUP OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

DAB

SCENE

DVD

NET

RADIO

HDMI

AUDIO

1 2 3

BLUETOOTH

USB

1 2 3

1 2 3 4

NET

AUX

TUNING PRESET

HOME

MEMORY

DISPLAY

RETURN

BLUE

YELLOWGREEN

RED

SLEEP

ZONE A ZONE B

(U.K., Europe, Australia and Russia models)

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

PARTY

ZONE

3 B2 A

MUT E VI RTU AL

SBL SB SBR

FPRFPL

STEREO

TUNED

VOL .

Daily Service

Note

▪ “Off Air” appears when the selected DAB radio station is currently not available.

▪ When the unit is receiving a secondary station, “2” appears next to “DAB”.

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

PARTY

ZONE

3 B2 A

MUT E VI RTU AL

SBL SB SBR

FPRFPL

STEREO

TUNED

VOL .

BBC National

Secondary station

▪ You can watch videos input from external devices while listening to radio by selecting the video

input jack in

“Video Out (Video Out)” (p.90) in the “Option” menu.

Registering favorite DAB radio stations (presets)

You can register up to 40 DAB radio stations as presets. Once you have registered

stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their preset numbers.

Note

You can register up to 40 favorite radio stations each for DAB and FM bands.

Registering a DAB radio station as presets

Select a DAB radio station and register it to a preset number.

Follow “Selecting a DAB radio station for reception” (p.61) to tune

into the desired DAB radio station.

Hold down MEMORY for a few seconds.

The first time that you do register a station, the selected radio station will

be registered to the preset number “01”. Thereafter, each radio station

you select will be registered to the next empty (unused) preset number

after the most recently registered number.

STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS

ENTER

SETUP OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

DAB

SCENE

DVD

NET

RADIO

HDMI

AUDIO

1 2 3

BLUETOOTH

USB

1 2 3

1 2 3 4

NET

AUX

TUNING PRESET

HOME

MEMORY

DISPLAY

RETURN

BLUE

YELLOWGREEN

RED

SLEEP

ZONE A ZONE B

STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS

TUNING

PRESET

HOME

MEMORY

BLUE

YELLOWGREEN

RED

STRAIGHT

DIRECT

ENHANCER

BASS

TUNING

PRESET

HOME

BLUE

YELL

REE

MEMORY

(U.K., Europe, Australia and Russia models)

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

PARTY

ZONE

3 B2 A

MUT E VI RTU AL

SBL SB SBR

FPRFPL

STEREO

TUNED

VOL .

01:BBC Radio 4

Preset number

Note

To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning into the desired radio

station, press PRESET

to select a preset number, and then press MEMORY again.

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

PARTY

ZONE

3 B2 A

MUT E VI RTU AL

SBL SB SBR

FPRFPL

STEREO

TUNED

VOL .

02:Empty

“Empty” (not in use) or “Overwrite?” (in use)

Selecting a preset DAB radio station

Tune into a registered DAB radio station by selecting its preset number.

Press DAB to select “TUNER” as the input source.

Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired DAB radio station.

STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS

ENTER

SETUP OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

DAB

SCENE

DVD

NET

RADIO

HDMI

AUDIO

1 2 3

BLUETOOTH

USB

1 2 3

1 2 3 4

NET

AUX

TUNING PRESET

HOME

MEMORY

DISPLAY

RETURN

BLUE

YELLOWGREEN

RED

SLEEP

ZONE A ZONE B

STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS

TUNING

PRESET

HOME

MEMORY

BLUE

YELLOWGREEN

RED

STRAIGHT

DIRECT

ENHANCER

BASS

TUNING

HOME

MEMORY

BLUE

YELL

REE

PRESET

(U.K., Europe, Australia and Russia models)

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

PARTY

ZONE

3 B2 A

MUT E VI RTU AL

SBL SB SBR

FPRFPL

STEREO

TUNED

VOL .

PRESET:01

Note

“No Presets” appears when no DAB radio stations are registered.

Clearing preset DAB radio stations

Clear DAB radio stations registered to the preset numbers.

Press DAB to select “TUNER” as the input source.

Press OPTION.

Use the cursor keys to select “Preset” and press ENTER.

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

STEREO

PARTY

TUNED

ZONE

3 B2 A

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

MUT E VI RTU AL

VOL .

Preset

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a preset station to be cleared

and press ENTER.

01:Clear?

Preset station to be cleared

If the preset station is cleared, “Cleared” appears and then the next in-use

preset number is displayed.

01:Cleared

Repeat step 4 until all desired preset stations are cleared.

To exit from the menu, press OPTION.

Displaying the DAB information

The unit can receive various types of DAB information when it is tuned into a DAB

radio station.

Tune into the desired DAB radio station.

Press INFO repeatedly to select between the various display

items.

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

PARTY

ZONE

3 B2 A

MUT E VI RTU AL

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

STEREO

TUNED

VOL .

Program Type

Item name

About 3 seconds after a display item is selected, its corresponding

information appears.

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

PARTY

ZONE

3 B2 A

MUT E VI RTU AL

SBL SB SBR

FPRFPL

STEREO

TUNED

VOL .

Classic Music

Information

Service Label

Station name

DLS (Dynamic Label

Segment)

Information on the current station

Ensemble Label

Ensemble name

Program Type

Station genre

Date And Time

Current date and time

Audio Mode

Audio mode (monaural/stereo) and bit rate

CH Label/Freq.

Channel label and frequency

Signal Quality

Signal reception quality (0 [none] to 100 [best])

DSP Program

Sound mode name

Audio Decoder

Decoder name

Note

Some information may not be available depending on the selected DAB radio station.

Checking reception strength of

each DAB channel label

You can check reception strength of each DAB channel

label (0 [none] to 100 [best]).

Press DAB to select “TUNER” as the

input source.

Press OPTION.

Use the cursor keys to select “Tune

AID” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select the

desired DAB channel label.

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

PARTY

ZONE

3 B2 A

MUT E VI RTU AL

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

STEREO

TUNED

VOL .

5A Level: 80

DAB channel label Reception strength

To exit from the menu, press OPTION.

DAB frequency information

The unit supports Band III (174 to 240 MHz) only.

Frequency Channel label

174.928 MHz 5A

176.640 MHz 5B

178.352 MHz 5C

180.064 MHz 5D

181.936 MHz 6A

183.648 MHz 6B

185.360 MHz 6C

187.072 MHz 6D

188.928 MHz 7A

190.640 MHz 7B

192.352 MHz 7C

194.064 MHz 7D

195.936 MHz 8A

197.648 MHz 8B

199.360 MHz 8C

201.072 MHz 8D

202.928 MHz 9A

204.640 MHz 9B

206.352 MHz 9C

208.064 MHz 9D

209.936 MHz 10A

211.648 MHz 10B

213.360 MHz 10C

215.072 MHz 10D

216.928 MHz 11A

218.640 MHz 11B

220.352 MHz 11C

222.064 MHz 11D

223.936 MHz 12A

225.648 MHz 12B

227.360 MHz 12C

229.072 MHz 12D

230.784 MHz 13A

Frequency Channel label

232.496 MHz 13B

234.208 MHz 13C

235.776 MHz 13D

237.488 MHz 13E

239.200 MHz 13F

Listening to FM radio (U.K., Europe, Australia and Russia models)

You can tune into an FM radio station by specifying its frequency or selecting from

registered radio stations.

Selecting a frequency for reception

Press FM to select the FM band.

“TUNER” is selected as the input source and then the frequency currently

selected is displayed.

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

STEREO

PARTY

TUNED

ZONE

3 B2 A

MUT E VI RTU AL

VOL .

FM 87.50MHz

Press TUNING repeatedly to set a frequency.

Hold down the key for about a second to search stations automatically.

STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS

TUNING

PRESET

HOME

MEMORY

BLUE

YELLOWGREEN

RED

STRAIGHT

DIRECT

ENHANCER

BASS

PRESET

HOME

MEMORY

BLUE

YELL

REE

TUNING

STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS

ENTER

SETUP OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

DAB

SCENE

DVD

NET

RADIO

HDMI

AUDIO

1 2 3

BLUETOOTH

USB

1 2 3

1 2 3 4

NET

AUX

TUNING PRESET

HOME

MEMORY

DISPLAY

RETURN

BLUE

YELLOWGREEN

RED

SLEEP

ZONE A ZONE B

(U.K., Europe, Australia and Russia models)

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

PARTY

ZONE

3 B2 A

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

MUT E VI RTU AL

VOL .

STEREO

TUNED

FM 98.50MHz

“TUNED” lights up when the unit is receiving an FM radio station signal.

“STEREO” lights up when the unit is receiving a stereo FM radio signal.

Note

▪ You can switch between “Stereo” (stereo) and “Mono” (monaural) for FM radio reception from

“FM Mode” (

p.87) in the “Option” menu. When the signal reception for an FM radio station is

unstable, switching to monaural may improve it.

▪ You can watch videos input from external devices while listening to radio by selecting the video

input jack in

“Video Out (Video Out)” (p.90) in the “Option” menu.

Registering favorite FM radio stations (presets)

You can register up to 40 FM radio stations as presets. Once you have registered

stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their preset numbers.

Note

You can register up to 40 favorite radio stations each for DAB and FM bands.

Registering FM radio stations automatically (Auto

Preset)

Automatically register FM radio stations with strong signals (up to 40 stations).

Note

(U.K. and Europe models only)

Only Radio Data System broadcasting stations are stored automatically by the Auto Preset function.

Press FM to select “TUNER” as the input source.

Press OPTION.

Use the cursor keys to select “Preset” and press ENTER.

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

STEREO

PARTY

TUNED

ZONE

3 B2 A

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

MUT E VI RTU AL

VOL .

Preset

To start the Auto Preset process, press ENTER.

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

PARTY

ZONE

3 B2 A

MUT E VI RTU AL

STEREO

TUNED

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

VOL .

01:FM 87.50MHz

“SEARCH” appears during Auto Preset

Preset number from which to start the registration

Note

▪ To specify the preset number from which to start the registration, press cursor keys (e/r) or

PRESET to select a preset number.

▪ To cancel the Auto Preset process, press RETURN.

When the Auto Preset process finishes, “FINISH” appears and the “Option” menu

closes automatically.

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

STEREO

PARTY

TUNED

ZONE

3 B2 A

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

MUT E VI RTU AL

VOL .

Auto Preset

Registering an FM radio station manually

Select an FM radio station manually and register it to a preset number.

Follow “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.56) to tune into

the desired FM radio station.

Hold down MEMORY for a few seconds.

The first time that you do register an FM radio station, the selected radio

station will be registered to the preset number “01”. Thereafter, each radio

station you select will be registered to the next empty (unused) preset

number after the most recently registered number.

STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS

ENTER

SETUP OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

DAB

SCENE

DVD

NET

RADIO

HDMI

AUDIO

1 2 3

BLUETOOTH

USB

1 2 3

1 2 3 4

NET

AUX

TUNING PRESET

HOME

MEMORY

DISPLAY

RETURN

BLUE

YELLOWGREEN

RED

SLEEP

ZONE A ZONE B

STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS

TUNING

PRESET

HOME

MEMORY

BLUE

YELLOWGREEN

RED

STRAIGHT

DIRECT

ENHANCER

BASS

TUNING

PRESET

HOME

BLUE

YELL

REE

MEMORY

(U.K., Europe, Australia and Russia models)

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

PARTY

ZONE

3 B2 A

MUT E VI RTU AL

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

VOL .

01:FM 98.50MHz

STEREO

TUNED

Preset number

Note

To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning into the desired radio

station, press PRESET

to select a preset number, and then press MEMORY again.

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

PARTY

ZONE

3 B2 A

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

MUT E VI RTU AL

SLEEP

VOL .

02:Empty

TUNED

STEREO

“Empty” (not in use) or the frequency currently registered

Selecting a preset FM radio station

Tune into a registered FM radio station by selecting its preset number.

Press FM to select “TUNER” as the input source.

Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired FM radio station.

STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS

ENTER

SETUP OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

DAB

SCENE

DVD

NET

RADIO

HDMI

AUDIO

1 2 3

BLUETOOTH

USB

1 2 3

1 2 3 4

NET

AUX

TUNING PRESET

HOME

MEMORY

DISPLAY

RETURN

BLUE

YELLOWGREEN

RED

SLEEP

ZONE A ZONE B

STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS

TUNING

PRESET

HOME

MEMORY

BLUE

YELLOWGREEN

RED

STRAIGHT

DIRECT

ENHANCER

BASS

TUNING

HOME

MEMORY

BLUE

YELL

REE

PRESET

(U.K., Europe, Australia and Russia models)

ENHANCER

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

PARTY

ZONE

3 B2 A

MUT E VI RTU AL

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

VOL .

STEREO

TUNED

01:FM 98.50MHz

Note

“No Presets” appears when no FM radio stations are registered.

Clearing preset FM radio stations

Clear FM radio stations registered to the preset numbers.

Press FM to select “TUNER” as the input source.

Press OPTION.

Use the cursor keys to select “Preset” and press ENTER.

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

STEREO

PARTY

TUNED

ZONE

3 B2 A

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

MUT E VI RTU AL

VOL .

Preset

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “CLEAR”.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a preset station to be cleared

and press ENTER.

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

PARTY

ZONE

3 B2 A

MUT E VI RTU AL

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

VOL .

STEREO

TUNED

01:FM 98.50MHz

Preset station to be cleared

If the preset station is cleared, “Cleared” appears and then the next in-use

preset number is displayed.

01:Cleared

Repeat step 5 until all desired preset stations are cleared.

To exit from the menu, press OPTION.

Radio Data System tuning

(U.K. and Europe models only)

Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM stations in many

countries. The unit can receive various types of Radio Data System data, such as

“Program Service”, “Program Type”, “Radio Text

” and “Clock Time”, when it is tuned

into a Radio Data System broadcasting station.

Displaying the Radio Data System information

Tune into the desired Radio Data System broadcasting station.

Note

We recommend using “Auto Preset” to tune into the Radio Data System broadcasting stations

(p.57).

Press INFO repeatedly to select between the various display

items.

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

PARTY

ZONE

3 B2 A

MUT E VI RTU AL

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

VOL .

STEREO

TUNED

Program Type

Item name

About 3 seconds after a display item is selected, its corresponding

information appears.

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

PARTY

ZONE

3 B2 A

MUT E VI RTU AL

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

VOL .

STEREO

TUNED

CLASSICS

Information

Program Service

Program service name

Program Type

Current program type

Radio Text

Information on the current program

Clock Time

Current time

DSP Program

Sound mode name

Audio Decoder

Decoder name

Frequency

Note

“Program Service”, “Program Type”, “Radio Text”, and “Clock Time” are not displayed if the radio

station does not provide the Radio Data System service.

Playing back music stored on a Bluetooth® device

You can play back music files stored on a Bluetooth device (such as smartphones) on

the unit. Also, you can enjoy audio played back on the unit using Bluetooth speakers/

headphones.

Bluetooth device

(such as smartphones)

The unit

Bluetooth speakers/headphones

The unit

Note

▪ To use the BLUETOOTH function, set “Bluetooth” (p.110) in the “Setup” menu to “On”.

▪ You cannot make Bluetooth connections to a Bluetooth device (such as smartphones) and Bluetooth

speakers/headphones at the same time.

▪ For details on supported Bluetooth devices, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.130).

▪ Stand the wireless antenna upright for connecting to a Bluetooth device wirelessly. For details, see

“Preparing a wireless antenna”

(p.31).

Playback Bluetooth® device music on the unit

Follow the procedure below to establish a Bluetooth connection between a Bluetooth

device (such as smartphones) and the unit, and play back music stored the Bluetooth

device on the unit.

Note

The unit does not support video playback via Bluetooth.

Press BLUETOOTH to select “Bluetooth” as the input source.

On the Bluetooth device, select the unit (network name of the unit)

from the available device list.

A connection between the Bluetooth device and the unit will be made.

If the pass key is required, enter the number “0000”.

On the Bluetooth device, select a song and start playback.

The playback screen (artist name, album name and song title) is

displayed on the TV.

Note

▪ If the unit detects the Bluetooth device previously connected, the unit automatically connects to

the Bluetooth device after Step 1. To establish another Bluetooth connection, first terminate the

current Bluetooth connection.

▪ To terminate the Bluetooth connection, perform one of the following operations.

– Perform the disconnect operation on the Bluetooth device.

– Select an input source other than “Bluetooth” on the unit.

– Select “Disconnect” in “Audio Receive” (p.92) in the “Setup” menu.

▪ You can use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the remote control

to control playback.

Enjoying audio using Bluetooth® speakers/

headphones

Follow the procedure below to establish a Bluetooth connection between Bluetooth

speakers/headphones and the unit.

Use the input selection keys on the remote control to select an

input source.

Select an input source other than Bluetooth.

Press SETUP.

Use the cursor keys to select “Bluetooth” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys to set “Bluetooth” to “On”, and then set

“Transmitter” to “On” in the same way.

Use the cursor keys to select “Device Search” to search the

Bluetooth devices.

The list of Bluetooth devices is displayed.

Select the Bluetooth speakers/headphones to be connected with

the unit and press ENTER.

When the connection process finishes, audio played back on the unit will

be reproduced from the Bluetooth speakers/headphones.

Note

▪ If the desired Bluetooth device is not displayed on the list, set the Bluetooth device to the pairing

mode and then select “

Device Search”.

▪ Follow one of the procedures below to terminate the Bluetooth connection.

– Perform the disconnect operation on the Bluetooth speakers/headphones.

– Press the SETUP key, then use the cursor keys to select "Bluetooth", then "Transmitter", and

then "Off".

Playing back music with AirPlay

The AirPlay function allows you to play back iTunes or iPhone/iPad/iPod touch music

on the unit via network.

iTunes

(Wired network or wireless network)

iPhone/iPad/iPod touch

The unit

Router

Note

▪ To use this function, the unit and your PC or iPhone must be connected to the same router (p.31). You can

check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in

“Information” (p.108) in the “Setup” menu.

▪ If the iPhone does not recognize the unit, check your network environment (p.31).

▪ For details on supported iPhone devices, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.130).

Playback of iTunes/iPhone music contents

Follow the procedure below to play back iTunes/iPhone music contents on the unit.

Turn on the unit, and start iTunes on the PC or display the

playback screen on the iPhone.

If the iTunes/iPhone recognizes the unit, the AirPlay icon appears.

iOS 10 (example) iOS 9 (example) iTunes (example)

Note

If the icon does not appear, check whether the unit and PC/iPhone are connected to the router

properly.

On the iTunes/iPhone, click (tap) the AirPlay icon and select the

unit (network name of the unit) as the audio output device.

Select a song and start playback.

The unit automatically selects “AirPlay” as the input source and starts

playback.

The playback screen is displayed on the TV.

Note

▪ The playback screen is available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI.

▪ You can turn on the unit automatically when starting playback on iTunes or iPhone by setting “Network

Standby” (p.109) in the “Setup” menu to “On”.

▪

You can edit the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on iTunes/iPhone in “Network

Name” (p.110) in the “Setup” menu.

▪

You can adjust the unit’s volume from the iTunes/iPhone during playback. To disable volume controls from

iTunes/iPhone, set “Volume Interlock (Vol.Interlock)” (p.90) in the “Option” menu to “Off”.

Notice

▪ When you use iTunes/iPhone controls to adjust volume, the volume may be unexpectedly loud. This

could result in damage to the unit or speakers. If the volume suddenly increases during playback, stop

playback on the iTunes/iPhone immediately.

Playback screen

Playback indicator

Playback information

Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time/song length.

Use the following remote control keys to control playback.

STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS

ENTER

SETUP OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

SCENE

DVD

NET

RADIO

HDMI

AUDIO

1 2 3

BLUETOOTH

USB

1 2 3

1 2 3 4

NET

AUX

TUNING PRESET

HOME

MEMORY

DISPLAY

RETURN

BLUE

YELLOWGREEN

RED

SLEEP

ZONE A ZONE B

STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS

TUNING

PRESET

HOME

MEMORY

BLUE

YELLOWGREEN

RED

STRAIGHT

DIRECT

ENHANCER

BASS

TUNING

PRESET

HOME

BLUE

YELL

REE

External device operation

keys

External device

operation keys

Function

Resumes playback from pause.

Stops playback.

Stops playback temporarily.

Skips forward/backward.

Playing back music stored on a USB storage device

You can play back music files stored on a USB storage device on the unit.

Note

For details on playable USB devices, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.130).

Connecting a USB storage device

Connect the USB storage device to the USB jack.

STRAIGHT

(CONNECT)

AUX USB

AUDIO

5V 1A

The unit (front)

USB storage device

Note

▪ If the USB storage device contains many files, it may take time to load them. In this case, “Loading…”

appears in the front display.

▪ Stop playback of the USB storage device before disconnect it from the USB jack.

▪ Connect a USB storage device directly to the USB jack of the unit. Do not use extension cables.

▪ The unit cannot charge USB devices while it is in standby mode.

Playback of USB storage device contents

Follow the procedure below to operate the USB storage device contents and start

playback.

You can control the USB memory device with the menu displayed on the TV screen.

Note

▪ Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI.

▪ “_” (underscore) will be displayed for characters not supported by the unit.

Press USB to select “USB” as the input source.

The browse screen (p.74) is displayed on the TV.

Note

If playback is ongoing on your USB storage device, the playback screen is displayed.

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.

If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback screen (p.74) is

displayed.

Note

▪ To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.

▪ To return to the top level while on the browse screen, hold down RETURN.

▪ To switch the screen mode browse/playback/off, press DISPLAY.

▪ Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected.

Browse screen

1 4

List name

Contents list

Displays the list of USB storage device contents. Use the cursor keys to select an

item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.

Item number/total

Status indicators

Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.75) and playback status (such as

play/pause).

Operation menu

Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item.

Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

Icon Function

Moves 10 pages backward.

Moves to the previous page of the list.

Moves to the next page of the list.

Moves 10 pages forward.

Moves to the playback screen.

Note

A content selected by the cursor is displayed on the front display.

Playback screen

Status indicators

Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.75) and playback status (such as

play/pause).

Playback information

Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.

Use the following remote control keys to control playback.

STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS

ENTER

SETUP OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

SCENE

DVD

NET

RADIO

HDMI

AUDIO

1 2 3

BLUETOOTH

USB

1 2 3

1 2 3 4

NET

AUX

TUNING PRESET

HOME

MEMORY

DISPLAY

RETURN

BLUE

YELLOWGREEN

RED

SLEEP

ZONE A ZONE B

STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS

TUNING

PRESET

HOME

MEMORY

BLUE

YELLOWGREEN

RED

STRAIGHT

DIRECT

ENHANCER

BASS

TUNING

PRESET

HOME

BLUE

YELL

REE

External device operation

keys

External device

operation keys

Function

Resumes playback from pause.

Stops playback.

Stops playback temporarily.

Skips forward/backward.

Note

A content name of a current playback is displayed on the front display. To switch the displayed item, press

INFO

(p.49).

Shuffle/repeat settings

You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for playback of USB storage device

contents.

When “USB” is selected as the input source, press OPTION.

Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or “Repeat”

(Repeat) and press ENTER.

Note

▪ To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

▪ Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.

Item Setting Function

Shuffle

(Shuffle)

Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function.

On (On)

Plays back songs in the current album (folder)

in random order.

“x” appears on the TV screen.

Repeat

(Repeat)

Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function.

One (One)

Plays back the current song repeatedly. “c”

appears on the TV screen.

All (All)

Plays back all songs in the current album

(folder) repeatedly.

“v” appears on the TV screen.

To exit from the menu, press OPTION.

Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)

You can play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible NAS on the unit.

Note

▪ To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the same router (p.31). You can check

whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in

“Information” (p.108) in the “Setup” menu.

▪ The audio may be interrupted while using the wireless network connection. In this case, use the wired

network connection.

▪ For details on playable file formats, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.130).

Media sharing setup

To play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible NAS, first you need to

configure the media sharing setting on each music server.

For a PC with Windows Media Player 12 installed

Start Windows Media Player 12 on your PC.

Select “Stream”, then “Turn on media streaming”.

Click “Turn on media streaming”.

Select “Allowed” from the drop-down list next to the unit’s model

name.

Click “OK” to exit.

Note

For details on media sharing settings, refer to Windows Media Player help.

For a PC or a NAS with other DLNA server software

installed

Refer to the instruction manual for the device or software and configure the media

sharing settings.

Playback of PC music contents

Follow the procedure below to operate the PC music contents and start playback.

You can control the PC/NAS with the menu displayed on the TV screen.

Note

▪ Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. If not, carry

out operations while viewing the front display.

▪ “_” (underscore) will be displayed for characters not supported by the unit.

Press NET repeatedly to select “SERVER” as the input source.

The browse screen (p.77) is displayed on the TV.

Note

If playback of a music file selected from the unit is ongoing on your PC, the playback screen is

displayed.

Use the cursor keys to select a music server and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.

If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback screen (p.78) is

displayed.

Note

▪ To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.

▪ To return to the top level while on the browse screen, hold down RETURN.

▪ To switch the screen mode browse/playback/off, press DISPLAY.

▪ Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected.

Browse screen

1 4

List name

Contents list

Displays the list of PC content. Use the cursor keys to select an item and press

ENTER to confirm the selection.

Item number/total

Status indicators

Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.78) and playback status (such as

play/pause).

Operation menu

Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item.

Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

Icon Function

Moves 10 pages backward.

Moves to the previous page of the list.

Moves to the next page of the list.

Moves 10 pages forward.

Moves to the playback screen.

Playback screen

Status indicators

Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.78) and playback status (such as

play/pause).

Playback information

Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.

Use the following remote control keys to control playback.

STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS

ENTER

SETUP OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

SCENE

DVD

NET

RADIO

HDMI

AUDIO

1 2 3

BLUETOOTH

USB

1 2 3

1 2 3 4

NET

AUX

TUNING PRESET

HOME

MEMORY

DISPLAY

RETURN

BLUE

YELLOWGREEN

RED

SLEEP

ZONE A ZONE B

STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS

TUNING

PRESET

HOME

MEMORY

BLUE

YELLOWGREEN

RED

STRAIGHT

DIRECT

ENHANCER

BASS

TUNING

PRESET

HOME

BLUE

YELL

REE

External device operation

keys

External device

operation keys

Function

Resumes playback from pause.

Stops playback.

Stops playback temporarily.

Skips forward/backward.

Note

You can also use a DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control playback. For details, see

“DMC Control” (p.109

Shuffle/repeat settings

You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for the playback of PC music content.

When “

SERVER” is selected as the input source, press OPTION.

Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or “Repeat”

(Repeat) and press ENTER.

Note

▪ To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

▪ Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.

Item Setting Function

Shuffle

(Shuffle)

Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function.

On (On)

Plays back songs in the current album (folder)

in random order.

“x” appears on the TV screen.

Repeat

(Repeat)

Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function.

One (One)

Plays back the current song repeatedly. “c”

appears on the TV screen.

All (All)

Plays back all songs in the current album

(folder) repeatedly.

“v” appears on the TV screen.

To exit from the menu, press OPTION.

Listening to Internet radio

You can listen to Internet radio stations from all over the world.

Note

▪ Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. If not, carry

out operations while viewing the front display.

▪ To use this function, the unit must be connected to the Internet (p.31). You can check whether the network

parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in

“Information”

(p.108) in the

“Setup” menu.

▪ You may not be able to receive some Internet radio stations.

▪ The unit uses the airable.Radio service. airable is a service of Tune In GmbH.

▪ This service may be discontinued without notice.

▪ Folder names are different depending on the language.

Playback of Internet radio

Follow the procedure below to select an Internet radio station and start playback.

You can control the Internet radio with the menu displayed on the TV screen.

Press NET repeatedly to select “NET RADIO” as the input source.

The browse screen (p.79) is displayed on the TV.

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.

If an Internet radio station is selected, playback starts and the playback

screen (p.

80) is displayed.

Note

▪ To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.

▪ To return to the top level while on the browse screen, hold down RETURN.

▪ To switch the screen mode browse/playback/off, press DISPLAY.

Browse screen

1 4

List name

Contents list

Displays the list of Internet radio content. Use the cursor keys to select an item and

press ENTER to confirm the selection.

Item number/total

Playback indicator

Operation menu

Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item.

Press

ENTER to confirm the selection.

Icon Function

Moves 10 pages backward.

Moves to the previous page of the list.

Moves to the next page of the list.

Moves 10 pages forward.

Moves to the playback screen.

Playback screen

Station

Playback indicator

Playback information

Displays the station name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.

Note

▪ Use the external device operation key (s) to stop playback.

▪ Some information may not be available depending on the station.

Registering favorite Internet radio stations

You can register your favorite Internet radio stations to the “Favorites” folder.

Note

You can also register up to 40 favorite USB, Bluetooth and network contents as shortcuts (p.85).

Registering the station with the Option menu

Follow the procedure below to register your favorite station to the “Favorites” folder.

While listening to Internet radio, press OPTION.

Use the cursor keys to select “Add to favorites” and press

ENTER.

Note

▪ On the playback screen, the current station is added to the “Favorites” folder. On the browse screen, the

station selected in the list is added to the “

Favorites” folder.

▪

Radio stations registered to favorites are displayed with “«”.

▪ To remove a station that is registered to favorites, select the station and then select “Remove from

favorites”.

Playing back more high-quality sounds with bi-amp connections

Using the four internal amplifiers for front speakers allows you to have more high-

quality sounds.

For example, you can use 2-way bi-amp speakers with a woofer and tweeter for front

speakers. It produces expansive sound in a bi-amp system featuring a woofer and

tweeter. By directly driving each speaker individually, it produces powerful sound

while maintaining the feeling of a high S/N ratio.

Note

When using the four internal amplifiers in bi-amp system, the unit supports only 2- to 5.1-channel speaker

system.

Connecting front speakers that support bi-amp

connections

When using front speakers that support bi-amp connections, connect them to the

FRONT terminals and

SURROUND BACK/PRESENCE/BI-AMP/ZONE B terminals.

To enable the bi-amp function, set “Power Amp Assign” (p.94) in the “Setup” menu

to “BI-AMP” after connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet.

1 2

4 5

The unit (rear)

Note

▪ Surround back speakers, presence speakers, bi-amp speakers or Zone B speakers cannot be connected

simultaneously.

▪ The FRONT terminals and SURROUND BACK/PRESENCE/BI-AMP/ZONE B terminals output the same

signals.

Notice

▪ Before making bi-amp connections, remove any brackets or cables that connect a woofer with a

tweeter. Refer to the instruction manual of the speakers for details. If you are not making bi-amp

connections, make sure that the brackets or cables are connected before connecting the speaker

cables.

Playing back music in multiple rooms

The Zone A/B function allows you to play back an input source in the room where the

unit is installed (Zone A) and in another room (Zone B).

For example, you can turn on Zone A (turn off Zone B) when you are in the living room,

and turn on Zone B (turn off Zone A) when you are in the study room. Also, you can

turn on both zones when you want to enjoy the same input source in those rooms

simultaneously.

Living room (Zone A)

Study room (Zone B)

Note

▪ Multichannel sources are mixed down to 2 channels and output to the Zone B.

▪ The same input source is applied to both Zone A and Zone B.

▪ By default, the volume for Zone B changes in conjunction with the volume for Zone A. If there is volume

difference between Zone A/B, you can correct it in “ZoneB Trim” in the “Option” menu (p.84). Also, you

can adjust the volume for Zone B separately (

p.84).

▪ You can automatically enable/disable the audio output to Zone A/B in conjunction with a scene selection

(p.50)

Connecting Zone B speakers

Connect the device that will be used in Zone B to the unit.

Notice

▪ Remove the unit’s power cable from the AC wall outlet before connecting speakers.

▪ Ensure that the bare wires of the speaker cable do not touch one another or come into contact with the

unit’s metal parts. Doing so may damage the unit or the speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit,

“Check SP Wires

” will appear on the front display when the unit is turned on.

Connect the speakers placed in Zone B to the unit with speaker cables.

To utilize the SURROUND BACK/PRESENCE/BI-AMP/ZONE B terminals for Zone B

speakers, set “Power Amp Assign” (p.94) in the “Setup” menu to “Zone B” after

connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet.

1 2

4 5

The unit (rear)

Zone A

Zone B

Note

Surround back speakers, presence speakers, bi-amp speakers or Zone B speakers cannot be connected

simultaneously.

Operating the Zone B

Basic playback procedure

Slide the Zone switch to “ZONE B”.

HDMI

AUDIO

1 2 3

BLUETOOTH

USB

1 2 3

1 2

NET

AUX

SLEEP

ZONE A ZONE B

STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS

ENTER

SETUP OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

SCENE

DVD

NET

RADIO

HDMI

AUDIO

1 2 3

BLUETOOTH

USB

1 2 3

1 2 3 4

NET

AUX

TUNING PRESET

HOME

MEMORY

DISPLAY

RETURN

BLUE

YELLOWGREEN

RED

SLEEP

ZONE A ZONE B

HDMI

UDI

BLUETOOTH

1 2

AUX

SLEEP

ZONE A

ZONE B

Press z (receiver power).

Each time you press the key, the ZONE B audio output is on or off.

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

STEREO

PARTY

TUNED

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

MUT E VI RTU AL

MASTER

VOL .

ZONE

HDMI1

“ZONE B” lights up

Use the input selection keys to select an input source.

HDMI

AUDIO

1 2 3

BLUETOOTH

USB

1 2 3

1 2

NET

AUX

SLEEP

ZONE A ZONE B

STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS

ENTER

SETUP OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

SCENE

DVD

NET

RADIO

HDMI

AUDIO

1 2 3

BLUETOOTH

USB

1 2 3

1 2 3 4

NET

AUX

TUNING PRESET

HOME

MEMORY

DISPLAY

RETURN

BLUE

YELLOWGREEN

RED

SLEEP

ZONE A ZONE B

SLEEP

ZONE

Input selection keys

Start playback on the external device or select a radio station.

Press VOLUME to adjust the volume.

Note

To adjust the volume for Zone B separately, see “Adjusting the volume for Zone B

separately”

(p.84).

Correcting volume difference between Zone A and

Zone B

If you are bothered by volume difference between Zone A/B, follow the procedure

below to adjust the volume for Zone B.

Press OPTION.

Note

Slide the Zone switch to “ZONE A” in menu operations.

Use the cursor keys to select “Volume Trim” (Volume Trim) and

press ENTER.

Note

▪ To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

▪ Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “ZoneB Trim” (ZB.Trim) and

the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the setting.

Setting range

-10.0 dB to +10.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)

Default

0.0 dB

To exit from the menu, press OPTION.

Note

This setting is not effective when “ZoneB Volume” (p.103) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Async.”.

Adjusting the volume for Zone B separately

You can separately adjust the volume for Zone B using the remote control when

“ZoneB Volume”

(p.103) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Async.”.

Slide the Zone switch to “ZONE B”.

Press VOLUME to adjust the volume for Zone B.

Note

To mute the audio output to Zone B, press MUTE.

Useful functions

Registering favorite items (shortcut)

You can register up to 40 favorite USB, Bluetooth and network contents as shortcuts

and access them directly by selecting the shortcut numbers.

Note

▪ You can also use the “Favorites” feature to register Internet radio stations (p.80).

▪ The unit registers Bluetooth or AirPlay as an input source. No individual content can be registered.

Registering an item

Select a desired item and register it to a shortcut number.

Play back a song or a radio station to be registered.

Hold down MEMORY for 3 seconds.

STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS

ENTER

SETUP OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

SCENE

DVD

NET

RADIO

HDMI

AUDIO

1 2 3

BLUETOOTH

USB

1 2 3

1 2 3 4

NET

AUX

TUNING PRESET

HOME

MEMORY

DISPLAY

RETURN

BLUE

YELLOWGREEN

RED

SLEEP

ZONE A ZONE B

STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS

TUNING

PRESET

HOME

MEMORY

BLUE

YELLOWGREEN

RED

STRAIGHT

DIRECT

ENHANCER

BASS

TUNING

PRESET

HOME

BLUE

YELL

REE

MEMORY

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

PARTY

ZONE

3 B2 A

MUT E VI RTU AL

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

STEREO

TUNED

VOL .

01:Empty

Shortcut number (flashes)

Note

To change a shortcut number to which the item will be registered, use PRESET to select the

shortcut number after step 2.

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

PARTY

ZONE

3 B2 A

MUT E VI RTU AL

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

STEREO

TUNED

VOL .

02:Empty

“Empty” (not in use) or item currently registered

To confirm the registration, press MEMORY.

Recalling a registered item

Recall a registered item by selecting the shortcut number.

Press BLUETOOTH, NET or USB.

HDMI

AUDIO

1 2 3

BLUETOOTH

USB

1 2 3

1 2

NET

AUX

SLEEP

ZONE A ZONE B

STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS

ENTER

SETUP OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

SCENE

DVD

NET

RADIO

HDMI

AUDIO

1 2 3

BLUETOOTH

USB

1 2 3

1 2 3 4

NET

AUX

TUNING PRESET

HOME

MEMORY

DISPLAY

RETURN

BLUE

YELLOWGREEN

RED

SLEEP

ZONE A ZONE B

HDMI

UDI

1 2

AUX

SLEEP

ZONE

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

Press PRESET repeatedly to select a desired item.

STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS

ENTER

SETUP OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

SCENE

DVD

NET

RADIO

HDMI

AUDIO

1 2 3

BLUETOOTH

USB

1 2 3

1 2 3 4

NET

AUX

TUNING PRESET

HOME

MEMORY

DISPLAY

RETURN

BLUE

YELLOWGREEN

RED

SLEEP

ZONE A ZONE B

STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS

TUNING

PRESET

HOME

MEMORY

BLUE

YELLOWGREEN

RED

STRAIGHT

DIRECT

ENHANCER

BASS

TUNING

HOME

MEMORY

BLUE

YELL

REE

PRESET

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

PARTY

ZONE

3 B2 A

MUT E VI RTU AL

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

STEREO

TUNED

VOL .

01:USB

Note

▪ “No Presets” appears when no items are registered.

▪ The registered item cannot be recalled in the following cases.

– A USB storage device which contains the registered item is not connected to this unit.

– A PC which contains the registered item is turned off or not connected to the network.

– The registered network content is temporarily unavailable or out of service.

– The registered item (file) has been deleted or moved to another location.

– A Bluetooth connection cannot be established.

▪ When you register music files stored on a USB storage device or a PC, this unit memorizes the

relative position of the music files in the folder. If you have added or deleted any music files to or

from the folder, this unit may not recall the music file correctly. In such cases, register the items

again.

▪ The registered content (songs and Internet radio stations) can be displayed as a list and easily

recalled by using MusicCast CONTROLLER (

p.47) on your mobile device.

Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu)

You can configure separate playback settings for different playback sources. This

menu is available on the front panel (or on the TV screen), allowing you to easily

configure settings during playback.

Press OPTION.

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

PARTY

ZONE

3 B2 A

MUT E VI RTU AL

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

STEREO

TUNED

VOL .

Input Select

Front display

TV screen

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.

Note

To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.

To exit from the menu, press OPTION.

Option menu items

Note

▪ Available items vary depending on the selected input source.

▪ Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.

▪ Default settings are underlined.

▪ Depending on the region of purchase, some menu items for audio streaming services are also available.

For details, refer to each manual on the supplied CD-ROM.

Item Function Page

Input Select (Input Select)

Switches the input source. p.88

Tone Control (

Tone Control)

Adjusts the level of high-frequency range and low-

frequency range individually.

p.88

DSP/Surround

(DSP/

Surround)

Program (PRG)

Select the sound programs and stereo playback. p.52

Sur.Decode

(SrDec)

Select which surround decoder is used when

Sur.Decode

is selected as the program.

p.54

DSP Level

(DSP Level)

Adjusts the sound field effect level. p.88

Adaptive DRC

(A.DRC)

Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to

minimum) is automatically adjusted when the volume

is adjusted.

p.88

Enhancer

(Enhancer)

Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer. p.89

Volume Trim

(Volume Trim)

Input Trim

(In.Trim)

Corrects volume differences between input sources. p.89

Subwoofer Trim

(SW.Trim)

Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume. p.89

ZoneB Trim

(ZB.Trim)

Corrects volume differences between Zone A/B. p.84

Lipsync (Lipsync)

Enables/disables the “Lipsync” setting in the “Setup”

menu.

p.89

Signal Info.

(

Signal Info.)

Displays information about the video/audio signal. p.89

Audio In (Audio In)

Combines the video jack of the selected input source

with an audio jack of others.

p.90

Video Out (Video Out)

Selects a video to be output with the selected audio

source.

p.90

FM Mode (FM Mode)

Switches between “Stereo” and “Mono” for FM radio

reception.

p.56,

p.65

Item Function Page

Preset

(Preset)

Auto Preset

Automatically registers FM radio stations with strong

signals as presets.

p.57,

Clear Preset

Clear radio stations registered to preset numbers.

p.59,

63,

p.67

Shuffle (Shuffle)

Configures the shuffle setting for the USB storage

device (p.75) or media server (p.78).

—

Repeat (Repeat)

Configures the repeat setting for the USB storage

device (p.75) or media server (p.78).

—

Volume Interlock (Vol.Interlock)

Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPhone

via AirPlay.

p.90

Add to favorites (Add to Fav.)

Remove from favorites

(RemovefromFav.)

Adds your favorite Internet radio station to the

“Favorites

” folder, or removes it from the “Favorites”

folder.

p.80

Init Scan (Init Scan)

(U.K., Europe, Australia and Russia models)

Performs an initial scan for DAB radio reception.

p.60

Tune AID (Tune AID)

(U.K., Europe, Australia and Russia models)

Checks reception strength of each DAB channel.

p.64

Input Select (Input Select)

Switches the input source. Press ENTER to switch to the selected input source.

Tone Control (Tone Control)

Adjusts the level of high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass)

individually.

Choices

Treble (Treble), Bass (Bass)

Setting range

-6.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)

Note

▪ When both “Treble” and “Bass” are 0.0 dB, “Bypass” appears.

▪ You can also adjust the tone with the front panel controls. Press TONE CONTROL to select “Treble” or

“Bass”, then press PROGRAM to make an adjustment.

▪ If you set an extreme value, sounds may not match those from other channels.

DSP/Surround (DSP/Surround)

Configures the sound field program and surround settings.

DSP Level (DSP Level)

Adjusts the sound field effect level.

Setting range

-6 dB to 0 dB to +3 dB (1 dB increments)

Adaptive DRC (A.DRC)

Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is automatically

adjusted when the volume level is adjusted. When it is set to “

On”, it is useful for

listening to playback at a low volume at night.

Settings

On (On) Automatically adjusts the dynamic range.

Off (Off) The dynamic range is not automatically adjusted.

If “On” is selected, the dynamic range becomes narrow at a low volume and wide

at a high volume.

Enhancer (Enhancer)

Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer (p.55).

Note

▪ This setting is applied separately to each input source.

▪ You can also use ENHANCER on the remote control to enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer

(p.55).

Settings

Off (Off) Disables Compressed Music Enhancer.

On (On) Enables Compressed Music Enhancer.

Default

TUNER, (network sources), AirPlay, SERVER, NET RADIO, Bluetooth, USB: On

(On)

Others: Off (Off)

Volume Trim (Volume Trim)

Fine-adjusts volume difference between input sources or subwoofer volume.

Input Trim (In.Trim)

Corrects volume differences between input sources. If you are bothered by volume

differences when switching between input sources, use this function to correct it.

Note

This setting is applied separately to each input source.

Setting range

-6.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)

Subwoofer Trim (SW.Trim)

Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume.

Setting range

-6.0 dB to

0.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)

Lipsync (Lipsync)

Enables/disables the adjustment configured in “Lipsync” (p.101) in the “Setup” menu.

Note

This setting is applied separately to each input source.

Settings

Off (Off) Disables the “Lipsync” adjustment.

On (On) Enables the “Lipsync” adjustment.

Signal Info. (Signal Info.)

Displays information about the video/audio signal.

Choices

Format (FORMAT) Audio format of the input signal

Channel (CHANNEL)

The number of source channels in the input signal (front/surround/LFE)

For example, “3/2/0.1” means 3 front channels, 2 surround channels, and

LFE.

For example, “7.1.4” denotes “standard 7.1-channel plus 4 for overhead

speaker channels”.

Sampling (SAMPLING) The number of samples per second of the input digital signal

Video In (VIDEO IN) Type and resolution of the input digital signal

Video Out

(VIDEO OUT

)

Type and resolution of the output digital signal

Note

To switch the information on the front display, press the cursor keys (q/w) repeatedly.

Audio In (Audio In)

Combines the video jack of the selected input source with an audio jack of others. For

example, use this function in the following cases.

• Connecting a playback device that supports HDMI video output, but not HDMI

audio output

Input sources

HDMI 1-4, AV 1-3

Settigns

AV 1-3, AUDIO 1-3

Setup procedure

See “Changing the combination of video/audio input jacks” (p.28).

Video Out (Video Out)

Selects a video to be output with the selected audio source. For example, you can

watch the video while listening to the radio.

Input sources

AUX, AUDIO 1-3, TUNER, (network sources), AirPlay, MusicCast Link, SERVER, NET

RADIO, Bluetooth, USB

Settings

Off(Off) Does not output video.

HDMI 1-4, AV 1-3 Outputs video input through the corresponding video input jacks.

Volume Interlock (Vol.Interlock)

Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPhone via AirPlay.

Settings

Off (Off) Disables volume controls from iTunes/iPhone.

Limited(Ltd)

Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPhone within the limited range

(-80 dB to -20 dB and mute).

Full (Full)

Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPhone in the full range

(-80 dB to +16.5 dB and mute).

CONFIGURATIONS

Configuring various functions (Setup Menu)

You can configure the unit’s various function with the menu displayed on the TV

screen.

Note

▪ Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. If not, carry

out operations while viewing the front display.

▪ If new firmware is available, the message screen appears. For details, see “Updating the unit’s firmware

via the network”

(p.115).

▪

If new firmware is available, the envelope icon (p) appears in the screen.

Press SETUP.

Use the cursor keys to select a menu and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.

Note

To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting and press ENTER.

To exit from the menu, press SETUP.

Setup menu items

Menu Item Function Page

Speaker

Configuration

Power Amp Assign

Selects a speaker system. p.94

Subwoofer

Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected. p.94

Front

Selects the size of the front speakers. p.94

Center

Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size. p.95

Surround

Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their size. p.95

Surround Back

Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their size. p.95

Presence

Selects whether or not presence speakers are connected and their size. p.95

Layout

Selects the layouts of the presence speakers. p.96

Crossover

Sets the lower limit of the low-frequency component that can be output from speakers whose size is set to “Small”. p.96

Subwoofer Phase

Sets the phase of the subwoofer. p.96

Extra Bass

Enables/disables Extra Bass. p.96

Virtual CINEMA FRONT

Selects whether to use the front 5-channel speaker (Virtual CINEMA FRONT) configuration. p.97

Distance

Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position. p.97

Level

Adjusts the volume of each speaker. p.97

Equalizer

Adjusts the tone with an equalizer. p.97

Test Tone

Enables/disables the test tone output. p.98

HDMI

HDMI Control

Enables/disables HDMI Control. p.99

Audio Output

Enables/disables the audio output from a TV. p.99

Standby Through

Selects whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in standby mode. p.99

4K Upscaling

Enables/disables the upscaling function. p.99

TV Audio Input

Selects an audio input jack of the unit to be used for TV audio input. p.99

Standby Sync

Selects whether to use HDMI control to link the standby behavior of the TV and the unit. p.100

ARC

Enables/disables ARC. p.100

SCENE

Enables/disables SCENE link playback. p.100

Menu Item Function Page

Sound

DSP Parameter

CINEMA DSP 3D Mode

Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D. p.101

Center Spread

Selects whether to spread the center channel signals to left and right when 2-channel source is played. p.101

Center Image

Adjusts the center localization (broadening effect) of the front sound field. p.101

Lipsync

Select

Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output. p.101

Adjustment

Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually. p.101

Dialogue

Dialogue Level

Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds. p.102

DTS Dialogue Control

Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds for DTS contents. p.102

Dialogue Lift

Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds. p.102

Volume

Scale

Switches the scale of the volume display. p.103

Dynamic Range

Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS signals) playback. p.103

Max Volume

Sets the limit value of the volume. p.103

Initial Volume

Sets the initial volume for when this receiver is turned on. p.103

ZoneB Volume

Selects whether to adjust the volume for Zone B in conjunction with the volume for Zone A. p.103

ECO

Auto Power Standby

Set the amount of time for the auto-standby function. p.104

ECO Mode

Enables/disables the eco mode (power saving mode). p.104

Function

Input Rename

Changes the input source name displayed on the front display. p.105

Input Skip

Set which input source is skipped when operating the INPUT knob. p.106

Dimmer

Adjusts the brightness of the front display. p.106

Memory Guard

Prevents accidental changes to the settings. p.106

Remote Color Key

Set the unit's functions for the RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE key of the remote control. p.107

Network

Information

Displays the network information on the unit. p.108

Network Connection

Selects the network connection method. p.108

IP Address

Configures the network parameters (such as IP address). p.108

MAC Address Filter

Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices. p.109

DMC Control

Selects whether to allow a DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control playback. p.109

Network Standby

Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from other network devices. p.109

Network Name

Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network devices. p.110

MusicCast Link Power Interlock

Selects whether turning on the power of the master device of the MusicCast network (this unit) also turns on the

power of other devices of the network.

p.110

Network Update

Updates the firmware via the network. p.110

Bluetooth

Enables/disables the Bluetooth functions. p.110

Audio Receive

Disconnect

Terminates the Bluetooth connection between the Bluetooth device (such as smartphones) and the unit. p.69

Bluetooth Standby

Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from Bluetooth devices (Bluetooth standby). p.110

Audio Send

Transmitter

Enables/disables the Bluetooth audio transmitter function. p.111

Device Search

Searches available Bluetooth devices (speakers/headphones) when the unit is used as a Bluetooth audio transmitter. p.70

Language

Select an on-screen menu language. p.111

Speaker

Configures the speaker settings manually.

Note

Default settings are underlined.

Configuration

Configures the output characteristics of the speakers.

Note

When configuring the speaker size, as a general guideline, select “Large” if the woofer diameter of your

speaker is 16 cm (6‑1/4”) or larger, or “Small

” if it is smaller than 16 cm (6‑1/4”).

Power Amp Assign

Selects a speaker system.

In addition to the 5.1- or 7.1-channel speaker system, various speaker

configurations are possible using the presence speakers, Zone B speakers or bi-

amp connections.

Settings

Presence

Select this option when you use presence speakers in the 5.1.2

system.

Sur.Back

Select this option when you use a normal speaker system (not using

the presence speakers, Zone B speakers or bi-amp connections).

BI-AMP

Select this option when you connect front speakers that support bi-

amp connections (

p.81).

Zone B

Select this option when you use Zone B speakers (p.82) in addition to

the speaker system in the main zone (Zone A).

5.1ch

Select this option when you don't use the SURROUND BACK/

PRESENCE/BI-AMP/ZONE B

terminals.

Subwoofer

Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected.

Settings

Use

Select this option when a subwoofer is connected.

The subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio

and low-frequency components from other channels.

None

Select this option when no subwoofer is connected.

The front speakers will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel

audio and low-frequency components from other channels.

Front

Selects the size of the front speakers.

Settings

Small

Select this option for small speakers.

The subwoofer will produce front channel low-frequency components

(configurable in “

Crossover”).

Large

Select this option for large speakers.

The front speakers will produce all of the front channel frequency

components.

Note

“Front” is automatically set to “Large” when “Subwoofer” is set to “None”.

Center

Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size.

Settings

Small

Select this option for small speakers.

The subwoofer or front speakers will produce center channel low-

frequency components (configurable in “

Crossover”).

Large

Select this option for large speakers.

The center speaker will produce all of the center channel frequency

components.

None

Select this option when no center speaker is connected.

The front speakers will produce center channel audio.

Surround

Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their sizes.

Settings

Small

Select this option for small speakers.

The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround channel low-

frequency components (configurable in “

Crossover”).

Large

Select this option for large speakers.

The surround speakers will produce all of the surround channel

frequency components.

None

Select this option when no surround speakers are connected.

The front speakers will produce surround channel audio. Virtual

CINEMA DSP works when you select a sound program.

Surround Back

Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their sizes.

Settings

Small x1

Select this option when one small speaker is connected.

The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel

low-frequency components (configurable in “

Crossover”).

Small x2

Select this option when two small speakers are connected.

The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel

low-frequency components (configurable in “

Crossover”).

Large x1

Select this option when one large speaker is connected.

The surround back speaker will produce all of the surround back

channel frequency components.

Large x2

Select this option when two large speakers are connected.

The surround back speakers will produce all of the surround back

channel frequency components.

None

Select this option when no surround back speakers are connected.

The surround speakers and subwoofer (or front speakers) will produce

surround back channel audio.

Note

▪ “Surround Back” is automatically set to “None” when “Power Amp Assign” is set to other than

“Sur.Back”, or when “Surround” is set to “None”.

▪ “Surround Back” is not available when “Virtual CINEMA FRONT” is set to “On”.

Presence

Selects whether or not presence speakers are connected and their size.

Settings

Small Select this option for small speakers.

Large Select this option for large speakers.

None Select this option when no presence speakers are connected.

Note

“Presence” is automatically set to “None” when “Power Amp Assign” is set to other than “Presence”.

Layout

Selects a presence layout when presence speakers are used. This setting

facilitates the optimization of the sound field effect.

Settings

Front Height

Select this option when presence speakers are installed on the front

side wall.

Overhead Select this option when presence speakers are installed to the ceiling.

Dolby Enabled SP

Select this option when using the Dolby Enabled speakers as the

presence speakers.

Note

▪ This setting is not available when “Presence” is set to “None”.

▪ To play Dolby Atmos contents using the presence speakers, see “Presence speaker layout” (p.21).

Crossover

Sets the lower limit of the low-frequency components that can be output from a

speaker whose size is set to “

Small”. A frequency sound lower than the specified

value will be produced from the subwoofer or front speakers.

Settings

40 Hz, 60 Hz,

80 Hz, 90 Hz, 100 Hz, 110 Hz, 120 Hz, 160 Hz, 200 Hz

Note

If the volume and crossover frequency are adjustable on your subwoofer, set the volume to half and

crossover frequency to maximum.

Subwoofer Phase

Sets the phase of the subwoofer. When the bass sound is lacking or unclear,

switch the subwoofer phase.

Settings

Normal Does not reverse the subwoofer phase.

Reverse Reverses the subwoofer phase.

Extra Bass

Enables/disables Extra Bass. When Extra Bass is enabled, you can enjoy

enhanced bass sounds, regardless of the size of the front speakers and the

presence or absence of the subwoofer.

Settings

Off Disables Extra Bass.

On Enables Extra Bass.

Note

You can also use BASS on the remote control to enable/disable Extra Bass (p.55).

Virtual CINEMA FRONT

Selects whether to use the front 5-channel speaker (Virtual CINEMA FRONT)

configuration.

Settings

Off Disables the front 5-channel speaker configuration.

On Enables the front 5-channel speaker configuration.

Note

▪ Select “On” only when utilizing the Virtual CINEMA FRONT configuration (p.19).

▪ This setting is not available when “Surround” is set to “None”.

Distance

Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position so that sounds from the

speakers reach the listening position at the same time. First, select the unit of distance

from “Meter” or “Feet”.

Choices

Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R,

Presence L, Presence R, Subwoofer

Setting range

0.30 m to 3.00 m to 24.00 m (1.0 ft to 10.0 ft to 80.0 ft), 0.05 m (0.2 ft) increments

Level

Adjusts the volume of each speaker.

Choices

Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R,

Presence L

, Presence R, Subwoofer

Setting range

-10.0 dB to

0.0 dB to +10.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)

Equalizer

Adjusts the tone with an equalizer.

EQ Select

Selects the type of equalizer to be used.

Settings

PEQ

Applies the parametric equalizer values obtained by the YPAO

measurement (

p.35).

GEQ

Select this option when you want to adjust the equalizer manually.

For details, see “Manual equalizer adjustment”.

Off Does not use the equalizer.

Note

“PEQ” is available only when the YPAO has been performed (p.35).

Manual equalizer adjustment

Set “EQ Select” to “GEQ”.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Channel” and the cursor

keys (e/r) to select the desired speaker channel.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select the desired band

(frequency) and the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the gain.

Setting range

-6.0 dB to +6.0 dB

To exit from the menu, press SETUP.

Test Tone

Enables/disables the test tone output. Test tone output helps you to adjust the speaker

balance or equalizer while confirming its effect.

Settings

Off Does not output test tones.

Outputs test tones automatically when you adjust the speaker balance or

equalizer.

HDMI

Configures the HDMI settings.

Note

Default settings are underlined.

HDMI Control

Enables/disables HDMI Control (p.132).

Settings

Off Disables HDMI Control.

Enables HDMI Control.

Configure the settings in “TV Audio Input”, “Standby Sync”, “ARC”, and

“SCENE”.

Note

To use HDMI control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.132) after connecting HDMI

Control-compatible devices.

Audio Output

Enables/disables the audio output from a TV connected to the HDMI OUT jack.

Settings

Off Disables the audio output from the TV.

On Enables the audio output from the TV.

Note

This setting is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.

Standby Through

Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the

unit is in standby mode. If this function is set to “

On” or “Auto”, you can use the input

selection keys (HDMI 1–4) to select an HDMI input even when the unit is in standby

mode (the standby indicator on the unit blinks).

Settings

Off

(When “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”)

Does not output videos/audio to the TV.

Auto

Automatically selects whether to output videos/audio depending on the

status of the connected device.

Outputs videos/audio to the TV.

(The unit consumes more power than when “

Off” is selected.)

4K Upscaling

Enables/disables the upscaling function. When it is enabled, 1080p content is

displayed at 4K resolution.

Settings

Off Disables the upscaling function.

On Enables the upscaling function.

TV Audio Input

Selects an audio input jack of the unit to be used for TV audio input when “HDMI

Control” is set to “On”. The unit’s input source automatically switches to TV audio when

the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner.

Settings

AV 1–3, AUDIO 1–3

Default

AUDIO1

Note

When using ARC to input TV audio to the unit, you cannot use the input jacks selected here for connecting an

external device because the input will be used for TV audio input.

Standby Sync

Select whether to use HDMI control to link the unit's standby mode to the TV's power

when “HDMI Control

” is set to “On”.

Settings

Off Does not set the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.

On Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.

Auto

Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off only when the unit

is receiving TV audio or HDMI signals.

ARC

Enables/disables ARC (p.26) when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.

Settings

Off Disables ARC.

On Enables ARC.

Note

You do not need to change this setting normally. In case noises are produced from the speakers connected

to the unit because TV audio signals input to the unit via ARC are not supported by the unit, set “ARC” to “Off”

and use the TV’s speakers.

SCENE

Enables/disable SCENE link playback when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.

When SCENE link playback is enabled, HDMI Control-compatible devices connected

to the unit via HDMI automatically works as follows, with a scene selection.

• TV: turning on and displaying video from the playback device

• Playback device: starting playback

Choices (SCENE keys)

BD / DVD, TV, NET, RADIO

Settings

Off Disables SCENE link playback for the selected SCENE key.

On Enables SCENE link playback for the selected SCENE key.

Default

BD / DVD, TV: On

NET, RADIO: Off

Note

SCENE link playback may not work properly due to the compatibility between devices. We recommend using

TV and playback devices from the same manufacturer so that HDMI Control works more effectively.

100

Sound

Configures the audio output settings.

Note

Default settings are underlined.

DSP Parameter

Configures the surround decoder settings.

CINEMA DSP 3D Mode

Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D (p.52). If this function is set to “On”, CINEMA

DSP 3D functions with the selected sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 7ch

Stereo).

Settings

Off Disables CINEMA DSP 3D.

On Enables CINEMA DSP 3D.

Center Spread

Selects whether to spread the center channel signals to left and right when 2-

channel source is played. If you feel the center sound is too strong, set this

function to “On”. This setting is effective when “bDsur” is selected.

Settings

Off Disables Center Spread.

On Enables Center Spread.

Center Image

Adjusts the center localization (broadening effect) of the front sound field. Adjust

this higher to strengthen the center localization (less broadening effect) or lower to

weaken it (more broadening effect). This setting is effective when “

Neo:6 Music” is

selected.

Setting range

0.0 to

0.3 to 1.0

Lipsync

Adjusts the delay between video and audio output.

Note

You can enable/disable the Lipsync function by input sources in “Lipsync (Lipsync)” (p.89) in the “Option”

menu.

Select

Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output.

Setting range

Manual

Select this option when you want to adjust the delay between video

and audio output manually.

Adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”.

Auto

Adjusts the delay between video and audio output automatically when

a TV that supports an automatic lipsync function is connected to the

unit via HDMI.

If necessary, you can fine-adjust the audio output timing in

“Adjustment”.

Note

“Select” is automatically set to “Manual” depending on the TV connected to the unit.

Adjustment

Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually when “Select” is set to

“Manual

”. You can fine-adjust the audio output timing when “Select” is set to

“Auto”.

Setting range

0 ms to 500 ms (1 ms increments)

101

Dialogue

Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds.

Dialogue Level

Adjusts the volume of the center orientation sounds such as dialogue.

Setting range

0 to 3 (higher to strengthen)

Note

This setting is not available when DTS:X content is played back, or when the Dolby Surround or

Neural:X decoder is working.

DTS Dialogue Control

Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds for DTS contents.

Setting range

0 to 6 (higher to strengthen)

Note

This setting is available only when DTS:X content which supports the DTS Dialogue Control feature is

played back.

Dialogue Lift

Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds. If the dialogue sounds as if it is

coming from below the TV screen, you can raise its perceived height by increasing

this setting.

Note

This setting is available only when one of the following conditions is met.

▪ One of the sound programs (except for 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo) is selected when presence

speakers are used.

▪ Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) (p.8) is working.

(You may hear dialogue sounds from the surround speakers depending on the listening position.)

Setting range

0 to 5 (The bigger the value the higher the position)

Ideal position

102

Volume

Configures the volume settings.

Scale

Switches the scale of the volume display.

Settings

dB Displays the volume in the “dB” unit.

0-97 Displays the volume in the numeric value (0.5 to 97.0).

Dynamic Range

Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital

and DTS signals) playback.

Settings

Maximum Produces audio without adjusting the dynamic range.

Standard Optimizes the dynamic range for regular home use.

Min/Auto

Sets the dynamic range for clear sound even at night or at low

volumes.

When playing back Dolby TrueHD signals, the dynamic range is

automatically adjusted based on the input signal information.

Max Volume

Sets the limit value of the volume.

Setting range

-30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments),

+16.5 dB [50.0 to 95.0 (5.0 increments),

97.0]

Initial Volume

Sets the initial volume when the receiver is turned on.

Settings

Off

Sets the level to the volume level of the unit when it last entered

standby mode.

Mute Sets the unit to mute the audio output.

-80.0 dB to +16.5 dB

(0.5 dB increments)

[0.5 to 97.0

(0.5 increments)]

Sets the level to the specified volume level.

ZoneB Volume

Selects whether to adjust the volume for Zone B in conjunction with the volume for

Zone A.

Settings

Sync.

Adjusts the volume for Zone B in conjunction with the volume for Zone

Async.

Does not adjust the volume for Zone B in conjunction with the volume

for Zone A. Adjust the volume for Zone B separately (p.84).

Note

If “ZoneB Volume” is set to “Async.”, the volume for Zone B is temporarily set to -40 dB. As necessary,

adjust the volume using the remote control (

p.84).

103

ECO

Configures the power supply settings.

Note

Default settings are underlined.

Auto Power Standby

Set the amount of time for the auto-standby function.

Settings

Off Does not set the unit to standby mode automatically.

20 minutes

Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit and

the unit has not detected any input signal for the specified time.

2 hours, 4 hours,

8 hours, 12 hours

Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit for the

specified time.

Default

U.K. and Europe models: 20 minutes

Other models: Off

Note

Just before the unit enters standby mode, “AutoPowerStdby” appears and then countdown starts in the front

display.

ECO Mode

You can reduce the unit’s power consumption by setting the eco mode to “On”. After

setting, be sure to press ENTER to restart the unit.

When the eco mode is enabled, you can reduce the unit’s power consumption.

Settings

Off Disables the eco mode.

On Enables the eco mode.

Note

▪ When “ECO Mode” is set to “On”, the front panel display may become dark.

▪ If you want to play audio at high volume, set “ECO Mode” to “Off”.

104

Function

Configures the functions that make the unit easier to use.

Note

Default settings are underlined.

Input Rename

Changes the input source name displayed on the front display. You can also select a

name created by the Auto Rename function.

Input sources

HDMI 1-4, AV 1-3, AUX, AUDIO 1-3, TUNER, MusicCast Link, SERVER, NET RADIO,

Bluetooth, USB

Default

HDMI 1-4: Auto

Others: Manual (For AUX, AUDIO 3, TUNER, MusicCast Link, SERVER, NET RADIO,

Bluetooth, USB only “Manual” can be selected.)

Procedure to rename automatically

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an input source to be

renamed.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Auto”.

The unit creates a name automatically according to the connected

device.

To change another input source, repeat steps 1 to 2.

To exit from the menu, press SETUP.

Note

During selecting “Auto”, the created name is saved even after the device connection is terminated. To

reset to the default setting, switch the setting to “Manual” at once and then set it again to “Auto”.

Procedure to rename manually

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an input source to be

renamed.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Manual” and press

ENTER.

The edit screen is displayed.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER key to edit the name, and then

select “OK” and press ENTER.

Note

▪ To cancel the entry, select “CANCEL”.

▪ If you select "RESET", the default input name will be inserted into the editing area.

To change another input source name, repeat steps 1 to 4.

To exit from the menu, press SETUP.

105

Input Skip

Set which input source is skipped when operating the INPUT knob.

You can select the desired input source quickly by using this function.

Input sources

HDMI 1-4, AV 1-3, AUX, AUDIO 1-3, TUNER, NET, Bluetooth, USB

Settings

Off Does not skip the selected input source.

On Skips the selected input source.

Dimmer

Adjusts the brightness of the front display.

Setting range

-4 to

0 (higher to brighten)

Note

The front display may become dark when “ECO Mode” (p.104) is set to “On”.

Memory Guard

Prevents accidental changes to the settings.

Settings

Off Does not protect the settings.

On Protects the settings until “Off” is selected.

Note

When “Memory Guard” is set to “On”, the lock icon (o) is displayed on the menu screen.

106

Remote Color Key

Set the unit's functions for the RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE key of the remote control.

Settings

Default

Assigns the functions of playback devices connected to the unit with an

HDMI cable.

Input

Assigns the unit's input sources to each key. The assigned input sources

can be set separately.

Input sources

HDMI 1-4, AV 1-3, AUX, AUDIO 1-3, TUNER, NET, Bluetooth, USB

Default

RED: HDMI2, GREEN: HDMI4, YELLOW: AV 2, BLUE: AUX

Program

Assigns the functions of sound mode to each key.

RED: MOVIE

GREEN: MUSIC

YELLOW: STEREO

BLUE: SUR.DECODE

For example, if you press the RED key repeatedly, you can select your

favorite sound program from the sound programs (MOVIE

) (p.52) suitable

for the video source.

107

Network

Configures the network settings.

Note

Default settings are underlined.

Information

Displays the network information on the unit.

Status The connection status of the NETWORK jack

Connection Connection method

SSID The access point to which the unit is connected

Security The encryption method for your network

MusicCast Network Readiness or not for the MusicCast Network

MAC Address (Ethernet)

MAC address

MAC Address (Wi-Fi)

IP Address IP address

Subnet Mask Subnet mask

Default Gateway The IP address of the default gateway

DNS Server (P) The IP address of the primary DNS server

DNS Server (S) The IP address of the secondary DNS server

Network Connection

Selects the network connection method.

Choices

Wired

Select this option when you want to connect the unit to a network with

a commercially-available network cable.

Wireless(Wi-Fi)

Select this option when you want to connect the unit to a network via

the wireless router (access point). For details on settings, see

“Connecting the unit to a wireless network”

(p.40).

Wireless Direct

Select this option when you want to connect a mobile device to the

unit directly. For details on settings, see “Connecting a mobile device

to the unit directly (Wireless Direct)”

(p.45).

IP Address

Configures the network parameters (such as IP address).

DHCP

Select whether to use a DHCP server.

Settings

Off

Does not use a DHCP server. Configure the network parameters

manually. For details, see “Manual network settings”.

Uses a DHCP server to automatically obtain the unit’s network

parameters (such as IP address).

Manual network settings

Set “DHCP” to “Off”.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a parameter type.

IP Address Specifies an IP address.

Subnet Mask Specifies a subnet mask.

Default Gateway Specifies the IP address of the default gateway.

DNS Server (P) Specifies the IP address of the primary DNS server.

DNS Server (S) Specifies the IP address of the secondary DNS server.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the

cursor keys (q/w) to select a value.

To exit from the menu, press SETUP.

108

MAC Address Filter

Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices.

Note

Operation of the AirPlay function (p.71) or the DMC is not limited by this setting.

Filter

Enables/disables the MAC address filter.

Settings

Off Disables the MAC address filter.

Enables the MAC address filter. In “MAC Address 1–10”, specify the

MAC addresses of the network devices that will be permitted access

to the unit.

MAC Address 1–10

Specifies the MAC addresses (up to 10) of the network devices that will be

permitted access to the unit when “Filter” is set to “On”.

Procedure

Use the cursor keys (

q/w) to select an MAC address number

(1 to 10).

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the

cursor keys (q/w) to select a value.

To exit from the menu, press SETUP.

DMC Control

Selects whether to allow DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control

playback.

Settings

Disable Does not allow DMCs to control playback.

Enable Allows DMCs to control playback.

Note

A Digital Media Controller (DMC) is a device that can control other network devices through the network.

When this function is enabled, you can control playback of the unit from DMCs (such as Windows Media

Player 12) on the same network.

Network Standby

Selects whether the unit can be turned on from other network devices (network

standby).

Settings

Off Disables the network standby function.

Enables the network standby function.

(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)

Auto

Enables the network standby function.

(If “Network Connection” is set to “Wired”, the unit is set to the power

saving mode when the network cable is disconnected.)

With an advanced energy saving design, this product achieves a low power

consumption of not more than two watts when in Network Standby mode.

109

Network Name

Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network

devices.

Procedure

Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER key to edit the name, and then

select “OK” to confirm the new name.

To exit from the menu, press SETUP.

MusicCast Link Power Interlock

Selects whether turning on the power of the master device of the MusicCast network

(this unit) also turns on the power of other devices of the network.

Settings

Off Disables the power interlock from the unit (MusicCast master).

On Enables the power interlock from the unit (MusicCast master).

Network Update

Updates the firmware via the network.

Perform Update

Starts the process to update the unit’s firmware.

Firmware Version

Displays the version of the firmware installed on the unit.

System ID

Displays the system ID number.

Bluetooth

Configures the Bluetooth settings.

Bluetooth

Enables/disables the Bluetooth function (p.69).

Settings

Off Disables the Bluetooth function.

On Enables the Bluetooth function.

Audio Receive

Configures the Bluetooth settings when the unit is used as the Bluetooth audio

receiver.

Bluetooth Standby

Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from Bluetooth

devices (Bluetooth standby). If this function is set to “On”, the unit automatically

turns on when a connect operation is performed on the Bluetooth device.

Settings

Off Disables the Bluetooth standby function.

Enables the Bluetooth standby function.

(The unit consumes more power than when “

Off” is selected.)

Note

This setting is not available when “Network Standby” (p.109) is set to “Off”.

110

Audio Send

Configures the Bluetooth settings when the unit is used as the Bluetooth audio

transmitter.

Transmitter

Enables/disables the Bluetooth audio transmitter function.

When this function is enabled, you can enjoy audio played back on the unit using

Bluetooth speakers/headphones (

p.70).

Settings

Off Disables the Bluetooth audio transmitter function.

On Enables the Bluetooth audio transmitter function.

Language

Select an on-screen menu language.

Note

Default settings are underlined.

Settings

English English

日本語 Japanese

Français French

Deutsch German

Español Spanish

Русский Russian

Italiano Italian

中文 Chinese

Note

The information on the front display is provided in English only.

111

Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu)

Configure the system settings of the unit while viewing the front display.

Set the unit to standby mode.

While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press

z (power).

(power)

STRAIGHTPROGRAM

Press PROGRAM to select an item.

Press STRAIGHT to select a setting.

Press z (power) to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on

again.

The new settings take effect.

ADVANCED SETUP menu items

Note

Default settings are underlined.

Item Function Page

SP IMP.

(U.S.A. and Canada models only)

Changes the speaker impedance setting.

p.112

REMOTE ID Selects the unit’s remote control ID. p.113

TV FORMAT Switches the video signal type of HDMI output. p.113

4K MODE Selects the HDMI 4K signal format. p.113

DTS MODE

This setting informs the player about the DTS formats that the unit

supports.

p.114

INIT Restores the default settings. p.114

UPDATE Updates the firmware. p.114

VERSION Checks the version of firmware currently installed on the unit. p.114

Changing the speaker impedance setting (SP IMP.)

(U.S.A. and Canada models only)

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

STEREO

PARTY

TUNED

ZONE

3 B2 A

VOL .

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

MUT E VI RTU AL

SP IMP.••8¬MIN

Change the unit’s speaker impedance settings depending on the impedance of the

speakers connected.

Settings

6 Ω MIN Select this option when you connect 6-ohm speakers to the unit.

8 Ω MIN Select this option when you connect 8-ohm or higher speakers to the unit.

112

Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE ID)

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

STEREO

PARTY

TUNED

ZONE

3 B2 A

VOL .

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

MUT E VI RTU AL

REMOTE ID••ID1

Change the unit’s remote control ID so that it matches the remote control’s ID (default:

ID1). When using multiple Yamaha AV receivers, you can set each remote control with

a unique remote control ID for its corresponding receiver.

Settings

ID1, ID2

Changing the remote control ID of the remote control

To select ID1, while holding down the cursor key (e), hold down

SCENE (BD/DVD) for more than 3 seconds.

To select ID2, while holding down the cursor key (e), hold down

SCENE (TV) for more than 3 seconds.

Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT)

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

STEREO

PARTY

TUNED

ZONE

3 B2 A

VOL .

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

MUT E VI RTU AL

TV FORMAT•NTSC

Switch the video signal type of HDMI output so that it matches to the format of your TV.

Since the unit automatically selects the video signal type so that it matches to the TV, it

is unnecessary to change the setting normally. Change the setting only when images

on the TV screen do not appear correctly.

Settings

NTSC, PAL

Default

U.S.A. and Canada models: NTSC

Other models: PAL

Selecting the HDMI 4K signal format (4K MODE)

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

STEREO

PARTY

TUNED

ZONE

3 B2 A

VOL .

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

MUT E VI RTU AL

4K MODE•MODE 1

Selects the format of signals input/output at the unit when HDMI 4K compatible TV and

playback device are connected to the unit.

Settings

MODE 1

Inputs/outputs 4K signals shown in the table below. Depending on the

connected device or HDMI cables, video may not be displayed correctly.

In this case, select “MODE 2”.

MODE 2 Inputs/outputs 4K signals shown in the table below.

Note

When “MODE 1” is selected, use a Premium High Speed HDMI Cable or Premium High Speed Cable with

Ethernet.

Format

MODE 1 MODE 2

8 bit 10 bit 12 bit 8 bit 10 bit 12 bit

4K/60, 50 Hz

RGB 4:4:4

– –

YCbCr 4:4:4

– –

YCbCr 4:2:2

–

YCbCr 4:2:0

4 4

–

4K/30, 25, 24 Hz

RGB 4:4:4

4 4

–

YCbCr 4:4:4

4 4

–

YCbCr 4:2:2

4 4

113

DTS Format Notification Setting (DTS MODE)

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

STEREO

PARTY

TUNED

ZONE

3B2A

VOL.

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

MUTE VIRTUAL

DTS MODE•MODE1

This setting informs the player about the DTS formats that the unit supports.

Settings

MODE 1

This mode conforms to the DTS:X standard.

Use this setting under normal circumstances.

MODE 2

Use this setting if the player fails to properly output a DTS signal even

when it is playing back DTS-HD or DTS:X content.

Restoring the default settings (INIT)

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

STEREO

PARTY

TUNED

ZONE

3 B2 A

VOL .

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

MUT E VI RTU AL

INIT••••CANCEL

Restores the default settings for the unit.

Choices

ALL Restores the default settings for the unit.

CANCEL Does not perform an initialization.

Updating the firmware (UPDATE)

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

STEREO

PARTY

TUNED

ZONE

3 B2 A

VOL .

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

MUT E VI RTU AL

UPDATE•••••USB

New firmware that provides additional features or product improvements will be

released as needed. Updates can be downloaded from our website. If the unit is

connected to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network. For details,

refer to the information supplied with updates.

Firmware update procedure

Do not perform this procedure unless firmware update is necessary. Also, make sure

you read the information supplied with updates before updating the firmware.

Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “USB” or “NETWORK” and

press INFO to start firmware update.

Choices

USB Update the firmware using a USB memory device.

NETWORK Update the firmware via the network.

Checking the firmware version (VERSION)

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

STEREO

PARTY

TUNED

ZONE

3 B2 A

VOL .

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

MUT E VI RTU AL

VERSION••xx.xx

Check the version of firmware currently installed on the unit.

Note

▪ You can also check the firmware version in “Network Update” (p.110) in the “Setup” menu.

▪ It may take a while until the firmware version is displayed.

114

Updating the unit’s firmware via the network

New firmware that provides additional features or product improvements will be

released as needed. If the unit is connected to the Internet, you can download the

firmware via the network and update it.

Notice

▪ Do not operate the unit or disconnect the power cable or network cable during firmware update.

Firmware update takes about 20 minutes or more (depending on your Internet connection speed).

▪ If the Internet connection speed is slow, or the unit is connected to the wireless network, network

update may not be possible depending on the condition of the wireless connection. In this case, update

the firmware using the USB memory device (

p.114).

▪

To perform the following procedure, your TV must be connected to the unit via HDMI. If not, perform the

update from the “ADVANCED SETUP

” menu (p.114

▪ For details on update, visit the Yamaha website.

Note

▪ You can also update the firmware using the USB memory device from the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu

(p.114).

▪ The firmware update indicator on the front display lights up when a firmware update is available via the

network.

A firmware update is available if the following message is displayed after SETUP is

pressed.

You can switch the language.

Updating the unit’s firmware immediately

Read the on-screen description and press the cursor key (w).

To start the firmware update, press ENTER.

The on-screen display turns off.

If “UPDATE SUCCESS PLEASE POWER OFF!” appears on the

front display, press z (power) on the front panel.

The firmware update is complete.

Updating the unit’s firmware at power off

Read the on-screen description and press the cursor key (w).

The next screen appears on the TV.

Read the on-screen description and press the cursor key (w).

To set the firmware to update at power off, press ENTER.

Press z (receiver power) to turn off the unit.

A screen asking you to confirm the firmware update is displayed.

ENHANCER

LINK

ECO

MASTER

OUT

YPAO

VOL.

DRC

SLEEP

STEREO

PARTY

TUNED

ZONE

3 B2 A

FPR

SBL SB SBR

FPL

MUT E VI RTU AL

VOL .

UPDATE ENTER

115

To start the firmware update, press ENTER.

After the firmware update is complete, the unit will turn off automatically.

Note

▪ The firmware update can be started by pressing INFO on the front panel.

▪ The unit turns off automatically without performing the firmware update if two minutes pass after

the screen to confirm the firmware update is displayed.

▪ To cancel the firmware update process, press RETURN, and the unit will turn off.

▪ The unit turns off without performing the firmware update if you turn off the unit with AV

CONTROLLER or MusicCast CONTROLLER.

116

APPENDIX

Frequently asked questions

The frequently asked questions from customers and the answers are shown below.

The new speaker system does not provide an ideal sound balance...

If you have changed speakers or have a new speaker system, use YPAO to optimize

the speaker settings again (p.35). If you want to adjust the speaker settings manually,

use “Speaker” in the “Setup” menu (

p.94).

We want to set limitations on the volume control...

If someone accidentally operates the controls on the main unit or remote control, the

volume may suddenly increase. This may also cause injury or damage the unit or

speakers. We recommend using “

Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the

maximum volume level for the unit in advance (p.103).

I want to fix the volume when turning on the unit...

By default, the volume level when the unit last entered standby mode is automatically

applied. If you want to fix the volume, use “

Initial Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set

the volume to be applied when the receiver is turned on (p.103).

The volume varies depending on the input sources...

You can correct volume differences between input sources by utilizing “Input Trim” in

the “Option” menu (

p.89).

HDMI Control does not work at all...

To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.132). After

connecting HDMI Control-compatible devices (such as BD/DVD players) to the unit,

enable HDMI Control on each device and perform the HDMI Control link setup. This

setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your

system. For information on how HDMI Control works between your TV and playback

devices, refer to the instruction manuals for each device.

I want to change the input source name...

By default, input source names (such as “HDMI1” and “AV 1”) are displayed on the

front display when an input source is selected. If you want to rename them as you like,

use “Input Rename” (p.105) in the “Setup” menu.

I want to prevent accidental changes to the settings...

You can protect the settings configured on the unit (such as speaker settings) by

utilizing “

Memory Guard” in the “Setup” menu (p.106).

The unit’s remote control is simultaneously controlling another Yamaha

product as well as the unit...

When using multiple Yamaha products, the remote control may work on another

Yamaha product or another remote control may work on the unit. If this happens,

remote control (

p.113).

I want to enjoy videos/audio played back on the video device even when

the unit is in standby mode…

If you have connected a video device to the unit with HDMI, you can output videos/

audio played back on the video device to the TV even when the unit is in standby

mode. To use this function, set “Standby Through”

(p.99) in the “Setup” menu to “On”

or “Auto”. You can also switch the input source using the remote control of the unit

when this function is enabled.

The combination of video/audio input jacks does not match an external

device...

Use “Audio In” in the “Option” menu to change the combination of video/audio input

jacks so that it matches the output jack(s) of your external device (

p.28).

Video and audio are not synchronized...

Use “Lipsync” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the delay between video and audio output

(p.101).

117

I want to hear audio from the TV speakers...

Use “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu to enable audio output from the TV speakers

(p.

99).

I want to change the on-screen menu language...

Use “Language” in the “Setup” menu to select a language from English, Japanese,

French, German, Spanish, Russian, Italian and Chinese (

p.33).

I want to update the firmware...

Use “UPDATE” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to update the unit’s firmware

(p.114).

118

Troubleshooting

Refer to the table below when the unit does not function properly.

If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instructions below do not help, turn off the unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized

Yamaha dealer or service center.

First, check the following:

The power cables of the unit, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are connected to AC wall outlets securely.

The unit, subwoofer, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are turned on.

The connectors of each cable are securely inserted in to jacks on each device.

Power, system and remote control

Problem Cause Remedy

The power does not turn on.

The protection circuitry has been activated three times

consecutively. If the unit is in this condition, the standby indicator

on the unit blinks when you try to turn on the power.

As a safety precaution, capability to turn on the power is disabled. Contact your

nearest Yamaha dealer or service center to request repair.

The power does not turn off.

The internal microcomputer has frozen, due to an external electric

shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop

in the power supply voltage.

Hold down z (power) on the front panel for more than 15 seconds to reboot the

unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet

and plug it again.)

The power turns off (standby mode) immediately.

The unit was turned on while a speaker cable was shorted.

Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and

speakers (

p.24).

The unit enters standby mode automatically.

The sleep timer worked. Turn on the unit and start playback again.

The auto-standby function activated because the unit was not used

for the specified time.

To disable the auto-standby function, set “Auto Power Standby” in the “Setup”

menu to “Off

” (p.104).

The speaker impedance setting is incorrect. Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers (p.112).

The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short

circuit.

Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and

speakers (p.

24).

The unit is not reacting.

The internal microcomputer is frozen, due to an external electric

shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop

in the power supply voltage.

Hold down z (power) on the front panel for more than 15 seconds to reboot the

unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet

and plug it again.)

119

Problem Cause Remedy

The unit cannot be controlled using the remote

control.

The unit is out of the operating range. Use the remote control within the operating range (p.6).

The batteries are weak. Replace with new batteries.

The unit’s remote control sensor is exposed to direct sunlight or

strong lighting.

Adjust the lighting angle, or reposition the unit.

The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not

identical.

Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.113).

The remote control is set to the Zone B operation mode. Set the remote control to the Zone A operation mode (p.84).

Cannot select the desired input source even if

“INPUT” is pressed.

The function which skips some input sources is set. Set “Input Skip” of the desired input source in the “Setup” menu to “Off” (p.106).

The RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE keys of the

remote control do not operate.

The device which is connected to the unit via HDMI does not

support the operation of the RED/GREEN/

YELLOW/BLUE keys.

Use a device which supports the operation of the RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE

keys.

The settings of the RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE keys of the unit's

remote control have been changed.

Set the “Remote Color Key” settings in the “Setup” menu to “Default” (p.107).

Audio

Problem Cause Remedy

No sound.

Another input source is selected. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.

Signals that the unit cannot reproduce are being input.

Some digital audio formats cannot be played back on the unit. To check the

audio format of the input signal, use “Signal Info.” in the “Option” menu (

p.89).

Audio output to Zone A (or Zone B) is disabled.

Slide the Zone switch to “ZONE A” (or “ZONE B”), and then enable audio output

to Zone A (or Zone B).

The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.

The volume cannot be increased.

The maximum volume is set. Use “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the maximum volume (p.103).

A device connected to the output jacks of the unit is not turned on.

(This may happen due to the nature of AV receivers.)

Turn on all devices connected to the output jacks of the unit.

No sound is coming from a specific speaker.

The playback source does not contain a signal for the channel. To check it, use “Signal Info.” in the “Option” menu (p.89).

The currently selected sound program/decoder does not use the

speaker.

To check it, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu (p.98).

Audio output of the speaker is disabled.

Perform YPAO (p.35) or use “Configuration” in the “Setup” menu to change the

speaker settings (p.94).

The volume of the speaker is set too low.

Perform YPAO (p.35) or use “Level” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the speaker

volume (

p.97).

Audio output to Zone A (or Zone B) is disabled.

Slide the Zone switch to “ZONE A” (or “ZONE B”), and then enable audio output

to Zone A (or Zone B).

The speaker cable connecting the unit and the speaker is

defective.

If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another speaker cable.

The speaker is malfunctioning.

To check it, replace with another speaker. If the problem persists, the unit may be

malfunctioning.

120

Problem Cause Remedy

No sound is coming from the surround back

speaker.

“Power Amp Assign” is set to “Presence”, “BI-AMP”, “Zone B” or

“5.1ch

”.

When “Power Amp Assign” in the “Setup” menu is set to “Presence”, “BI-AMP”,

“Zone B” or “

5.1ch”, you cannot use the surround back speakers. To use the

surround back speakers, set “Power Amp Assign” to “Sur.Back” (p.94).

No sound is coming from the subwoofer.

The playback source does not contain Low Frequency Effect (LFE)

or low-frequency signals.

To check it, set “Extra Bass” in the “Setup” menu to “On”, in order to output the

front channel low-frequency components from the subwoofer (

p.96).

Subwoofer output is disabled. Perform YPAO (p.35) or set “Subwoofer” in the “Setup” menu to “Use” (p.94).

The volume of the subwoofer is too low. Adjust the volume on the subwoofer.

The subwoofer has been turned off by its auto-standby function. Disable the auto-standby function of the subwoofer or adjust its sensitivity level.

No sound from the playback device (connected to

the unit with HDMI).

The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content

Protection).

Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications.

The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack exceeds

the limit.

Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.

No sound from the TV (when HDMI Control is

used).

The TV is set to output audio from the TV speakers.

Change the audio output setting on your TV so that the TV audio is output from

the speakers connected to the unit.

A TV that does not support ARC is connected to the unit only with

an HDMI cable.

Use a digital optical cable to make an audio connection (p.26).

(If the TV is connected to the unit with an audio cable)

The TV audio input setting does not match the actual connection.

Use “TV Audio Input” in the “Setup” menu to select the correct audio input jack

(p.99).

(If you are trying to use ARC)

ARC is disabled on the unit or TV.

Set “ARC” in the “Setup” menu to “On” (p.100). Also, enable ARC on the TV.

When playing back DSD audio, the unit disables

the audio output from a TV.

The unit does not support DSD audio output from a TV. Change the audio output setting on the playback device to PCM.

Only the front speakers work on multichannel

audio.

The playback device is set to output 2-channel audio (such as

PCM) only.

To check it, use “Signal Info.” in the “Option” menu (p.89). If necessary, change

the digital audio output setting on the playback device.

Noise/hum is heard.

The unit is too close to another digital or radio frequency device. Move the unit further away from the device.

The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.

The sound is distorted.

The volume of the unit is too high.

Turn down the volume. If “ECO Mode” in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, set it to

“Off” (p.

104).

A device connected to the unit’s output jacks is not turned on. Turn on all devices connected to the unit’s output jacks.

121

Video

Problem Cause Remedy

No video.

Another input source is selected on the unit. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.

Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.

The video signal output from the unit is not supported by the TV.

Check the video output setting of the playback device. For information about

video signals supported by the TV, refer to the instruction manuals for the TV.

The cable connecting the unit and TV (or playback device) is

defective.

If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.

No video from the playback device (connected to

the unit with HDMI).

The input video signal (resolution) is not supported by the unit.

To check the information about the current video signal (resolution), use “Signal

Info.

” in the “Option” menu (p.89). For information about video signals supported

by the unit, see “HDMI signal compatibility” (p.134).

The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content

Protection).

Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications.

The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack is over

the limit.

Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.

No image (contents required the HDCP 2.2 -

compatible HDMI device) from the playback

device connected to the unit with HDMI.

The TV (HDMI input jack) does not support HDCP 2.2. (The

Warning message can be displayed on the TV screen.)

Connect the unit to the TV (HDMI input jack) that supports HDCP 2.2.

The menu of the unit is not displayed on the TV.

The TV is not connected to the unit via HDMI.

You can display the menu of the unit on the TV only when they are connected

with an HDMI cable. If necessary, use an HDMI cable to connect them (

p.26 to

p.27).

Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).

122

FM/AM radio (AM radio feature is available except for U.K., Europe, Australia and Russia models)

Problem Cause Remedy

FM radio reception is weak or noisy.

There is multi-path interference. Adjust the FM antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location.

Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.

To select monaural FM radio reception “FM Mode” in the “Option” menu to

“

Mono” (p.56).

Use an outdoor FM antenna.

AM radio reception is weak or noisy.

The noises may be caused by fluorescent lamps, motors,

thermostats, or other electrical equipment.

It is difficult to completely eliminate noise. It may be reduced by using an outdoor

AM antenna.

Radio stations cannot be selected automatically.

Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.

Select the station manually (p.56).

Use an outdoor antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element

antenna.

The AM radio signal is weak.

Adjust the AM antenna orientation.

Select the station manually (p.56).

Use an outdoor AM antenna.

AM radio stations cannot be registered as

presets.

Auto Preset has been used.

Auto Preset is for registering FM radio stations only. Register AM radio stations

manually (

p.58).

DAB radio (U.K., Europe, Australia and Russia models)

Problem Cause Remedy

No DAB radio reception.

An initial scan has not been performed. Perform an initial scan to receive DAB radio (p.60).

No DAB radio reception even after performing an

initial scan.

Reception strength of DAB radio is poor.

Check reception strength in “Tune AID” in the “Option” menu (p.64), and adjust

the antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location.

There is no DAB coverage in your area.

Check with your dealer or WorldDMB online at “http://www.worlddab.org” for a

listing of the DAB coverage in your area.

DAB radio reception is weak or noisy.

There is multi-path interference.

Check reception strength in “Tune AID” in the “Option” menu (p.64), and adjust

the antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location.

Your area is too far from the DAB station transmitter.

Use an outdoor antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element

antenna.

DAB information is not available or is inaccurate.

The selected DAB radio station may be temporarily out of service

or may not provide information.

Contact the DAB broadcaster.

No DAB radio sound.

The selected DAB radio station may be temporarily out of service. Try the station later or select another station.

123

USB and network

Problem Cause Remedy

The unit does not detect the USB device.

The USB device is not connected to the USB jack securely. Turn off the unit, reconnect your USB device, and turn the unit on again.

The file system of the USB device is not FAT16 or FAT32. Use a USB device with FAT16 or FAT32 format.

Folders and files in the USB device cannot be

viewed.

The data in the USB device is protected by the encryption. Use a USB device without an encryption function.

The network feature does not function.

The network parameters (IP address) have not been obtained

properly.

Enable the DHCP server function on your router and set “DHCP” in the “Setup”

menu to “On” on the unit (p.108). If you want to configure the network parameters

manually, check that you are using an IP address which is not used by other

network devices in your network (

p.108).

The unit does not detect the PC.

The media sharing setting is not correct.

Configure the sharing setting and select the unit as a device to which music

contents are shared (

p.76).

Some security software installed on your PC is blocking the access

of the unit to your PC.

Check the settings of security software installed on your PC.

The unit and PC are not in the same network.

Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the

unit and the PC to the same network.

The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit.

In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or

specify the MAC address of your PC to allow it to access to the unit (

p.109).

The files in the PC cannot be viewed or played

back.

The files are not supported by the unit or the media server.

Use the file format supported by both the unit and the media server. For

information about the file formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music

stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)”

(p.76).

The Internet radio cannot be played.

The selected Internet radio station is currently not available.

There may be a network problem at the radio station, or the service may have

been stopped. Try the station later or select another station.

The selected Internet radio station is currently broadcasting

silence.

Some Internet radio stations broadcast silence at certain of times of the day. Try

the station later or select another station.

Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of your

network devices (such as the router).

Check the firewall settings of your network devices. The Internet radio can be

played only when it passes through the port designated by each radio station.

The port number varies depending on the radio station.

The application for smartphone/tablet “AV

CONTROLLER” does not detect the unit.

The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit.

In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or

specify the MAC address of your smartphone/tablet to allow it to access to the

unit (p.109).

The unit and smartphone/tablet are not in the same network.

Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the

unit and smartphone/tablet to the same network.

Firmware update via the network is failed.

It may not be possible depending on the condition of the network. Update the firmware via the network again or use a USB memory device (p.114).

The mobile device does not recognize the unit

when using AirPlay or AV CONTROLLER.

The unit and the mobile device are connected to different SSID

when using a multiple SSID router.

Connect them to the Primary SSID (at the top of the list).

124

Problem Cause Remedy

The unit cannot connect to the Internet via a

wireless router (access point).

The wireless router (access point) is turned off. Turn on the wireless router.

The unit and the wireless router (access point) are too far apart. Place the unit and the wireless router (access point) closer to each other.

There is an obstacle between the unit and the wireless router

(access point).

Move the unit and the wireless router (access point) in a location where there are

no obstacles between them.

Wireless network is not found.

Microwave ovens or other wireless devices in your neighborhood

might disturb the wireless communication.

Turn off these devices.

Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of the

wireless router (access point).

Check the firewall setting of the wireless router (access point).

Bluetooth®

Problem Cause Remedy

A Bluetooth connection cannot be established.

The Bluetooth function of the unit is disabled. Enable the Bluetooth function (p.110).

Another Bluetooth device is already connected to the unit.

Terminate the current Bluetooth connection and then establish a new connection

(p.69).

The unit and the Bluetooth device are too far apart. Move the Bluetooth device closer to the unit.

There is a device (such as microwave oven and wireless LAN) that

outputs signals in the 2.4 GHz frequency band nearby.

Move the unit away from those devices.

The Bluetooth device does not support A2DP. Use a Bluetooth device that supports A2DP.

The connection information registered on the Bluetooth device is

not working for some reason.

Delete the connection information on the Bluetooth device, and then establish a

connection between the Bluetooth device and the unit again (

p.69).

No sound is produced, or the sound is

interrupted during playback.

The volume of the Bluetooth device is set too low. Turn up the volume of the Bluetooth device.

The Bluetooth device is not set to send audio signals to the unit. Switch the audio output of the Bluetooth device to the unit.

The Bluetooth connection has been terminated.

Establish a Bluetooth connection between the Bluetooth device and the unit again

(p.

69).

The unit and the Bluetooth device are too far apart. Move the Bluetooth device closer to the unit.

There is a device (such as microwave oven and wireless LAN) that

outputs signals in the 2.4 GHz frequency band nearby.

Move the unit away from those devices.

125

Error indications on the front display

Refer to the table below when the error message is indicated on the front display.

Message Cause Remedy

Access denied

Access to the PC is denied.

Configure the sharing settings and select the unit as a device to which music contents are shared

(p.76).

Access error

The unit cannot access the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.

There is a problem with the signal path from the network to the unit.

Make sure your router and modem are turned on.

Check the connection between the unit and your router (or hub) (p.31).

Check SP Wires

The speaker cables short circuit. Twist the bare wires of the cables firmly and connect to the unit and speakers properly.

Internal Error

An internal error has occurred. Contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.

No content

There are no playable files in the selected folder. Select a folder that contains files supported by the unit.

No device

The unit cannot detect the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.

Not connected

The network cable is not connected. Connect the network cable properly.

The wireless router (access point) is not found. Make sure the wireless router (access point) is turned on.

Please wait

The unit is preparing for connecting to the network.

Wait until the message disappears. If the message stays more than 3 minutes, turn off the unit and turn

it on again.

RemID Mismatch

The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not

identical.

Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.113).

Unable to play

The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the iPhone for some

reason.

Check the song data. If it cannot be played on the iPhone itself, the song data or storage area may be

defective.

The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the PC for some

reason.

Ensure that the files are types that the unit is able to play back. For information about the formats

supported by the unit, see

“Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.76). If the unit

supports the file format, but still cannot play back any files, the network may be overloaded with heavy

traffic.

USB Overloaded

An overcurrent is flowing through the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.

Version error

Firmware update is failed. Update the firmware again.

Update failed.

Firmware update is failed.

Press STRAIGHT and select a firmware updating method, then press INFO to update the firmware

again.

126

Glossary

This is a glossary of the technical terms used in this manual.

Audio information

Audio decoding format

Dolby Atmos

Introduced first in the cinema, Dolby Atmos brings a revolutionary sense of dimension and

immersion to the Home Theater experience. Dolby Atmos is an adaptable and scalable object

based format that reproduces audio as independent sounds (or objects) that can be accurately

positioned and move dynamically throughout the 3 dimensional listening space during playback.

A key ingredient of Dolby Atmos is the introduction of a height plane of sound above the listener.

Dolby Atmos Stream

Dolby Atmos content will be delivered to your Dolby Atmos enabled AV receiver via Dolby Digital

Plus or Dolby TrueHD on Blu-ray Disc, downloadable files and streaming media. A Dolby Atmos

stream contains special metadata that describes the positioning of sounds within the room. This

object audio data is decoded by a Dolby Atmos AV receiver and scaled for optimum playback

through Home Theater speaker systems of every size and configuration.

Dolby Digital

Dolby Digital is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that

supports 5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD disc.

Dolby Digital Plus

Dolby Digital Plus is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that

supports 7.1-channel audio. Dolby Digital Plus remains fully compatible with the existing

multichannel audio systems that support Dolby Digital. This technology is used for audio on BD

(Blu-ray Disc).

Dolby Surround

Dolby surround is a next generation surround technology that intelligently up mixes stereo; 5.1

and 7.1 content for playback through your surround speaker system. Dolby surround is

compatible with traditional speaker layouts, as well as Dolby Atmos enabled playback systems

that employ in-ceiling speakers or products with Dolby speaker technology.

Dolby TrueHD

Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. to

offer a high-definition home theater experience with the quality of the studio master. Dolby TrueHD

can carry up to eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio)

simultaneously. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray Disc).

DTS 96/24

DTS 96/24 is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit

audio. This format remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that

support DTS Digital Surround. This technology is used for music DVDs, etc.

DTS Dialog Control

DTS Dialog Control allows you to boost the dialog. This can be useful in noisy environments to

help make the dialog more intelligible. People with impaired hearing may also benefit. Note that

the content creator may disable the use of this feature in the mix, so that DTS Dialog Control may

not always be available. Note that updates to your AVR may add more functionality to DTS Dialog

Control or increase the range of the feature.

DTS Digital Surround

DTS Digital Surround is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports

5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs.

DTS-ES

DTS-ES creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with DTS-ES.

This decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound. In the DTS-ES Matrix

6.1 format, a surround back sound is recorded in the surround channels, and in the DTS-ES

Discrete 6.1 format, a discrete surround back channel is recorded.

DTS Express

DTS Express is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel audio and allows a

higher compression rate than the DTS Digital Surround format developed by DTS, Inc. This

technology is developed for audio streaming services on the Internet and secondary audio on BD

(Blu-ray Disc).

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that

supports 7.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio remains fully

compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This

technology is used for audio on most BD (Blu-ray Disc).

DTS-HD Master Audio

DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio format developed to offer a high-definition

home theater experience with the quality of the studio master by DTS, Inc. DTS-HD Master Audio

can carry up to eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio)

simultaneously. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray Disc).

DTS Neo: 6

DTS Neo: 6 enables 6-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are two modes available:

“Music mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources. This technology provides

discrete full-bandwidth matrix channels of surround sound.

DTS:X

DTS:X is the next generation object-based, multi-dimensional audio technology from DTS.

Unbound from channels, DTS:X conveys the fluid movement of sound to create an incredibly rich,

realistic and immersive soundscape - in front of, behind, beside and above the audience - more

accurately than ever before. DTS:X offers the ability to automatically adapt the audio to the

speaker layout that best fits the space, from a television’s built-in speakers to a home surround

theater system to a dozen or more speakers in a commercial cinema. Immerse yourself at

www.dts.com/dtsx

127

DSD (Direct Stream Digital)

DSD (Direct Stream Digital) technology stores audio signals on digital storage media, such as

SACD (Super Audio CDs). The signals are stored at a high-frequency sampling rate (such as

2.8224 MHz and 5.6448 MHz). The highest frequency response is equal to or higher than 100

kHz, with a dynamic range of 120 dB. This technology offers better audio quality than that used for

CDs.

FLAC

FLAC is a file format for lossless audio data compression. FLAC is inferior to lossy compressed

audio formats in compression rate but provides higher audio quality.

MP3

One of the compressed digital audio format used by MPEG. With psychoacoustic technologies,

this compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of

compressing data quantity by about 1/10 maintaining a certain level of audio quality.

MPEG-4 AAC

An MPEG-4 audio standard. It is used for mobile telephones, portable audio players, and audio

streaming services on Internet because it allows a high compression rate of data while

maintaining better audio quality than MP3.

Neural:X

Neural:X is the latest downmixing/upmixing and spatial remapping technology from DTS. It is built

in to DTS:X to provide upmix of Neural:X-encoded and non-encoded (PCM) data. In DTS:X for

AVRs and Sound Bars, Neural:X can produce up to 11.x channels.

PCM (Pulse Code Modulation)

PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded, and transmitted.

This technology is the basis of all other audio format. This technology is used as a lossless audio

format called Linear PCM for audio on a variety of media, including CDs and BD (Blu-ray Disc).

Sampling frequency/Quantization bit

Sampling frequency and quantization bits indicate the quantity of information when an analog

audio signal is digitized. These values are noted as in the following example: “48 kHz/24-bit”.

• Sampling frequency

Sampling frequency (the number of times the signal is sampled per second) is called the

sampling rate. When the sampling frequency is higher, the range of frequencies that can be

played back are wider.

• Quantization bit

The number of quantization bits indicate the degree of accuracy when converting the sound

level into a numeric value. When the number of quantized bits is higher, the expression of the

sound level is more accurate.

WAV

Windows standard audio file format, which defines the method of recording the digital data

obtained by converting audio signals. By default, the PCM method (no compression) is used, but

you can also use other compression methods.

WMA (Windows Media Audio)

One of the compressed digital audio formats developed by Microsoft Corporation. With

psychoacoustic technologies, this compression method achieves a high compression rate.

Reportedly, it is capable of compressing data quantity by about 1/20 maintaining a certain level of

audio quality.

Others

Bi-amplification connection (Bi-amp)

A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker. When you use the bi-amplification

connection, the unit drives the tweeter and woofer in a speaker with the discrete amplifiers. As a

consequence, the tweeter and woofer provide clear audio signal without the interference.

LFE (Low Frequency Effects) 0.1 channel

This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals and has a frequency range from 20 Hz to

120 Hz. This channel is added to the channels for all bands with Dolby Digital or DTS to enhance

low frequency audio effects. This channel is labeled 0.1 because it is limited to only low frequency

audio.

Lip sync

Video output sometimes lags behind audio output due to the complexity of signal processing

caused by an increase in video signal capacity. Lip sync is a technique for automatically

correcting the timing lag between audio and video output.

HDMI and video information

Composite video signal

With the composite video signal system, color, brightness, and synchronization data signals are

combined and transmitted with a single cable.

Deep Color

Deep Color is a technology that HDMI specification supports. Deep Color increases the number of

available colors within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space. Conventional

color systems process the color using 8 bits. Deep Color processes the color with 10, 12, or 16

bits. This technology allows HDTVs and other displays to increase from millions of colors to

billions of colors and eliminate on-screen color banding for smooth tonal transitions and subtle

gradations between colors.

HDMI

HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the world-wide standard interface for digital audio/

video signal transmission. This interface transmits both digital audio and digital video signals

using a single cable without any loss. HDMI complies with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content

Protection) and provides a secure audio/video interface. For further information on HDMI, visit the

HDMI website at “http://www.hdmi.org/”

x.v.Color

“x.v.Color” is a technology that the HDMI specification supports. It is a more extensive color

space than sRGB and allows the expression of colors that were not hitherto possible. While

remaining compatible with the color gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color

space, and thus can produce more vivid, natural images.

128

Network information

SSID

SSID (Service Set Identifier) is a name that identifies a particular wireless LAN access point.

Wi-Fi

Wi-Fi (Wireless Fidelity) is a technology that allows an electronic device to exchange data or

connect to the Internet wirelessly using radio waves. Wi-Fi offers the advantage of eliminating the

complexity of making connections with LAN cables by using wireless connection. Only products

that complete Wi-Fi Alliance interoperability tests can carry the “Wi-Fi Certified” trademark.

WPS

WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) is a standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance, which allows easy

establishment of a wireless home network.

Yamaha technologies

CINEMA DSP (Digital Sound Field Processor)

Since the surround sound systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect

is best experienced in a theater that has many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since

home conditions (such as room size, wall material, and number of speakers) can differ so widely,

it is inevitable that there are differences in the sound that you hear. Based on a wealth of actually

measured data, CINEMA DSP, Yamaha’s original DSP technology provides the audiovisual

experience of a movie theater in your own home.

CINEMA DSP 3D

The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the height of the sound images.

CINEMA DSP 3D mode achieves the reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so

that it creates the accurate and intensive 3D sound fields in a listening room.

Compressed Music Enhancer

The Compressed Music Enhancer feature compensates for missing harmonics in compression

music formats (such as MP3). As a result, this technology provides improved performance for the

overall sound system.

SILENT CINEMA

Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones.

Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound program, so that accurate

representations of all the sound programs can be enjoyed on headphones.

Virtual CINEMA DSP

Virtual CINEMA DSP allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround

speakers with front left and right speakers. Even if the surround speakers are not connected, the

unit creates the realistic sound field in a listening room.

Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS)

Virtual Presence Speaker allows the system to virtually reproduce the height of the 3D sound field

without front presence speakers. Even if the front presence speakers are not connected, the unit

creates the 3D sound field in your room.

YPAO (Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer)

The Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) function detects speaker connections,

measures the distances from them to your listening position(s), and then automatically optimizes

the speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit your room.

Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS)

Virtual Surround Back Speaker allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the

surround back speakers with surround speaker. Even if the surround back speakers are not

connected, the unit adds a sense of depth to the rear sound filed of CINEMA DSP.

129

Supported devices and file formats

The following devices and file formats can be used by the unit.

Supported devices

Bluetooth® devices

• Bluetooth devices that support A2DP can be used.

• Operation of all Bluetooth devices cannot be guaranteed.

USB devices

• This unit supports USB mass storage class devices (e.g., flash memories or

portable audio players) using FAT16 or FAT32 format.

• Do not connect devices other than USB mass storage class devices (such as USB

chargers or USB hubs), PCs, card readers, an external HDD, etc.

• USB devices with encryption cannot be used.

• Operation of all USB devices cannot be guaranteed.

AirPlay

AirPlay works with iPhone, iPad, and iPod touch with iOS 4.3.3 or later, Mac with OS X

Mountain Lion or later, and PC with iTunes 10.2.2 or later.

Made for.

iPhone 7 Plus, iPhone 7, iPhone SE, iPhone 6s Plus, iPhone 6s, iPhone 6 Plus, iPhone

6, iPhone 5s, iPhone 5c, iPhone 5, iPhone 4s

iPad Pro (9.7" and 12.9"), iPad mini 4, iPad Air 2, iPad mini 3, iPad Air, iPad mini 2,

iPad mini, iPad (3rd and 4th generation), iPad 2

iPod touch (5th and 6th generation)

(as of February 2017)

File formats

USB, PC/NAS

File

Sampling

frequency

(kHz)

quantization

bit (bit)

Bitrate (kbps)

Number of

channels

Support for

gapless

playback

WAV *

32/44.1/48/

88.2/96/

176.4/192

16/24 - 2

MP3

32/44.1/48 - 8 to 320 2 -

WMA

32/44.1/48 - 8 to 320 2 -

MPEG-4 AAC

32/44.1/48 - 8 to 320 2 -

FLAC

32/44.1/48/

88.2/96/

176.4/192

16/24 - 2

ALAC

32/44.1/48/

88.2/96

16/24 - 2

AIFF

32/44.1/48/

88.2/96/

176.4/192

16/24 - 2

DSD

2.8 MHz/

5.6 MHz

1 - 2 -

* Linear PCM format only

• To play back FLAC files stored on your PC/NAS, you need to install server software

that supports sharing of FLAC files via DLNA on your PC or use a NAS that supports

FLAC files.

• Digital Rights Management (DRM) contents cannot be played back.

130

Video signal flow

Video signals input from a video device to the unit are output to a TV as shown below.

HDMIHDMI

VIDEOVIDEO

HDMI HDMI

VIDEO VIDEO

Video device The unit TV

HDMI connection

Composite video connection

HDMI in HDMI out

VIDEO in VIDEO out

131

Information on HDMI

The additional information on HDMI is as follows.

HDMI Control

HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV

that supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit

(such as power and volume) with TV remote control operations. You can also control

playback devices (such as HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players) connected to

the unit with an HDMI cable.

Operations available from the TV’s remote control

• Standby synchronization

• Volume control including mute

• Switching to input audio from the TV when the TV input is switched to its built-in

tuner

• Switching to input video/audio from the selected playback device

• Switching between audio output devices (the unit or TV speaker)

(Example)

HDMI Control HDMI Control

The unit turns off

(standby)

Playback device

also turns off

Turn off the TV

Operations available from the unit’s remote control

• Starting playback on the playback device and turning on the TV with a scene

selection (

p.50)

• Switching the TV input to display the “Setup” menu (when SETUP is pressed)

• Controlling the playback device (playback and menu operations)

(Example)

HDMI Control HDMI Control

Press SCENE (BD/DVD)

Playback starts

Turns on and displays

video from the playback

device

To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the following HDMI Control link setup after

connecting the TV and playback devices.

For details on settings and operating your TV, refer to the instruction manual for the TV.

Note

This setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system.

Turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices.

Configure the settings of the unit.

Switch the TV input to display video from the unit.

Press SETUP.

ENTER

SETUP OPTION

TOP MENU

POP-UP/MENU

MEMORY

DISPLAY

RETURN

BLUE

YELLOWGREEN

RED

STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS

ENTER

SETUP OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

SCENE

DVD

NET

RADIO

HDMI

AUDIO

1 2 3

BLUETOOTH

USB

1 2 3

1 2 3 4

NET

AUX

TUNING PRESET

HOME

MEMORY

DISPLAY

RETURN

BLUE

YELLOWGREEN

RED

SLEEP

ZONE A ZONE B

P O

PTION

TOP MENU

POP-UP/MENU

MEMORY

DISPLA

RETURN

BLUE

YELL

REE

P O

SETUP

ENTER

Cursor keys

132

Use the cursor keys to select “HDMI” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “HDMI Control” and the cursor keys

(e/r) to select “On” as shown below.

If you made a digital optical cable connection between the TV and the

unit, use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “TV Audio Input” and the

cursor keys (e/r) to select “AUDIO1”.

Press SETUP.

Enable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (such as

HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players).

Turn off the main power of the TV and then turn off the unit and

playback devices.

Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV.

Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.

Check the followings.

On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is

selected. If not, select the input source manually.

On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed.

Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by

turning off the TV or adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote

control.

Note

▪ If HDMI Control does not work properly, the problem may be solved by turning the playback device off and

on again, or by unplugging the power plug and plugging it in again. Also, HDMI Control may not work

properly if the number of connected devices exceeds the limit. In this case, disable HDMI Control on

devices not in use.

▪ If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting

on the TV.

▪ If you reconnect the HDMI cable, perform the procedure 5-8 again.

▪ We recommend using TV and playback devices from the same manufacturer so that HDMI Control works

more effectively.

133

Audio Return Channel (ARC)

ARC allows you to input TV audio to the unit with the HDMI cable which transmits video

signal to the TV.

Check the following after the HDMI Control settings.

Select a TV program with the TV remote control.

Check that the input source of the unit will be automatically

switched to “AUDIO1” and the TV audio will be played back on the

unit.

If you cannot hear the TV audio, check the following:

▪ “ARC” (p.100) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”.

▪ The HDMI cable is connected to the ARC-compatible HDMI jack (HDMI

jack marked “ARC”) on the TV.

Some HDMI jack on the TV is not compatible with ARC. For details, refer

to the instruction manual for the TV.

Note

▪ If the audio is interrupted while using ARC, set “ARC” (p.100) in the “Setup” menu to “Off” and use a digital

optical cable to input TV audio to the unit (

p.26).

▪ When using ARC, connect a TV with an HDMI cable that supports ARC.

▪ “AUDIO1” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the AUDIO

1 jacks, use

“TV Audio Input” (p.99) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input assignment. To use

the SCENE function (p.50), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE (TV).

HDMI signal compatibility

• When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video/audio signals may

not be output, depending on the type of the DVD player.

• The unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI devices. For

details, refer to the instruction manual for each device.

• To decode audio bitstream signals on the unit, set the input source device

appropriately so that the device outputs the bitstream audio signals directly (does

not decode the bitstream signals on the playback device). For details, refer to the

instruction manual for the playback device.

134

Trademarks

The trademarks used in this manual are as follows.

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Dolby

Atmos, Dolby Surround, and the double-D symbol are trademarks

of Dolby Laboratories.

For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under

license from DTS, Inc. DTS, the Symbol, DTS in combination with

the Symbol, DTS:X, and the DTS:X logo are registered trademarks

or trademarks of DTS, Inc. in the United States and/or other

Supports iOS 7 or later for setup using Wireless Accessory

Configuration.

“Made for iPod,” “Made for iPhone,” and “Made for iPad” mean that

an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically

to iPod, iPhone, or iPad, respectively, and has been certified by the

developer to meet Apple performance standards.

Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its

compliance with safety and regulatory standards.

Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod, iPhone, or

iPad may affect wireless performance.

iTunes, AirPlay, iPad, iPhone, iPod, and iPod touch are trademarks

of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

iPad Air and iPad mini are trademarks of Apple Inc.

App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc.

The terms HDMI, the HDMI Logo, and High-Definition Multimedia

Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI

Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries.

x.v.Color™

“x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.

DLNA™ and DLNA CERTIFIED™ are trademarks or registered

Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited.

Windows™

Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the

United States and other countries.

Internet Explorer, Windows Media Audio and Windows Media

Player are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft

Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

Android™

Google Play™

Android and Google Play are trademarks of Google Inc.

The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED™ Logo is a certification mark of Wi-Fi

Alliance

The Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ Identifier Mark is a certification mark of

Wi-Fi Alliance

The Bluetooth

word mark and logos are registered trademarks

owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by

Yamaha Corporation is under license.

Bluetooth protocol stack (Blue SDK)

(For U.K., Europe, Australia and Russia models)

The unit supports DAB/DAB+ tuning.

“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation.

MusicCast is a trademark or registered trademark of Yamaha

Corporation.

Yamaha Eco-Label is a mark that certifies products of high

environmental performance.

Google Noto Fonts

This product uses the following fonts.

(https://www.google.com/get/noto/#sans-lgc

), with Reserved Font

Name Noto Sans Version 1.004.

(https://www.google.com/get/noto/help/cjk/), with Reserved Font

Name Noto Sans CJK Version 1.004.

This Font Software is licensed under the SIL Open Font License,

Version1.1.

This license is available with a FAQ at: http://scripts.sil.org/OFL

Explanations regarding GPL

This product utilizes GPL/LGPL open-source software in some

sections. You have the right to obtain, duplicate, modify, and

redistribute this open-source code only. For information on GPL/

LGPL open source software, how to obtain it, and the GPL/LGPL

license, refer to the Yamaha Corporation website

(http://download.yamaha.com/sourcecodes/musiccast/)

135

Specifications

The specifications of this unit are as follows.

Input jacks

Analog Audio

• Audio x 4

Digital Audio (Supported frequencies: 32 kHz to 96 kHz)

• Optical x 1

• Coaxial x 2

Video

• Composite x 3

HDMI Input

• HDMI x 4

Other jacks

• USB x 1 (USB2.0)

• NETWORK (Wired) x 1 (100Base-TX/10Base-T)

• NETWORK (Wireless) x 1 (IEEE802.11b/g/n)

Output jacks

Analog Audio

• Speaker Out x 7 (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R, SURROUND BACK L/R*)

* Note: assignment is possible. [SURROUND BACK, PRESENCE, BI-AMP (FRONT L/R), ZONE

• Subwoofer Out x 2 (mono x 2)

• Headphone x 1

Video

• Composite x 1

HDMI Output

• HDMI OUT x 1

Other jacks

YPAO MIC x 1

HDMI

HDMI Features:

• 4K UltraHD Video (include 4K/60, 50Hz 10/12bit), 3D Video, ARC (Audio Return Channel), HDMI

Control (CEC), Auto Lip Sync, Deep Color, “x.v.Color”, HD audio playback, Selectable HDMI

input in HDMI standby mode, 21:9 Aspect Ratio, BT.2020 Colorimetry, HDR Compatible

Video Format (Repeater Mode)

• VGA

• 480i/60 Hz

• 576i/50 Hz

• 480p/60 Hz

• 576p/50 Hz

• 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz

• 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz

• 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz

• 4K/60Hz, 50Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz

Audio Format

• Dolby Atmos

• Dolby TrueHD

• Dolby Digital Plus

• Dolby Digital

• DTS:X

• DTS-HD Master Audio

• DTS-HD High Resolution Audio

• DTS Express

• DTS

• DSD 2-ch to 6-ch

• PCM 2-ch to 8-ch (Max. 192 kHz/24-bit)

Content Protection: HDCP 2.2 compatible

Link Function: CEC supported

136

TUNER

Analog Tuner

• [Except for U.K., Europe, Australia and Russia models]

FM/AM x 1 (TUNER)

• [U.K. and Europe models]

DAB/FM with Radio Data System x 1 (TUNER)

• [Australia and Russia models]

DAB/FM x 1 (TUNER)

USB

Capable of Mass Storage Class USB Memory

Current Supply Capacity: 1.0 A

Bluetooth

Sink Function

• Source Device to AVR (ex. Smartphone/Tablet)

• Supported profile

– A2DP, AVRCP

• Supported codec

– SBC, AAC

Source Function

• AVR to Sink Device (ex. Bluetooth Headphone)

• Supported profile

– A2DP, AVRCP

• Supported codec

– SBC

Capable of Play/Stop Operation from Sink Device

Bluetooth version

• Ver. 2.1+EDR

Wireless output

• Bluetooth Class 2

Radio Frequency (Operational Frequency)

• 2402 MHz to 2480 MHz

Maximum Output Power (E.I.R.P)

• 3.91 dBm (2.46 mW)

Maximum communication distance

• 10 m (33 ft) without interference

Network

PC Client Function

Compatible with DLNA ver. 1.5

AirPlay supported

Internet Radio

Wi-Fi function

• Capable of WPS by PIN Method and Push-Button-Method

• Capable of sharing with iOS devices by wireless connection

• Capable of Direct Connection with Mobile Device

• Available Security Method: WEP, WPA2-PSK (AES), Mixed Mode

• Wireless LAN Standards: IEEE 802.11 b/g/n

• Radio Frequency (Operational Frequency): 2412 MHz to 2472 MHz

• Maximum Output Power (E.I.R.P): 17.42 dBm (55.2 mW)

Compatible Decoding Formats

Decoding Format

• Dolby Atmos

• Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus

• Dolby Digital

• DTS:X

• DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, DTS Express

• DTS, DTS 96/24, DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, DTS-ES Discrete 6.1

Post Decoding Format

• Dolby Surround

• DTS Neo: 6 Music, DTS Neo: 6 Cinema

• Neural:X

Audio Section

Rated Output Power (2-channel driven)

• [U.S.A. and Canada models] (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.09% THD, 8 Ω)

• [Other models] (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.09% THD, 6 Ω)

– Front L/R 80 W+80 W

• [U.S.A. and Canada models] (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω)

– Front L/R 95 W+95 W

– Center 95 W

– Surround L/R 95 W+95 W

– Surround Back L/R 95 W+95 W

137

Rated Output Power (1-channel driven)

• [U.S.A. and Canada models] (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω)

• [Other models] (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 6 Ω)

– Front L/R 115 W/ch

– Center 115 W/ch

– Surround L/R 115 W/ch

– Surround Back L/R 115 W/ch

Maximum Effective Output Power (1-channel driven)

• [U.S.A. and Canada models]

(1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω)

– Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R, Surround Back L/R

140 W/ch

(1 kHz, 10% THD, 6 Ω)

– Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R, Surround Back L/R

145 W/ch

• [Other models] (1 kHz, 10% THD, 6 Ω)

– Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R, Surround Back L/R 135 W/ch

Dynamic Power (IHF)

• [U.S.A. and Canada models]

– Front L/R (8/6/4/2 Ω)

120/140/170/190 W

• [Other models]

– Front L/R (6/4/2 Ω)

140/170/190 W

Damping Factor

• Front L/R, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω

100 or more

Input Sensitivity / Input Impedance

• AV 2 etc. (1 kHz, 100 W/6 Ω) 200 mV/47 kΩ

Maximum Input Signal

• AV 2 etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD, Effect On) 2.3 V

Output Level / Output Impedance

• SUBWOOFER

1 V/1.2 kΩ

Headphone Jack Rated Output / Impedance

• AV 2 etc. (1 kHz, 50 mV, 8 Ω) 100 mV/470 Ω

Frequency Response

• AV 2 etc. to Front (10 Hz to 100 kHz) +0/-3 dB

Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)

• AV 2 etc. (DIRECT) (Input 1 kΩ Shorted, Speaker Out)

110 dB or more

Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)

• Front L/R (Speaker Out) 150 μV or less

Channel Separation

• AV 2 etc. (Input 1 kΩ Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz)

70 dB/50 dB or more

Volume Control

• Range MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB

• Step 0.5 dB

Tone Control Characteristics

• Bass Boost/Cut ±6 dB/0.5 dB Step at 50 Hz

• Bass Turnover 350 Hz

• Treble Boost/Cut ±6 dB/0.5 dB Step at 20 kHz

• Treble Turnover 3.5 kHz

Filter Characteristics

(fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz)

• H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround) 12 dB/oct.

• L.P.F. (Subwoofer) 24 dB/oct.

Video Section

Video Signal Type

• [U.S.A. and Canada models] NTSC

• [Other models] PAL

Video Signal Level

• Composite

1 Vp-p/75 Ω

Video Maximum Input Level

1.5 Vp-p or more

Video Signal to Noise Ratio

50 dB or more

138

FM Section

Tuning Range

• [U.S.A. and Canada models] 87.5 MHz to 107.9 MHz

• [U.K. and Europe models] 87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz

• [Other models] 87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz

50 dB Quiet Sensitivity (IHF, 1 kHz, 100% MOD.)

• Mono 3 μV (20.8 dBf)

Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)

• Mono 65 dB

• Stereo 64 dB

Harmonic Distortion (IHF, 1 kHz)

• Mono 0.5%

• Stereo 0.6%

Antenna Input

75 Ω unbalanced

AM section

Tuning Range

• [U.S.A. and Canada models] 530 kHz to 1710 kHz

DAB Section (U.K., Europe, Australia and Russia models)

Tuning Range

174 MHz to 240 MHz (Band III)

Support Audio Format

MPEG 1 Layer II/MPEG-4 HE-AAC v2

Antenna

75 Ω unbalanced

General

Power Supply

• [U.S.A. and Canada models] AC 120 V, 60 Hz

• [Australia model] AC 240 V, 50 Hz

• [U.K., Europe and Russia models] AC 230 V, 50 Hz

Power Consumption

260 W

Standby Power Consumption

• HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off, Network Standby Off 0.1 W

• HDMI Control On, Standby Through On (No Signals), Network Standby Off 1.1 W

• HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off, Network Standby On, Bluetooth

Standby Off

– Wired 1.7 W

– Wireless (Wi-Fi) 1.8 W

– Wireless Direct 1.8 W

• HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off, Network Standby On (Wired),

Bluetooth Standby On

1.6 W

• HDMI Control On, Standby Through On (No Signals), Network Standby On

(Wireless Direct), Bluetooth Standby On

2.4 W

Dimensions (W x H x D)

435 x 161 x 330 mm (17-1/8” x 6-3/8” x 13”)

Reference Dimensions (with wireless antenna upright)

* Including legs and protrusions

435 x 225.5 x 330 mm (17-1/8” x 8-7/8” x 13”)

Weight

8.3 kg (18.3 lbs)

* The contents of this manual apply to the latest specifications as of the publishing date. To obtain

the latest manual, access the Yamaha website then download the manual file.

139

Yamaha Global Site

http://www.yamaha.com/

Yamaha Downloads

http://download.yamaha.com/

Manual Development Group

Published 03/2017 NV-A0

YJ193A0/EN1

Documenttranscriptie

AV Receiver Owner's Manual • This unit is a product for enjoying video and music at home. • This manual explains preparations and operations for everyday users of the unit. • Read the supplied booklet “Quick Start Guide” before using the unit. EN CONTENTS BEFORE USING THE UNIT 5 4 Accessories................................................................................................ 5 DAB/FM antenna (U.K., Europe, Australia and Russia models).............................................................................. 30 5 How to use this manual............................................................................ 5 Preparing a wireless antenna............................................................................................................................................ 31 Insert the batteries................................................................................................................................................................... 6 Operating range of the remote control........................................................................................................................... 6 7 What you can do with the unit................................................................. 7 6 Connecting the power cable............................................................ 32 7 Selecting an on-screen menu language.......................................... 33 8 Configuring the necessary speaker settings.................................. 34 9 Part names and functions...................................................................... 11 Warning messages................................................................................................................................................................ 38 Front display (indicators).................................................................................................................................................... 12 10 Connecting to a network wirelessly................................................ 39 Rear panel................................................................................................................................................................................. 13 Selecting the connection method................................................................................................................................... 39 Remote control....................................................................................................................................................................... 14 Connecting the unit to a wireless network.................................................................................................................. 40 Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly (Wireless Direct)...................................................................... 45 15 11 Setting the MusicCast....................................................................... 47 MusicCast CONTROLLER..................................................................................................................................................... 47 Placing speakers............................................................................... 16 Adding the unit to the MusicCast network.................................................................................................................. 47 Typical speaker layouts....................................................................................................................................................... 17 Other speaker layouts.......................................................................................................................................................... 19 PLAYBACK Presence speaker layout..................................................................................................................................................... 21 Setting the speaker impedance....................................................................................................................................... 22 2 48 Basic playback procedure...................................................................... 48 Connecting speakers........................................................................ 23 Enjoying playback................................................................................................................................................................. 48 Connecting speaker cables................................................................................................................................................ 24 Switching information on the front display................................................................................................................. 49 Connecting the subwoofer (with built-in amplifier)................................................................................................. 24 Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE).................................................................................................... 50 Connecting front speakers that support bi-amp connections............................................................................. 24 Connecting Zone B speakers............................................................................................................................................. 24 3 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)................ 35 Error messages....................................................................................................................................................................... 37 Front panel............................................................................................................................................................................... 11 PREPARATIONS 1 Preparing for connecting to a network........................................... 31 Connecting a network cable............................................................................................................................................. 31 Remote control.......................................................................................... 6 FEATURES Connecting the radio antennas....................................................... 30 FM/AM antennas (Except for U.K., Europe, Australia and Russia models)........................................................ 30 Selecting a registered scene.............................................................................................................................................. 50 Connecting a TV/playback devices.................................................. 25 Registering a scene............................................................................................................................................................... 50 Input/output jacks and cables.......................................................................................................................................... 25 Connecting a TV..................................................................................................................................................................... 26 Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players).............................................................................................. 27 Connecting audio devices (such as CD players)......................................................................................................... 29 Connecting to the jack on the front panel................................................................................................................... 29 2 En Selecting the sound mode..................................................................... 51 Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP 3D)............................................................................................ 52 Playing back more high-quality sounds with bi-amp connections .................................................................................................................. 81 Enjoying unprocessed playback...................................................................................................................................... 54 Connecting front speakers that support bi-amp connections............................................................................. 81 Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (direct playback)................................................................................................. 55 Playing back music in multiple rooms.................................................. 82 Enhancing the bass (Extra Bass)....................................................................................................................................... 55 Connecting Zone B speakers............................................................................................................................................. 82 Playing back digitally compressed formats (such as MP3, etc.) with enriched sound (Compressed Music Enhancer)..................................................................................................................................................................... 55 Operating the Zone B........................................................................................................................................................... 83 Useful functions...................................................................................... 85 Listening to FM/AM radio (Except for U.K., Europe, Australia and Russia models)........................................................................................ 56 Registering favorite items (shortcut).............................................................................................................................. 85 Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu)......................................................................................... 87 Selecting a frequency for reception............................................................................................................................... 56 Registering favorite radio stations (presets)................................................................................................................ 57 Listening to DAB radio (U.K., Europe, Australia and Russia models) .................................................................................................................. 60 Option menu items............................................................................................................................................................... 87 CONFIGURATIONS Preparing the DAB tuning.................................................................................................................................................. 60 Selecting a DAB radio station for reception................................................................................................................. 61 91 Registering favorite DAB radio stations (presets)...................................................................................................... 62 Configuring various functions (Setup Menu)....................................... 91 Displaying the DAB information...................................................................................................................................... 63 Setup menu items................................................................................................................................................................. 92 Checking reception strength of each DAB channel label....................................................................................... 64 Speaker...................................................................................................................................................................................... 94 Listening to FM radio (U.K., Europe, Australia and Russia models) .................................................................................................................. 65 HDMI........................................................................................................................................................................................... 99 Sound...................................................................................................................................................................................... 101 ECO........................................................................................................................................................................................... 104 Selecting a frequency for reception............................................................................................................................... 65 Function.................................................................................................................................................................................. 105 Registering favorite FM radio stations (presets)......................................................................................................... 65 Network.................................................................................................................................................................................. 108 Radio Data System tuning.................................................................................................................................................. 68 Bluetooth............................................................................................................................................................................... 110 Playing back music stored on a Bluetooth® device.............................. 69 Language............................................................................................................................................................................... 111 Playback Bluetooth® device music on the unit........................................................................................................... 69 Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu)............ 112 Enjoying audio using Bluetooth® speakers/headphones....................................................................................... 70 ADVANCED SETUP menu items..................................................................................................................................... 112 Playing back music with AirPlay............................................................ 71 Changing the speaker impedance setting (SP IMP.).............................................................................................. 112 Playback of iTunes/iPhone music contents................................................................................................................. 71 Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE ID).......................................................................................................... 113 Playing back music stored on a USB storage device............................ 73 Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT)......................................................................................................... 113 Selecting the HDMI 4K signal format (4K MODE).................................................................................................... 113 Connecting a USB storage device................................................................................................................................... 73 DTS Format Notification Setting (DTS MODE).......................................................................................................... 114 Playback of USB storage device contents..................................................................................................................... 73 Restoring the default settings (INIT)............................................................................................................................. 114 Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)...................... 76 Updating the firmware (UPDATE)................................................................................................................................. 114 Media sharing setup............................................................................................................................................................. 76 Checking the firmware version (VERSION)................................................................................................................. 114 Playback of PC music contents......................................................................................................................................... 77 Updating the unit’s firmware via the network................................... 115 Listening to Internet radio..................................................................... 79 Updating the unit’s firmware immediately............................................................................................................... 115 Playback of Internet radio.................................................................................................................................................. 79 Updating the unit’s firmware at power off................................................................................................................ 115 Registering favorite Internet radio stations................................................................................................................. 80 3 En APPENDIX 117 Frequently asked questions................................................................ 117 Troubleshooting................................................................................... 119 First, check the following:................................................................................................................................................ 119 Power, system and remote control............................................................................................................................... 119 Audio....................................................................................................................................................................................... 120 Video........................................................................................................................................................................................ 122 FM/AM radio (AM radio feature is available except for U.K., Europe, Australia and Russia models).... 123 DAB radio (U.K., Europe, Australia and Russia models)......................................................................................... 123 USB and network................................................................................................................................................................. 124 Bluetooth®............................................................................................................................................................................. 125 Error indications on the front display................................................. 126 Glossary................................................................................................. 127 Audio information.............................................................................................................................................................. 127 HDMI and video information.......................................................................................................................................... 128 Network information......................................................................................................................................................... 129 Yamaha technologies........................................................................................................................................................ 129 Supported devices and file formats.................................................... 130 Supported devices.............................................................................................................................................................. 130 File formats............................................................................................................................................................................ 130 Video signal flow.................................................................................. 131 Information on HDMI........................................................................... 132 HDMI Control........................................................................................................................................................................ 132 Audio Return Channel (ARC)........................................................................................................................................... 134 HDMI signal compatibility............................................................................................................................................... 134 Trademarks........................................................................................... 135 Specifications........................................................................................ 136 4 En BEFORE USING THE UNIT Accessories How to use this manual Check that the following accessories are supplied with the product. £ AM antenna (except for U.K., Europe, Australia and Russia models) • The illustrations of the main unit used in this manual are of the U.S.A. model, unless otherwise specified. £ FM antenna (except for U.K., Europe, Australia and Russia models) • Some features are not available in certain regions. • Due to product improvements, specifications and appearance are subject to change without notice. • This manual explains operations using the supplied remote control. • This manual describes all the “iPod touch”, “iPhone” and “iPad” as the “iPhone”. “iPhone” refers to “iPod touch”, “iPhone” and “iPad”, unless otherwise specified. Notice: * One of the above is supplied depending on the region of purchase. Indicates precautions for use to avoid the possibility of malfunction/damage to the unit. £ DAB/FM antenna (U.K., Europe, Australia and £ YPAO microphone Russia models) £ Remote control £ CD-ROM (Owner's Manual) £ Batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) (x2) £ Quick Start Guide Note: Indicates instructions and supplementary explanations for optimum use. 5 En Remote control The supplied remote control is used as follows. Insert the batteries Insert the batteries the right way round. Operating range of the remote control Point the remote control at the remote control sensor on the unit and remain within the operating range shown below. Within 6 m (20 ft) 30° 30° 6 En FEATURES What you can do with the unit The unit is equipped with full of useful functions. Supports 2- to 7.1-channel speaker system You can enjoy your favorite acoustic spaces in various styles. YPAO automatically optimizes the speaker settings to suit your room. • “Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)” (p.35) CINEMA DSP allows you to create stereo or multichannel sounds with the sound fields like actual movie theaters and concert halls in your own room. • “Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP 3D)” (p.52) You can enjoy compressed music with enhanced sound (Compressed Music Enhancer). • “Playing back digitally compressed formats (such as MP3, etc.) with enriched sound (Compressed Music Enhancer)” (p.55) The Zone A/B function allows you to playback an input source in the room where the unit is installed (Zone A) and in another room (Zone B). • “Playing back music in multiple rooms” (p.82) Change the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE) The SCENE function allows you to select the input source and settings registered to the corresponding scene, such as sound program and Compressed Music Enhancer on/off, with just one touch. • “Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE)” (p.50) 4K Ultra HD signal and HDCP 2.2 supported You can enjoy the high definition video quality of 4K with HDCP 2.2 that complies with the latest copyright protection. • “Selecting the HDMI 4K signal format (4K MODE)” (p.113) Support for the Latest Surround Format, Dolby Atmos® and DTS:X™ with presence speakers The unit supports Dolby Atmos and DTS:X that will fill the room with multidimensional sound. You can enjoy Dolby Atmos, DTS:X or CINEMA DSP 3D with the layout for presence speakers that suits your listening environment. • “Typical speaker layouts” (p.17) • “Presence speaker layout” (p.21) 7 En Wide variety of supported content via network When the unit is connected to a network by establishing a wired or wireless connection, you can enjoy various contents via network on the unit. You can select a wired or wireless connection to a network. • “Preparing for connecting to a network” (p.31) • “Connecting to a network wirelessly” (p.39) You can play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible NAS on the unit. • “Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/ NAS)” (p.76) You can listen to Internet radio stations from all over the world. • “Listening to Internet radio” (p.79) The AirPlay function allows you to play back iTunes or iPhone/iPad/iPod touch music on the unit via network. • “Playing back music with AirPlay” (p.71) The ECO mode (power saving function) allows you to create an eco-friendly home theater system Connecting various devices Surround playback with 5 speakers placed in front When the ECO mode is enabled, you can reduce the unit's power consumption. A number of HDMI jacks and various input/output jacks on the unit allow you to connect video devices (such as BD/DVD players), audio devices (such as CD players), game consoles, portable audio player, and other devices. • “ECO Mode” (p.104) • “Connecting a TV/playback devices” (p.25) Sequential operation of a TV, AV receiver, and BD/DVD player (HDMI Control) Playing back TV audio in surround sound with a single HDMI cable connection (Audio Return Channel: ARC) When the direct playback mode is enabled, the unit plays back the selected source with the least circuitry, which lets you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound quality. When using an ARC-compatible TV, you only need one HDMI cable to enable video output to the TV, audio input from the TV, and the transmission of HDMI Control signals. Enhanced bass reproduction When the unit is connected to an HDMI Controlcompatible TV and BD/DVD player with each HDMI cable, you can control the unit (such as power and volume) and BD/DVD player with TV remote control operations. • “HDMI Control” (p.132) Supports Bluetooth® devices You can play back music stored on a Bluetooth device. • “Playing back music stored on a Bluetooth® device” (p.69) Supports USB storage devices You can play back music stored on a USB storage device. • “Playing back music stored on a USB storage device” (p.73) • “Connecting a TV” (p.26) Creating 3-dimensional sound fields Connecting presence speakers allows you to create a natural 3-dimensional sound field in your own room (CINEMA DSP 3D). Even when no presence speakers are connected, the Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) function produces 3D surround sound. In addition, the unit creates Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers to add a sense of depth to the rear sound field even when no surround back speakers are connected. • “Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP 3D)” (p.52) 8 En You can enjoy the surround sound even when the surround speakers are placed in front. • “Enjoying surround sound with 5 speakers placed in front (Virtual CINEMA FRONT)” (p.53) Enjoying pure high fidelity sound • “Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (direct playback)” (p.55) Extra Bass allows you to enjoy enhanced bass reproduction that does not depend on the speakers used. • “Enhancing the bass (Extra Bass)” (p.55) Listening to FM/AM radio (Except for U.K., Europe, Australia and Russia models) The unit is equipped with a built-in FM/AM tuner. You can register up to 40 favorite radio stations as presets. • “Listening to FM/AM radio (Except for U.K., Europe, Australia and Russia models)” (p.56) Listening to DAB/FM radio (U.K., Europe, Australia and Russia models) The unit is equipped with a built-in DAB/FM tuner. DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) uses digital signals for clearer sound and more stable reception compared to analog signals. You can register up to 40 favorite radio stations as presets. Useful applications The useful application for connections and operations of the unit is as follows. Auto Rename function The unit automatically creates input source names according to the HDMI-compatible devices connected, and displays the respective input source names on the front display. • “Input Rename” (p.105) AV CONTROLLER is an application that assists you with various operations of AV Receiver without the remote control. This app allows you not only to control the unit’s power and volume but also to select the input source and start/stop playback, as shown below. GUIDE” AV SETUP GUIDE is an application that assists you with cable connections between AV Receiver and source devices as well as AV Receiver setup. This app guides you through the various settings such as speaker connections, TV and source device connections and assigning the power amp. • “Listening to FM radio (U.K., Europe, Australia and Russia models)” (p.65) You can operate the USB storage device, view information, or easily configure the settings using the on-screen menu. tablets “AV CONTROLLER” n Application for tablets “AV SETUP • “Listening to DAB radio (U.K., Europe, Australia and Russia models)” (p.60) Easy operation with a TV screen n Application for smartphone / Functions: • Power on/off • Volume up/down • Mute • Music Play Functions: • Input Selection 1) Connection support guide – Speaker connection – TV/source devices connection • DSP Mode Selection 2) Setup support guide – Automatic network setup of HDMI, power amp assign, etc. – Various setup assistance with illustrations. – YPAO setting guidance 3) View Owner's Manual * This application is for tablets only. For details, search for “AV SETUP GUIDE” on the App Store or Google Play™. 9 En • SCENE selection • Blu-ray player fundamental control • Seamless control between the Yamaha AV Receiver and Blu-ray player • Demo mode - Explains how to use this app For details, search for “AV CONTROLLER” on the App Store or Google Play. n Application for smartphone / tablets "MusicCast CONTROLLER" MusicCast CONTROLLER is an application that allows you to link a MusicCast compatible device to other MusicCast compatible devices in other rooms and play them back simultaneously. This app lets you use your smartphone or other mobile device instead of the remote control to easily select music to play back as well as configure the unit and MusicCast compatible devices. Functions: • Selecting and playing back various content – Play back music from your mobile device – Select an Internet radio station – Play back music files stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) – Play back music files stored on a USB storage device • Operating and configuring the unit – Select the input source, adjust the volume and mute the audio output – Select from a wide variety of sound processing features For details, search for “MusicCast CONTROLLER” on the App Store or Google Play. 10 En Part names and functions The part names and functions of the unit and the supplied remote control are as follows. Front panel 1 3 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 A DIRECT YPAO MIC MEMORY INFO (WPS) FM PRESET AM TUNING INPUT VOLUME SCENE BD/DVD TONE CONTROL PHONES NET TV RADIO STRAIGHT PROGRAM SILENT CINEMA B 1 z (power) key Turns on/off (standby) the unit. 2 Standby indicator Lights up when the unit is in standby mode under any of the following conditions. • HDMI Control is enabled (p.99) • Standby Through is enabled (p.99) • Network Standby is enabled (p.109) 3 YPAO MIC jack For connecting the supplied YPAO microphone (p.35). 4 Remote control sensor Receives remote control signals (p.6). 5 INFO (WPS) key Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.49). Enters the wireless LAN connection setup (WPS button configuration) by holding down for 3 seconds (p.41). 6 MEMORY key AUX USB AUDIO 5V (CONNECT) C D E F G H 1A I 7 PRESET keys J (U.S.A. model) D TONE CONTROL key Select a preset radio station (p.58). 8 FM and AM keys (except for U.K., Europe, Australia and Russia models) FM and DAB keys (U.K., Europe, Australia and Russia models) Switch between FM and AM (p.56) or FM and DAB (p.60). 9 TUNING keys Adjusts the level of high-frequency range (Treble) and lowfrequency range (Bass) individually (p.88). E SCENE keys Select the registered input source and sound program with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when it is in standby mode (p.50). F PROGRAM keys Select a sound program or a surround decoder (p.51). Select the radio frequency (p.56). : Front display G STRAIGHT (CONNECT) key Enables/disables the straight decode mode (p.54). Displays information (p.12). Enters the MusicCast network addition and the wireless LAN setup by holding down for 5 seconds (p.47). A DIRECT key Enables/disables the direct playback mode (p.55). H AUX jack For connecting devices, such as portable audio players (p.29). B PHONES jack For connecting headphones. I USB jack C INPUT knob For connecting a USB storage device (p.73). Select an input source. J VOLUME knob Registers radio stations as preset stations (p.57). Adjusts the volume. 11 En Front display (indicators) 2 1 34 6 7 8 9 0 A STEREO TUNED ZONE SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A - DRC LINK MASTER OUT 5 2 ECO VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL FPL FPR SL SW SR SBL SB SBR B C 1 HDMI Lights up when HDMI signals are being input or output. OUT Lights up when HDMI signals are being output. 2 LINK MASTER Lights up when the unit is the master device of the MusicCast network. 3 Firmware update indicator Lights up when a firmware update is available via the network. 4 Bluetooth indicator Light up while the unit is connected to a Bluetooth device. 5 CINEMA DSP Lights up when CINEMA DSP (p.52) or CINEMA DSP 3D (p.52) is working. 6 SLEEP Lights up when the sleep timer is on. 7 STEREO Lights up when the unit is receiving a stereo FM radio signal. TUNED Lights up when the unit is receiving an FM/AM radio station (except for U.K., Europe, Australia and Russia models) or FM radio station (U.K., Europe, Australia and Russia models) signal. 8 ZONE indicators Indicate the zone to which the sound is output (p.84). D E C F G H G Speaker indicators 9 A-DRC Lights up when Adaptive DRC (p.88) is working. Indicate speaker terminals from which signals are output. A Front speaker (L) : Volume indicator S Front speaker (R) Indicates the current volume. D Center speaker A VIRTUAL Lights up when the Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) (p.17), Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) (p.52), Virtual CINEMA DSP (p.53) or Virtual CINEMA FRONT (p.53) is working. B ECO Lights up when the eco mode (p.104) is enabled. C Cursor indicators Indicate the remote control cursor keys currently operational. F Surround speaker (L) G Surround speaker (R) H Surround back speaker (L) J Surround back speaker (R) K Surround back speaker B Presence speaker (L) N Presence speaker (R) L Subwoofer H MUTE D Information display Displays the current status (such as input name and sound mode name). You can switch the information by pressing INFO (p.49). E Signal strength indicator Indicates the strength of the wireless signal (p.39). Note This indicator may light up when the unit is added to the MusicCast network. For details, see “Setting the MusicCast” (p.47). F ENHANCER Lights up when Compressed Music Enhancer (p.55) is working. 12 En Blinks when audio is temporarily muted. Rear panel 3 2 1 HDMI OUT 4 1 ARC (BD/DVD) FM AUDIO 1 (TV) 3 ANTENNA (RADIO) 6 NETWORK HDMI (HDCP2.2) 2 (HDCP2.2) 5 (NET) 4 SPEAKERS AM 75 Ω OPTICAL AUDI0 2 COAXIAL AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO MONITOR OUT CENTER FRONT COAXIAL SURROUND PRE OUT SUBWOOFER AUDI0 3 1 SINGLE 2 7 8 9 0 ( U.S.A. model) ▪ The area around the video/audio output jacks is marked in white on the actual product to prevent improper connections. 1 HDMI OUT jack For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting video/audio signals (p.25). When using ARC, TV audio signal can also be input through the HDMI OUT jack. 2 HDMI 1–4 jacks For connecting to HDMI-compatible playback devices and inputting video/audio signals (p.27). 3 ANTENNA jacks 7 AV jacks AUDIO jacks For connecting to video/audio playback devices and inputting video/audio signals (p.27). 8 MONITOR OUT jack For connecting to a TV and outputting video signals (p.25). 9 SUBWOOFER PRE OUT 1–2 jacks For connecting to a subwoofer (with built-in amplifier) (p.23). : SPEAKERS terminals For connecting to speakers (p.23). For connecting to the radio antennas (p.30). 4 NETWORK jack For a wired connection to a network (p.31). 5 Wireless antenna For a wireless (Wi-Fi) connection to a network (p.31) and a Bluetooth connection (p.69). 6 Power cable For connecting to an AC wall outlet (p.32). 13 En Remote control 1 2 3 1 Remote control signal transmitter Transmits infrared signals. 2 z (receiver power) key SLEEP HDMI 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 BLUETOOTH USB NET FM AM Turns on/off (standby) the unit. 4 3 3 SLEEP key AV 4 3 ZONE A AUX Select an input source for playback. 5 You can select directly each input source by pressing the following keys. SCENE 6 7 8 9 BD DVD TV PROGRAM NET RADIO VOLUME MUTE POP-UP/MENU TOP MENU SETUP OPTION C D E HDMI 1-4 HDMI 1-4 jacks AV 1-3 AV 1-3 jacks AUDIO 1–3 AUDIO 1–3 jacks 0 DISPLAY RETURN RED GREEN YELLOW BLUE F Bluetooth device USB USB jack (on the front panel) NET SERVER, NET RADIO, MusicCast Link, AirPlay and network sources (press repeatedly to select a desired source) B STRAIGHT DIRECT PRESET ENHANCER BASS ▪ The playback devices must support HDMI Control. Some HDMI Control-compatible devices cannot be used. ▪ You can assign the unit's functions to the RED/GREEN/ YELLOW/BLUE keys (p.107). Operate the FM/AM/DAB radio when “TUNER” is selected as the input source (p.56). MEMORY Registers radio stations as presets. PRESET Select a preset station. TUNING Select the radio frequency. B Sound mode keys AUX jack (on the front panel) FM radio C VOLUME keys AM or DAB AM radio (except for U.K., Europe, Australia and Russia models) or DAB radio (U.K., Europe, Australia and Russia models) D MUTE key Select a sound mode (p.51). Adjust the volume. Mutes the audio output. E OPTION key 5 ZONE switch Changes the zone that is controlled by the remote control (p.83). 6 SCENE keys Displays the option menu (p.87). F DISPLAY key Turns on/off the browse screen, playback screen, etc. Select the registered input source and sound program with one touch. Also, turn on the unit when it is in standby mode (p.50). 7 PROGRAM keys Select a sound program or a surround decoder (p.51). 9 SETUP key (U.S.A. model) Let you perform playback operations when “USB” or “NET” is selected as the input source, or control playback of the HDMI Control-compatible playback device. FM HOME TUNING Returns to the previous screen. AUX MEMORY A Confirms a selected item. RETURN A Radio keys BLUETOOTH ENTER Select a menu or the parameter. Note 4 Input selection keys ZONE B Cursor keys ENTER 8:A External device operation keys Pressing this key repeatedly will specify the time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min, off), in which the unit switches to the standby mode. AUDIO : Menu operation keys Displays the setup menu (p.91). 14 En PREPARATIONS General setup procedure 1 Placing speakers................................................................................................................................ (p.16) 2 Connecting speakers........................................................................................................................ (p.23) 3 Connecting a TV/playback devices.................................................................................................. (p.25) 4 Connecting the radio antennas....................................................................................................... (p.30) 5 Preparing for connecting to a network........................................................................................... (p.31) 6 Connecting the power cable............................................................................................................ (p.32) 7 Selecting an on-screen menu language.......................................................................................... (p.33) 8 Configuring the necessary speaker settings................................................................................... (p.34) 9 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)................................................................ (p.35) 10 Connecting to a network wirelessly................................................................................................ (p.39) 11 Setting the MusicCast....................................................................................................................... (p.47) This completes all the preparations. Enjoy playing movies, music, radio and other content with the unit! 15 En 1 Placing speakers Select the speaker layout for the number of speakers that you are using and place the speakers and subwoofer in your room. This section describes the representative speaker layout examples. Notice ▪ (U.S.A. and Canada models only) Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When connecting 6-ohm speakers, set the unit’s speaker impedance to “6 Ω MIN”. For details, see “Setting the speaker impedance” (p.22). ▪ (Except for U.S.A. and Canada models) Use speakers with an impedance of at least 6 W. ▪ Use a subwoofer with built-in amplifier. ▪ Be sure to connect the front left and right speakers. 16 En Typical speaker layouts Note n 5.1.2-channel system (using presence speakers) ▪ “5.1.2-channel” denotes “standard 5.1-channel plus 2 for overhead speaker channels”. For details on how to place overhead speakers (presence speakers), see “Presence speaker layout” (p.21). This speaker system uses the presence speakers to produce a natural 3-dimensional sound field, and also creates Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers to add a sense of depth to the rear sound field. This system is suited for enjoying not only 5.1-channel but also for 7.1-channel contents. E 0.5 to 1 m 1 ▪ When using only one subwoofer, you can place it either in the left or right side. 1.8 m (5.9 ft) 9 3 9 4 5 10° to 30° Center Abbr. 1/2 3 10° to 30° Function Produce front left/right channel sounds (stereo sounds). Produces center channel sounds (such as movie dialogue and vocals). Surround (L/R) 4/5 Produce surround left/right channel sounds. Presence (L/R) E/R Produce CINEMA DSP effect sounds or heights channel sounds of Dolby Atmos and DTS:X contents. Subwoofer ▪ You can connect two subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to the unit. Two subwoofers connected to the unit output the same sounds. 2 1.8 m (5.9 ft) Speaker type ▪ To have a full effect of DTS:X contents, we recommend using this speaker system. 0.5 to 1 m R (1.6 to 3.3 ft) (1.6 to 3.3 ft) Front (L/R) ▪ To have a full effect of Dolby Atmos contents, we recommend using this speaker system. However, you can also play back Dolby Atmos contents with the 7.1 system (using surround back speakers). 9 Produces LFE (low-frequency effect) channel sounds and reinforces the bass parts of other channels. This channel is counted as “0.1”. You can connect two subwoofers to the unit and place them on the left/right (or front/rear) sides of the room. 17 En Note n 7.1-channel system This speaker system creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and also allows you to enjoy extended surround sounds using the surround back speakers. ▪ When using only one surround back speaker (6.1-channel system), place it straight behind the listening position (middle of 6 and 7 in the diagram). ▪ You can connect two subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to the unit. Two subwoofers connected to the unit output the same sounds. ▪ When using only one subwoofer, you can place it either in the left or right side. 1 9 2 3 9 4 5 10° to 30° 10° to 30° 6 7 30 cm (1 ft) or more Speaker type Front (L/R) Center Abbr. 1/2 3 Function Produce front left/right channel sounds (stereo sounds). Produces center channel sounds (such as movie dialogue and vocals). Surround (L/R) 4/5 Produce surround left/right channel sounds. Surround back (L/R) 6/7 Produce surround back left/right channel sounds. Subwoofer 9 Produces LFE (low-frequency effect) channel sounds and reinforces the bass parts of other channels. This channel is counted as “0.1”. You can connect two subwoofers to the unit and place them on the left/right (or front/rear) sides of the room. 18 En Other speaker layouts The following speaker layouts are also available. n 5.1 system (front 5.1-channel) n 5.1-channel system (using surround speakers) n 3.1.2 system E 1 2 1 3 9 4 1 2 4 9 R 2 5 9 3 3 5 10° to 30° 10° to 30° Note Note ▪ You can enjoy surround sound even without the center speaker (4.1-channel system). Note ▪ To utilize this configuration, set “Virtual CINEMA FRONT” (p.97) in the “Setup” menu to “On”. You can also play back Dolby Atmos and DTS:X contents with this speaker system. ▪ In addition to this speaker layout, you can use bi-amp connections or the Zone B function that allows you to play back an input source in another room (Zone B). For details, see “Playing back more high-quality sounds with bi-amp connections” (p.81) or “Playing back music in multiple rooms” (p.82). ▪ You can enjoy surround sound even without the center speaker (front 4.1-channel system). ▪ In addition to this speaker layout, you can use bi-amp connections or the Zone B function that allows you to play back an input source in another room (Zone B). For details, see “Playing back more high-quality sounds with bi-amp connections” (p.81) or “Playing back music in multiple rooms” (p.82). 19 En n 2.1-channel system n 3.1-channel system 1 9 2 1 3 2 9 Note Note In addition to this speaker layout, you can use bi-amp connections or the Zone B function that allows you to play back an input source in another room (Zone B). For details, see “Playing back more high-quality sounds with bi-amp connections” (p.81) or “Playing back music in multiple rooms” (p.82). In addition to this speaker layout, you can use bi-amp connections or the Zone B function that allows you to play back an input source in another room (Zone B). For details, see “Playing back more high-quality sounds with bi-amp connections” (p.81) or “Playing back music in multiple rooms” (p.82). 20 En Presence speaker layout n Dolby Enabled SP The unit provides three layout patterns for presence speakers (Front Height, Overhead and Dolby Enabled SP). Choose a layout pattern that suits your listening environment. Use the Dolby Enabled speakers as the presence speakers. Note This utilizes sounds reflected from ceiling and lets you enjoy overhead sounds only from speakers that are placed at the same level as traditional speakers. ▪ You can enjoy Dolby Atmos, DTS:X or Cinema DSP 3D with any layout pattern. ▪ When using presence speakers installed to the ceiling or when using the Dolby Enabled speakers as the presence speakers, configure the “Layout” setting in the “Setup” menu before performing YPAO (p.35). n Front Height Install the presence speakers on the front wall. It delivers a natural sound field with excellent linkage of left, right, top and bottom sound spaces, and sound extensity effectively. Note Place the Dolby Enabled speakers on top of or near the traditional front speakers. A Dolby Enabled speaker unit may be integrated into a traditional speaker. For details, refer to the instruction manual of the Dolby Enabled speakers. n Overhead Install the presence speakers to the ceiling above the listening position. It delivers realistic overhead sound effects and sound field with excellent linkage of front and rear sound spaces effectively. 21 En n Notes on installation of ceiling speakers Setting the speaker impedance When installing presence speakers to a ceiling, install them just above the listening position, or the ceiling between the extensions of the front speakers and listening position. (U.S.A. and Canada models only) Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When connecting 6-ohm speakers, set the speaker impedance to “6 Ω MIN”. 1 2 Before connecting speakers, connect the power cable to an AC wall outlet. While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press z (power). z (power) Notice ▪ Be sure to use speakers that are made for ceiling use and take anti-drop measures. Ask a qualified contractor or dealer personnel for installation works. STRAIGHT 3 Check that “SP IMP.” is displayed on the front display. LINK MASTER OUT ECO 2 STEREO TUNED ZONE SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC SP IMP.••8¬MIN 4 5 En FPR FPL SL SW SR SBL SB SBR Press STRAIGHT to select “6 Ω MIN”. Press z (power) to set the unit to standby mode and remove the power cable from the AC wall outlet. You are now ready to connect the speakers. 22 VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL 2 Connecting speakers Connect the speakers placed in your room to the unit. The following diagrams provide connections for 5.1- and 7.1-channel system as an example. For other systems, connect speakers while referring to the connection diagram for the 5.1‑channel system. Notice ▪ Remove the unit’s power cable from an AC wall outlet and turn off the subwoofer before connecting the speakers. ▪ The speaker has the polarity (+/-). Connect the speaker cable correctly between the positive (+) terminal of the unit and the speaker, and also between the negative (-) terminal of them. Cables required for connection (commercially available) Speaker cables (x the number of speakers) + – Audio pin cable (x1: for connecting a subwoofer) + – Precaution for connecting of the speaker cables HDMI OUT 1 ARC (BD/DVD) FM AUDIO 1 (TV) (RADIO) (NET) 4 3 ANTENNA 1 NETWORK HDMI (HDCP2.2) 2 (HDCP2.2) SPEAKERS AM 75 Ω OPTICAL AUDI0 2 COAXIAL AV 1 VIDEO AV 2 VIDEO AV 3 VIDEO MONITOR OUT CENTER FRONT COAXIAL SURROUND 10 mm (3/8”) 2 PRE OUT SUBWOOFER AUDI0 3 1 SINGLE 2 3 HDMI OUT (BD/DVD) 5 4 ▪ Prepare speaker cables in a place away from the unit, to avoid accidentally dropping wire strands into the unit's interior which could result in a short circuit or malfunction of the unit. ▪ Improper connecting of the speaker cables may cause short circuit and also damage the unit or the speakers. 4 (NET) – Twist the bare wires of the speaker cables firmly together. FM AUDIO 1 (TV) 4 3 2 1 ARC Surround (L) NETWORK HDMI (HDCP2.2) (HDCP2.2) Surround (R) ANTENNA (RADIO) SPEAKERS AM 75 Ω OPTICAL AUDI0 2 COAXIAL AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO 9 Subwoofer MONITOR OUT Audio pin cable FRONT COAXIAL CENTER – Do not let the bare wires of the speaker cable touch one another. SURROUND PRE OUT SUBWOOFER AUDI0 3 1 SINGLE 2 Use a subwoofer with built-in amplifier. – Do not let the bare wires of the speaker cable come into contact with the unit’s metal parts (rear panel and screws). 2 Front (R) 1 Front (L) 3 Center R Presence (R) E Presence (L) 7 Surround back (R) 6 Surround back (L) * You cannot use the surround back speakers and the presence speakers at the same time. 23 En ▪ If “Check SP Wires” appear on the front display when the unit is turned on, turn off the unit, and then check the speaker cables short circuit. Connecting speaker cables Connecting the subwoofer (with built-in amplifier) Speaker cables have two wires. One is for connecting the negative (-) terminals of the unit and the speaker to each other, and the other is for the positive (+) terminals. If the wires are colored to prevent confusion, connect the black wire to the negative and the other wire to the positive terminal. Use an audio pin cable to connect the subwoofer. 1 2 3 4 Audio pin cable 1 2 Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from the ends of the speaker cable, and twist the bare wires of the cable firmly together. Connecting front speakers that support bi-amp connections Loosen the speaker terminal. Insert the bare wires of the cable into the gap on the side (upper right or bottom left) of the terminal. When using front speakers that support bi-amp connections, connect them to the FRONT terminals and SURROUND BACK/PRESENCE/BI-AMP/ZONE B terminals. For details, see “Playing back more high-quality sounds with bi-amp connections” (p.81). Tighten the terminal. Note c + (red) b Surround back speakers, presence speakers, bi-amp speakers or Zone B speakers cannot be connected simultaneously. FR ON T d a Connecting Zone B speakers - (black) The Zone A/B function allows you to playback an input source in the room where the unit is installed (Zone A) and in another room (Zone B). To connect the Zone B speakers, see “Playing back music in multiple rooms” (p.82). Using a banana plug (U.S.A. and Canada models only) 1 2 AUDIO 3 Note Tighten the speaker terminal. Surround back speakers, presence speakers, bi-amp speakers or Zone B speakers cannot be connected simultaneously. Insert a banana plug into the end of the terminal. a FR ON T Banana plug b 24 En 3 Connecting a TV/playback devices The unit is equipped with a variety of input jacks including HDMI input jacks to allow you to connect different types of playback devices. For information on how to connect a Bluetooth device or a USB storage device, see the following pages. • Connecting a Bluetooth device (p.69) • Connecting a USB storage device (p.73) n Video jacks HDMI jacks Transmit digital video and digital sound through a single jack. Use an HDMI cable. HDMI cable Transmit analog video signals. Use a video pin cable. ▪ The unit’s HDMI jacks support the HDMI Control, Audio Return Channel (ARC), and 3D and 4K Ultra HD video transmission (through output) features. ▪ Use a Premium High Speed HDMI Cable or Premium High Speed Cable with Ethernet to enjoy 3D or 4K Ultra HD videos. Transmit analog stereo audio signals. Use a stereo pin cable (RCA cable). Stereo pin cable Video pin cable n Audio jacks (Stereo mini jack) Transmits analog stereo audio signals. Use a stereo mini-plug cable. OPTICAL jack Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital optical cable. If there is a protective cap on the tip of the cable, remove it before using the cable. Digital optical cable Note ▪ Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo. We recommend using a cable less than 5.0 m (16.4 ft) long to prevent signal quality degradation. (Stereo L/R jacks) VIDEO jacks Input/output jacks and cables n Video/audio jacks AUDIO jacks OPTICAL COAXIAL jacks Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital coaxial cable. Digital coaxial cable 25 En Stereo mini-plug cable Connecting a TV n Composite video connection Connect a TV to the unit so that video input to the unit can be output to the TV. You can also enjoy playback of TV audio on the unit. When connecting any video device with a video pin cable, connect the TV to the MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack. To maximize the performance of the unit, we recommend connecting a TV with an HDMI cable. Note n HDMI connection ▪ Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. ▪ If you connect your TV to the unit with a cable other than HDMI, video input to the unit via HDMI cannot be output to the TV. ▪ If you will receive TV broadcasts only from the set-top box, you do not need to make an audio cable connection between the TV and the unit. Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and a digital optical cable. The unit (rear) HDMI OUT jack VIDEO (composite video) connection HDMI input HDMI OUT (HDCP2.2) HDMI OUT 1 ARC (BD/DVD) FM AUDIO 1 (TV) 3 2 ANTENNA (RADIO) Connect the TV to the unit with a video pin cable and a digital optical cable. HDMI NETWORK HDMI (HDCP2.2) (HDCP2.2) (NET) 4 HDMI HDMI Video input (composite video) SPEAKERS AM MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack The unit (rear) 75 Ω OPTICAL AUDI0 2 COAXIAL AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO MONITOR OUT AUDI0 3 CENTER FRONT COAXIAL O OPTICAL SURROUND OPTICAL PRE OUT SUBWOOFER AUDIO 11 (TV) HDMI OUT (HDCP2.2) NETWORK HDMI (HDCP2.2) 3 2 1 (NET) 4 V ARC TV AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL) jack VIDEO MONITOR OUT SINGLE O 2 (BD/DVD) FM AUDIO 1 (TV) Audio output (digital optical) V ANTENNA (RADIO) SPEAKERS AM 75 Ω OPTICAL AUDI0 2 COAXIAL AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO MONITOR OUT COAXIAL AUDI0 3 FRONT 1 SURROUND OPTICAL SINGLE AUDIO 1 (TV) 2 Note CENTER PRE OUT SUBWOOFER O O OPTICAL TV ▪ A digital optical cable connection allows audio from the TV to be played back on the unit. A digital optical cable connection is not needed in the following cases: AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL) jack – If your TV supports Audio Return Channel (ARC) – If you will receive TV broadcasts only from the set-top box ▪ If you connect a TV that supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit’s power and volume with the TV’s remote control. To use HDMI Control and ARC, you need to configure the HDMI settings on the unit. For details on the settings, see “Information on HDMI” (p.132). About Audio Return Channel (ARC) ▪ ARC allows audio signals to travel both ways. If you connect a TV that supports ARC to the unit with a single HDMI cable, you can output video/audio to the TV or input TV audio to the unit. ▪ When using ARC, connect a TV with an HDMI cable that supports ARC. 26 En Audio output (digital optical) Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players) n Composite video connection Connect video devices such as BD/DVD players, set-top boxes (STBs) and game consoles to the unit. Depending on the video/audio output jacks available on your video device, choose one of the following connections. We recommend using an HDMI connection if the video device has an HDMI output jack. Connect a video device to the unit with a video pin cable and an audio cable (digital coaxial or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit) depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device. Output jacks on video device Video Note If the combination of video/audio input jacks available on the unit does not match your video device, change its combination according to the output jacks of your device (p.28). Input jacks on the unit Audio Digital coaxial Composite video n HDMI connection AV 1 (VIDEO + COAXIAL) Analog stereo AV 2–3 (VIDEO + AUDIO) Digital optical You need to change the combination of video/audio input jacks (p.28). Connect a video device to the unit with an HDMI cable. Video output (composite video) AV 1–3 (VIDEO) jacks HDMI 1–4 jacks AV 1 VIDEO The unit (rear) VIDEO V The unit (rear) HDMI OUT HDMI OUT NETWORK HDMI (HDCP2.2) 3 2 (HDCP2.2) 1 ARC (BD/DVD) HDMI OUT jack HDMI ANTENNA (RADIO) SPEAKERS AM FM AV 2 AV 3 VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO HDMI MONITOR OUT FRONT CENTER (RADIO) SPEAKERS AM Video device AV 2 AV 3 VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO MONITOR OUT FRONT CENTER C AUDI0 3 AUDI0 2 AV 1 ANTENNA (NET) 4 75 Ω AV 1 COAXIAL OPTICAL COAXIAL 3 AUDI0 2 HDMI 75 Ω (BD/DVD) OPTICAL COAXIAL FM AUDIO 1 (TV) 1 ARC AUDIO 1 (TV) (NET) 4 NETWORK HDMI (HDCP2.2) 2 (HDCP2.2) V SURROUND C PRE OUT SUBWOOFER 1 COAXIAL SINGLE COAXIAL SURROUND 2 COAXIAL AUDI0 3 L PRE OUT SUBWOOFER 1 SINGLE L L R R 2 R Video device AV 1 (COAXIAL) jack or AV 2–3 (AUDIO) jacks Note To watch videos input to the HDMI 1–4 jacks, you need to connect your TV to the HDMI OUT jack of the unit (p.26). Audio output (digital coaxial or analog stereo) Note If you connect a video device to the unit via composite video connection, you need to connect your TV to the MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack of the unit (p.26). 27 En n Changing the combination of video/audio input jacks 3 If the combination of video/audio input jacks available on the unit does not match your video device, change its combination according to the output jacks of your device. You can connect a video device that has the following video/audio output jacks. Press OPTION. SLEEP HDMI 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 BLUETOOTH USB NET FM AM ZONE A Output jacks on video device Video Video Audio Digital optical HDMI 1–4 AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL) HDMI 1–4 AUDIO 2 (COAXIAL) AV 1 (COAXIAL) 4 3 AUX ZONE B POP-UP/MENU TOP MENU Input jacks on the unit Audio 3 AV AUDIO TV NET RADIO SETUPP PROGRAM OPTION O VOLUME MUTE POP-UP/MENU TOP MENU SETUP OPTION Cursor keys ENTER ENTER Digital coaxial HDMI RED GREEN Composite video Digital optical AV 1–3 (VIDEO) STRAIGHT ARC (BD/DVD) 3 2 V 4 NETWORK LINK MASTER OUT 2 ANTENNA (RADIO) 5 AV 2 AV 3 VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO MONITOR OUT FRONT COAXIAL SURROUND CENTER 1 AUDIO 1 (TV) 6 Set-top box PRE OUT SUBWOOFER AUDI0 3 SINGLE OPTICAL 2 O 1 2 FPR FPL SL SW SR SBL SB SBR STEREO TUNED ZONE SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL FPL FPR SL SW SR SBL SB SBR Press OPTION. This completes the necessary settings. O OPTICAL AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL) jack VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL Audio•••AUDIO1 AUDI0 2 AV 1 2 ECO 75 Ω OPTICAL COAXIAL BLUE Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “AUDIO 1” (audio input jack to be used). OUT SPEAKERS AM YELL YELLOW STEREO TUNED ZONE SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC Audio In LINK MASTER FM AUDIO 1 (TV) GREEN Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Audio In” and press ENTER. ECO V (NET) BASS AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL) VIDEO VIDEO 1 PRESET ENHANCER MEMORY Video output (composite video) AV 2 HDMI (HDCP2.2) (HDCP2.2) DIRECT RED For example, if you have connected a video device to AV 2 (VIDEO) and AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL) jack of the unit, change the combination setting as follows. HDMI OUT DISPLAY RETURN 4 AV 2 (VIDEO) jack BLUE MEMORY Necessary setting The unit (rear) YELLOW HOME AUDIO 3 (AUDIO) AV 2–3 (AUDIO) HDMI 1–4 ENTER DISPLAY RETURN TUNING Analog stereo OPTION SCENE BD DVD If you select “AV 2” as the input source by pressing INPUT, the video/audio played back on the video device will be output from the unit. Audio output (digital optical) After connecting external devices (such as a TV and playback devices) and power cable of the unit, turn on the unit. Press INPUT to select “AV 2” (video input jack to be used) as the input source. 28 En Connecting audio devices (such as CD players) Connecting to the jack on the front panel Connect audio devices such as CD players and MD players to the unit. Depending on the audio output jacks available on your audio device, choose one of the following connections. Use the AUX jack on the front panel to temporarily connect devices such as portable audio players to the unit. Audio output jacks on audio device Before making a connection, stop playback on the device and turn down the volume on the unit. Audio input jacks on the unit Digital optical AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL) Digital coaxial AUDIO 2 (COAXIAL) AV 1 (COAXIAL) AUDIO 3 (AUDIO) AV 2–3 (AUDIO) Analog stereo SILENT CINEMA The unit (rear) HDMI OUT AUDIO 1 3 (TV) AUX USB AUDIO 5V STRAIGHT (CONNECT) 1A NETWORK HDMI (HDCP2.2) 2 1 ARC (BD/DVD) 75 Ω ANTENNA (RADIO) (NET) 4 O OPTICAL FM O OPTICAL SPEAKERS AUDI0 2 AM C OPTICAL C COAXIAL AUDI0 2 COAXIAL PROGRAM The unit (front) (HDCP2.2) AUDIO 1 (TV) TONE CONTROL PHONES AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO COAXIAL MONITOR OUT FRONT CENTER AUDI0 3 PRE OUT SUBWOOFER 1 L L R R Portable audio player Audio device SURROUND L COAXIAL If you select “AUX” as the input source by pressing AUX, the audio played back on the device will be output from the unit. SINGLE R 2 Note AV 1–3 jacks AUDIO 1–3 jacks Audio output (either digital optical, digital coaxial, or analog stereo) ▪ You need to prepare the audio cable that matches the output jacks on your device. ▪ For details on how to connect a USB storage device, see “Connecting a USB storage device” (p.73). 29 En 4 Connecting the radio antennas FM/AM antennas (Except for U.K., Europe, Australia and Russia models) DAB/FM antenna (U.K., Europe, Australia and Russia models) Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit. Connect the supplied DAB/FM antenna to the unit and fix the antenna ends to a wall. Fix the end of the FM antenna to a wall, and place the AM antenna on a flat surface. DAB/FM antenna FM antenna The unit (rear) AM antenna HDMI OUT NETWORK HDMI (HDCP2.2) (HDCP2.2) 1 ARC (BD/DVD) 3 2 4 (HDCP2.2) 1 ARC (BD/DVD) AUDIO 1 (TV) (NET) NETWORK HDMI (HDCP2.2) HDMI OUT 2 4 3 SPEAKERS DAB/FM 75 Ω ANTENNA (NET) (RADIO) OPTICAL AUDI0 2 FM AUDIO 1 (TV) ANTENNA (RADIO) SPEAKERS AM COAXIAL 75 Ω AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO MONITOR OUT FRONT CENTER SURROUND OPTICAL AUDI0 2 COAXIAL AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO MONITOR OUT FRONT CENTER COAXIAL SURROUND AUDI0 3 COAXIAL AUDI0 3 PRE OUT SUBWOOFER 1 PRE OUT SUBWOOFER 1 SINGLE SINGLE 2 2 The unit (rear) Note Assembling and connecting the AM antenna ▪ The antenna should be stretched out horizontally. ▪ If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the height, direction or placement of the DAB/FM antenna. Hold down Insert Release Note ▪ Unwind only the length of cable needed from the AM antenna unit. ▪ The wires of the AM antenna have no polarity. 30 En 5 Preparing for connecting to a network Connect the unit to a router (access point) with a network cable, or prepare the wireless antenna for establishing a wireless network connection. Note You can enjoy Internet radio or music files stored on media servers, such as PCs and Network Attached Storage (NAS), on the unit. ▪ If you are using a router that supports DHCP, you do not need to configure any network settings for the unit, as the network parameters (such as the IP address) will be assigned automatically to it. You only need to configure the network settings if your router does not support DHCP or if you want to configure the network parameters manually (p.108). Connecting a network cable ▪ You can check whether the network parameters (such as IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Information” (p.108) in the “Setup” menu. Connect the unit to your router with a commercially-available STP network cable (CAT-5 or higher straight cable). ▪ Some security software installed on your PC or the firewall settings of network devices (such as a router) may block the access of the unit to the network devices or the Internet. In these cases, configure the security software or firewall settings appropriately. ▪ Each server must be connected to the same subnet as the unit. Network Attached Storage (NAS) Internet ▪ To use the service via the Internet, broadband connection is strongly recommended. Preparing a wireless antenna WAN PC LAN If you connect the unit wirelessly, erect the wireless antenna. Modem For information on how to connect the unit to a wireless network, see “Connecting to a network wirelessly” (p.39). Wireless router Erect the wireless antenna. Network cable HDMI OUT 1 ARC (BD/DVD) FM AUDIO 1 (TV) ANTENNA (RADIO) S NETWORK HDMI (HDCP2.2) 4 3 2 (HDCP2.2) WIRELES (NET) SPEAKERS AM 75 Ω OPTICAL AUDI0 2 COAXIAL AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO MONITOR OUT COAXIAL AUDI0 3 The unit (rear) FRONT CENTER SURROUND PRE OUT SUBWOOFER 1 SINGLE Note 2 Do not apply excessive force on the wireless antenna. Doing so may damage the antenna. 31 En 6 Connecting the power cable After all the connections are complete, plug in the power cable. The unit (rear) NETWORK 3 4 (NET) To an AC wall outlet SPEAKERS FRONT CENTER SURROUND PRE OUT SUBWOOFER 1 SINGLE 2 32 En 7 Selecting an on-screen menu language Select the desired on-screen menu language. 1 2 6 Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit. Note The information on the front display is provided in English only. Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack). Note ▪ Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. If not, carry out operations while viewing the front display. ▪ When you turn on the unit for the first time, a message regarding the network setup appears. You can switch the language on this message screen. 3 4 5 To exit from the menu, press SETUP. Press SETUP. Use the cursor keys to select “Language” and press ENTER. Use the cursor keys to select the desired language. 33 En 8 Configuring the necessary speaker settings If you use any of the following speaker configurations, follow the procedure below to configure the corresponding speaker settings manually before performing YPAO. • Using surround back speakers (p.18), bi-amp connection (p.81) or Zone B speakers (p.82) • Using the surround speakers for front 5.1-channel system (Virtual CINEMA FRONT) (p.19) • Using the presence speakers for Dolby Atmos or DTS:X playback (p.21) 1 2 Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit. Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack). Note If you turn on the unit for the first time, the message regarding the network setup appears. For now, press RETURN and proceed to Step 3. 3 4 5 6 Press SETUP. Use the Cursor keys to select “Speaker” and press ENTER. Use the Cursor keys to select “Configuration” and press ENTER. Configure the corresponding speaker settings. ▪ When using surround back speakers, bi-amp connections or Zone B speakers, select “Power Amp Assign” (p.94), then select your speaker system. ▪ When using the surround speakers for front 5.1-channel system (Virtual CINEMA FRONT), select “Virtual CINEMA FRONT” (p.97), then select “On”. ▪ When using the presence speakers for Dolby Atmos or DTS:X playback, select “Layout” (p.96), then select your presence speaker layout. 7 To exit from the menu, press SETUP. 34 En 9 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) The Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) function detects speaker connections, measures the distances from them to your listening position(s), and then automatically optimizes the speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit your room. 4 Place the YPAO microphone at your listening position and connect it to the YPAO MIC jack on the front panel. Note Note ▪ When you use the front 5.1-channel speaker (Virtual CINEMA FRONT) configuration (p.19), set “Virtual CINEMA FRONT” (p.97) in the “Setup” menu to “On” beforehand. Place the YPAO microphone at your listening position (same height as your ears). We recommend the use of a tripod as a microphone stand. You can use the tripod screws to stabilize the microphone. ▪ Please note the following when using YPAO. The unit (front) – Use YPAO after connecting a TV and speakers to the unit. – During the measuring process, test tones are output at high volume. Ensure that the test tones do not frighten small children. – During the measuring process, you cannot adjust the volume. – During the measuring process, keep the room as quiet as possible. – Do not connect headphones. 1 – Do not stand between the speakers and the YPAO microphone during the measurement process (about 3 minutes). 1 2 9 Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit. Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack). 2 3 4 5 Note Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. If not, carry out operations while viewing the front display. 3 Ear height Turn on the subwoofer and set the volume to half. If the crossover frequency is adjustable, set it to maximum. VOLUME MIN MAX CROSSOVER/ HIGH CUT MIN The following screen appears on the TV. 9 MAX 1 1 35 En “Power Amp Assign” setting (p.94) 5 7 To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to select “Start” and press ENTER. Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “SAVE” and press ENTER. The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER to start the measurement immediately. Note To stop the measurement temporarily, press RETURN and follow the procedure in “Error messages” (p.37). The adjusted speaker settings are applied. The following screen appears on the TV when the measurement finishes. Note To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”. 8 1 Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit. This completes optimization of the speaker settings. 2 Notice 3 ▪ The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on top of AV equipment). 4 1 The number of speakers (front side/rear side/subwoofer) 2 Speaker distance (nearest/farthest) 3 Adjustment range of speaker output level 4 Warning message (if available) Note ▪ If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1) appears, see “Error messages” (p.37) or “Warning messages” (p.38). ▪ A speaker with a problem is indicated by blinking of the speaker indicators in the front display. ▪ If multiple warnings are given (when operating with the front display), use the cursor keys (q/w) to check the other warning messages. 6 Confirm the results displayed on the screen and press ENTER. 36 En Error messages If any error message is displayed during the measurement, resolve the problem and perform YPAO again. Error message Cause E-1:No Front SP Front speakers are not detected. (E-1:NO FRNT SP) E-2:No Sur. SP (E-2:NO SUR SP) E-3:No F.PRNS SP Error message (E-3:NO FPR SP) E-4:SBR → SBL (E-4:SBR → SBL) E-5:Noisy TV screen OUT (E-5:NOISY) STEREO TUNED ZONE SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC LINK MASTER 2 ECO E-5:NOISY VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL FPL FPR SL SW SR SBL SB SBR E-6:Check Sur. Front display (E-6:CHECK SUR) n Procedure to handle errors 1 2 E-7:No MIC (E-7:NO MIC) One of the surround speakers cannot be detected. (E-8:NO SIGNAL) Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select the desired operation. To exit the YPAO measurement: 1 2 3 E-9:User Cancel Select “EXIT” and press ENTER. (E-9:CANCEL) Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Exit” and press ENTER. E-10:Internal Err. (E-10:INTERNAL) Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit. To retry the YPAO measurement from beginning: 1 When using only one surround back A surround back speaker is speaker, you need to connect it to the connected to the R side SINGLE jack (L side). Exit YPAO, turn off only. the unit, and then reconnect the speaker. The noise is too loud. The YPAO microphone has been removed. Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and retry YPAO. The YPAO microphone cannot detect test tones. Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and retry YPAO. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. 1 The measurement has been Retry or exit YPAO as necessary. canceled. An internal error has occurred. Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display. To proceed with the current YPAO measurement (for E-5 and E-9 only): Select “PROCEED” and press ENTER. 37 En Keep the room quiet and retry YPAO. If you select “PROCEED”, YPAO takes the measurement again and ignores any noise detected. Surround speakers need to be Surround back speakers are connected in order to use surround back connected, but no surround speakers. Exit YPAO, turn off the unit, speakers are connected. and then reconnect the speakers. Note Select “RETRY” and press ENTER. Exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then check the speaker connections. One of the presence speakers cannot be detected. Check the content of error message and press ENTER. E-8:No Signal Remedy Exit YPAO, and turn off and on the unit. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. Warning messages If a warning message is displayed after the measurement, you can still save the measurement results by following on-screen instructions. Warning message Cause Remedy Check the cable connections (+/-) of the problem speaker. However, we recommend you perform YPAO again in order to use the unit with the optimal speaker settings. If the speaker is connected incorrectly: W-1:Out of Phase (W-1:PHASE) A speaker cable may be connected with the reverse polarity (+/-). Turn off the unit, reconnect the speaker cable. If the speaker is connected correctly: Depending on the type of speakers or room environment, this message may appear even if the speakers are connected correctly. In this case, you can ignore the message. W-2:Over Distance (W-2:DISTANCE) Warning message TV screen Problem speaker (blinks) OUT W-3:Level Error STEREO TUNED ZONE SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC LINK MASTER 2 ECO W-1:PHASE (W-3:LEVEL) VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL FPL FPR SL SW SR SBL SB SBR Front display n Procedure to handle warnings 1 2 Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display. Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select the desired operation. To save the measurement results: Select “SAVE” and press ENTER. To discard the measurement result: 1 3 Select “CANCEL” and press ENTER. Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit. 38 En Exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and place the problem speaker within 24 m (80 ft) of the listening position. Check the usage environment and cable connections (+/-) of each speaker, and the volume of the subwoofer. If there is There are significant volume any problem, exit YPAO, turn off the unit, differences between the and then reconnect speaker cable or speakers. correct the speaker positions. We recommend using the same speakers or speakers with specifications that are as similar as possible. Note Check the content of warning message and press ENTER. 1 A speaker is placed more than 24 m (80 ft) from the listening position. 10 Connecting to a network wirelessly Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point) or a mobile device by establishing a wireless connection. n Connecting without a wireless router (access point) Connect a mobile device to the unit directly. Note You can use the application for smartphone / tablet “AV CONTROLLER” (p.9) to control the unit from mobiles devices or enjoy music files stored on mobiles devices on the unit. When you connect the unit to a router with a network cable, you need not do this procedure. Selecting the connection method Select a connection method according to your network environment. n Connecting with a wireless router (access point) Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point). You can enjoy Internet radio, AirPlay, or music files stored on media servers (PC/NAS) on the unit. Mobile device (such as iPhone) You can also use the application for smartphone / tablet “AV CONTROLLER” (p.9) to control the unit from mobiles devices or enjoy music files stored on mobiles devices on the unit. For details on connection, see “Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly (Wireless Direct)” (p.45). Note ▪ You cannot use Wireless Direct simultaneously with the wired LAN connection (p.31) or the wireless LAN connection (p.40). Internet Wireless router ▪ When Wireless Direct is enabled, the unit cannot connect to the Internet. Therefore, you cannot use any kind of Internet service such as Internet radio. ▪ Also the mobile device cannot connect to the Internet, so we recommend you disconnect the mobile device from the unit. Modem Mobile device (such as iPhone) The unit The unit For details on connection, see “Connecting the unit to a wireless network” (p.40). Note ▪ You cannot use the wireless LAN connection simultaneously with the wired LAN connection (p.31) or Wireless Direct (p.45). ▪ If the unit and the wireless router (access point) are too far apart, the unit may not connect to a wireless router (access point). In such case, place them close to each other. 39 En Connecting the unit to a wireless network 5 There are several methods to connect the unit to a wireless network. 6 Select a connection method according to your environment. • The connection setting to MusicCast network. – “Setting the MusicCast” (p.47) Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network Connection” and press ENTER. Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Wireless(Wi-Fi)” and press ENTER. • The connection settings on iOS devices – “Sharing the iOS device setting” (p.40) • The WPS button configuration method – “Using the WPS button configuration” (p.41) • Other connection methods – “Using other connection methods” (p.42) n Sharing the iOS device setting 7 You can easily setup a wireless connection by applying the connection settings on iOS devices (iPhone/iPad/iPod touch). Before proceeding, confirm that your iOS device is connected to a wireless router. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “WAC(iOS)” and press ENTER. Note ▪ The sharing process will restore the default settings for the following. – Network settings – Bluetooth settings – USB and network items registered as shortcuts – Internet radio stations registered to “Favorites” – Account information for the network services ▪ You need iOS device with iOS 7 or later. (The following procedure is a setup example for iOS 10.) 8 ▪ This configuration does not work if the security method of your wireless router (access point) is WEP. In this case, use other connection method. 1 2 Note Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit. When you use wired network connection, a warning message is displayed on the screen. Disconnect the network cable from the unit, and then press ENTER. Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack). Note Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. 3 4 Read the on-screen description and press ENTER. Press SETUP. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network” and press ENTER. 40 En 9 On the iOS device, select the unit as the AirPlay speaker in the WiFi screen. n Using the WPS button configuration You can easily set up a wireless connection with one push of the WPS button. iOS 10 (example of English version) 1 2 Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit. Hold down INFO (WPS) on the front panel for 3 seconds. “Press WPS button on Access Point” appears on the front display. 3 When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on the front display. The name of the unit 10 Push the WPS button on the wireless router (access point). If “Not connected” appears, repeat from step 1 or try another connection method. Select the network (access point) of which you want to share the settings with the unit. Note Tap here to start setup ▪ Depending on the model of the wireless router (access point), the unit may not connect to it. In this case, try connection with “Access Point Scan” or “Manual Setting” (p.42). ▪ You can use “WPS Button” (p.42) in the “Setup” menu to set up a wireless connection with the WPS button. The network currently selected About WPS ▪ WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) is a standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance, which allows easy establishment of a wireless home network. When the sharing process finishes, the unit is automatically connected to the selected network (access point) and “Completed” appears on the front display. If “Not shared” or “Not connected” appears, press ENTER to repeat from step 5 or try another connection method. 11 To exit from the menu, press SETUP. 41 En n Using other connection methods 7 If your wireless router (access point) does not support WPS button configuration method, follow the procedure below to configure the wireless network settings. 1 2 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select the desired connection method and press ENTER. Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit. Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack). Note Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. 3 4 5 6 The following connection methods are available. Press SETUP. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network” and press ENTER. WPS Button You can set up a wireless connection with the WPS button while viewing the TV screen. Follow the instructions displayed on the TV screen. WAC(iOS) See “Sharing the iOS device setting” (p.40). Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network Connection” and press ENTER. Access Point Scan You can set up a wireless connection by searching for an access point. For details on settings, see “Searching for an access point” (p.43). Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Wireless(Wi-Fi)” and press ENTER. Manual Setting You can setup a wireless connection by entering the required information (such as SSID) manually. For details on settings, see “Setting up the wireless connection manually” (p.44). PIN Code You can set up a wireless connection by entering the unit’s PIN code into the wireless router (access point). The method is available if the wireless router (access point) supports the WPS PIN code method. For details on settings, see “Using the WPS PIN code” (p.45). Note The unit may connect automatically to the access point to which it has connected previously. In this case, the message indicating the successful connection will appear. You can ignore this message and proceed to the next step. 42 En 3 Searching for an access point If you select “Access Point Scan” as the connection method, the unit starts searching for access points. After a while, the list of available access points appears on the TV screen. 1 Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the security key. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select the desired access point and press ENTER. The wireless connection setting screen appears on the TV. Button functions Access Point X 2 [¬]/[→]: Moves the cursor left and right. [Aa]: Switches the letter cases (upper/lower). [BKSP]: Deletes the character to the left of the selected one. [Space]: Enters a space. [DEL]: Deletes the selected character. When finished entering the key, select “OK” to return to the previous screen. Press ENTER. 4 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Connect” and press ENTER to start the connection process. When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on the TV screen. If “Not connected” appears, repeat from step 1 or try another connection method. 5 43 En To exit from the menu, press SETUP. 3 Setting up the wireless connection manually If you select “Manual Setting” as the connection method, the wireless connection setting screen appears on the TV. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Security” and the cursor keys (e/r) to select the encryption method. Choices You need to setup the SSID (network name), encryption method and security key for your network. None, WEP, WPA-PSK(AES), Mixed Mode Note If you select “None”, the connection may be insecure since the communication is not encrypted. 4 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Security Key” and press ENTER. Note If you select “None” in step 3, this item is not available. 1 2 5 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “SSID” and press ENTER. Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the security key. If you select “WEP” in step 3, enter either 5 or 13 character string, or 10 or 26 hexadecimal digits. Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the SSID of the access point. If you select the method other than “WEP” in step 3, enter either 8 to 63 character string, or 64 hexadecimal digits. When finished entering the key, select “OK” to return to the previous screen. 6 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Connect” and press ENTER to start the connection process. When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on the TV screen. If “Not connected” appears, check that all the information is entered correctly, and repeat from step 1. 7 When finished entering the key, select “OK” to return to the previous screen. 44 En To exit from the menu, press SETUP. Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly (Wireless Direct) Using the WPS PIN code If you select “PIN Code” as the connection method, the list of available access points appears on the TV screen. 1 Follow the procedure below to connect a mobile device to the unit directly. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select the desired access point and press ENTER. Note Wireless Direct connection may be insecure since the communication is not strongly encrypted. The unit may operate by playback operation on wireless devices connected to the unit without permission. The PIN code of the unit appears on the TV screen. 2 1 2 Enter the unit’s PIN code into the wireless router (access point). For details on settings, refer to the instruction manual of the wireless router (access point). 3 Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack). Note Press ENTER to start the connection process. Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on the TV screen. 3 4 5 If “Not connected” appears, repeat from step 1 or try another connection method. 4 Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit. To exit from the menu, press SETUP. 6 7 Press SETUP. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network” and press ENTER. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network Connection” and press ENTER. Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Wireless Direct” and press ENTER. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Security” and the cursor keys (e/r) to select the encryption method. Choices None, WPA2-PSK(AES) Note If you select “None”, the connection may be insecure since the communication is not encrypted. 8 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Security Key” and press ENTER. Note If you select “None” in step 7, this item is not available. 45 En 9 Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the security key. Enter either 8 to 63 character string, or 64 hexadecimal digits. When finished entering the key, select “OK” to return to the previous screen. Note Before proceeding to the next step, record the following information. These information will be needed to configure the Wi-Fi setting of a mobile device. ▪ SSID displayed on the TV screen ▪ Security key you have just entered 10 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Save” and press ENTER to save the setting. This completes the settings and “Completed” appears on the TV screen. Next, configure the Wi-Fi settings of a mobile device. 11 Configure the Wi-Fi settings of a mobile device. For details on settings of your mobile device, refer to the instruction manual of the mobile device. 1 2 3 12 Enable the Wi-Fi function on the mobile device. Select the SSID displayed in step 9 from the list of available access points. When you are prompted for a password, enter the security key displayed in step 9. To exit from the menu, press SETUP. 46 En 11 Setting the MusicCast MusicCast is a brand new wireless musical solution from Yamaha, allowing you to share music among all of your rooms with a variety of devices. You can enjoy music from your smartphone, PC, NAS drive and music streaming service anywhere in your house with one easy-to-use application. For more details and a lineup of MusicCast compatible products, refer to the following site: http://www.yamaha.com/musiccast/ 2 Tap the “MusicCast CONTROLLER” application icon on your mobile device and tap “Setup”. Note If you have already connected other MusicCast compatible devices to the network, tap “Settings” and then “Add New Device”. • Seamlessly control all MusicCast compatible devices with the dedicated application “MusicCast CONTROLLER”. 3 • Link a MusicCast compatible device to another device in a different room and play them back simultaneously. • Play back music from music streaming services. (The compatible music streaming services may differ depending on your region and product). Operate the “MusicCast CONTROLLER” application following the on screen instructions, then hold down CONNECT on the front panel of the unit for 5 seconds. Note Access the Yamaha Downloads site (http://download.yamaha.com/) to download MusicCast Setup Guide. MusicCast CONTROLLER CONNECT 4 5 To use the network features on the MusicCast compatible device, you need the dedicated application “MusicCast CONTROLLER” for the operation. Search for the free application “MusicCast CONTROLLER” on the App Store or Google Play and install it to your device. Operate the “MusicCast CONTROLLER” application to playback. Note ▪ AirPlay and DSD audio cannot be delivered. ▪ When the direct playback mode is enabled, input sources other than the network sources and USB cannot be delivered. Adding the unit to the MusicCast network ▪ If you configure the unit's wireless settings with this method, the signal strength indicator of the front display lights up when the unit is connecting to a network (even if a wired connection is used). Follow the procedure below to add the unit to the MusicCast network. You can also configure the unit’s wireless network settings at once. ▪ You can interlock the power of MusicCast devices with the power of the unit (the MusicCast master). For details, see “MusicCast Link Power Interlock” (p.110) in the “Setup” menu. Note The SSID and security key for your network will be needed. 1 Operate the “MusicCast CONTROLLER” application following the onscreen instructions to set up the network. Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit. 47 En PLAYBACK Basic playback procedure Enjoying playback 1 2 3 Refer to the instruction manual for the external device. Turn on the external devices (such as a TV or BD/DVD player) connected to the unit. For details on the following operations, see the corresponding pages. ▪ “Listening to FM/AM radio (Except for U.K., Europe, Australia and Russia models)” (p.56) Use the input selection keys to select an input source. ▪ “Listening to DAB radio (U.K., Europe, Australia and Russia models)” (p.60) SLEEP HDMI 1 2 1 2 3 4 AV 3 AUDIO 1 SLEEP 2 3 BLUETOOTH USB NET FM AM ZONE A ▪ “Listening to FM radio (U.K., Europe, Australia and Russia models)” (p.65) AUX HDMI ZONE B 1 2 3 4 SCENE BD DVD TV PROGRAM NET RADIO VOLUME MUTE AV 1 2 1 2 3 3 BLUETOOTH USB NET FM AM ▪ “Playing back music stored on a Bluetooth® device” (p.69) AUDIO Input selection keys POP-UP/MENU TOP MENU SETUP OPTION ▪ “Playing back music stored on a USB storage device” (p.73) ENTER DISPLAY RETURN RED GREEN YELLOW AUX ▪ “Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.76) BLUE MEMORY HOME TUNING STRAIGHT DIRECT PRESET ENHANCER BASS ZONE A Start playback on the external device or select a radio station. ▪ “Listening to Internet radio” (p.79) ZONE B ▪ “Playing back music with AirPlay” (p.71) 4 Press VOLUME to adjust the volume. SLEEP HDMI 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 BLUETOOTH USB NET 3 4 FM AM AV 3 ZONE A AUDIO ZONE A ZONE B AUX ZONE B SCENE SCENE BD DVD TV PROGRAM NET RADIO BD DVD TV NET RADIO VOLUME MUTE POP-UP/MENU TOP MENU SETUP VOLUME OPTION ENTER PROGRAM RED MUTE VOLUME DISPLAY RETURN GREEN YELLOW BLUE MEMORY HOME TUNING PRESET TOP MENU STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER POP-UP/MENU MUTE BASS SETUP OPTION Note ▪ To mute the audio output, press MUTE. Press MUTE again to unmute. ▪ To adjust the treble/bass settings, use the “Option” menu or TONE CONTROL on the front panel (p.88). 48 En Switching information on the front display 1 Currently input source AV Press INFO repeatedly to select between the various display items. OUT AUX 2 ECO Audio Decoder USB VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL FPL FPR SL SW SR SBL SB SBR SERVER Item name AirPlay About 3 seconds after a display item is selected, its corresponding information appears. STEREO TUNED ZONE SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC LINK MASTER OUT 2 ECO †‡ Dsur Input (input source name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*) AUDIO Bluetooth STEREO TUNED ZONE SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC LINK MASTER Item HDMI Song (song title), Artist (artist name), Album (album name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*) Song (song title), Artist (artist name), Album (album name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*), IP Address, Ethernet MAC, Wi-Fi MAC NET RADIO Song (song title), Album (album name), Station (station name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*), IP Address, Ethernet MAC, Wi-Fi MAC MusicCast Link DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*), IP Address, Ethernet MAC, Wi-Fi MAC VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL FPL FPR SL SW SR SBL SB SBR Information Frequency (frequency), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*) Note Available items vary depending on the selected input source. The displayed item can also be applied separately to each input group which is shown in the table below and divided by ruled lines. TUNER (FM/AM) (U.K. and Europe models only) Radio Data System data is also available when the unit is tuned into a Radio Data System broadcasting station (p.68). TUNER (DAB) See “Displaying the DAB information” (p.63) for details. * The name of the audio decoder currently activated is displayed. If no audio decoder is activated, “Decoder Off” appears. 49 En Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE) The SCENE function allows you to select the assigned input source, sound program, Compressed Music Enhancer on/off, and target zones with just one touch. Registering a scene 1 Selecting a registered scene 1 Perform the following operations to prepare the settings you want to assign to a scene. ▪ Select an input source (p.48) Press SCENE. ▪ Select a sound program (p.51) or straight decode (p.54) The input source and settings registered to the corresponding scene are selected. The unit turns on automatically when it is in standby mode. ▪ Enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer (p.55) ▪ Enable/disable the audio output to Zone A/B (p.83) SLEEP HDMI 1 2 1 2 3 4 2 AV 3 ZONE A AUDIO 2 3 BLUETOOTH USB NET FM 1 AM ZONE A ZONE B AUX ZONE B SCENE SCENE BD DVD TV NET BD DVD RADIO TV NET SCENE RADIO Hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET Complete” appears on the front display. LINK MASTER PROGRAM VOLUME MUTE OUT ECO SETUP OPTION ENTER PROGRAM VOLUME DISPLAY RETURN RED MUTE GREEN YELLOW BLUE MEMORY HOME TUNING PRESET TOP MENU STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER POP-UP/MENU BASS SETUP 2 STEREO TUNED ZONE SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC SET Complete POP-UP/MENU TOP MENU OPTION By default, the following settings are registered for each scene. SCENE Input HDMI1 AUDIO1 NET RADIO TUNER Sound program Sci-Fi STRAIGHT 7ch Stereo 7ch Stereo Compressed Music Enhancer Off On On On SCENE link playback On On Off Off Target zone Zone A Zone A Zone A Zone A Note The SCENE link playback function allows you to automatically turn on the TV or start playback of an external device connected to the unit via HDMI, in conjunction with a scene selection. To enable SCENE link playback, set “SCENE” (p.100) in the “Setup” menu to “On”. 50 En VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL FPL FPR SL SW SR SBL SB SBR Selecting the sound mode I want to enjoy pure high fidelity sounds. The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs and surround decoders that allow you to enjoy playback sources with your favorite sound mode (such as sound field effect or stereo playback). ZONE A • Enable the direct playback mode by pressing DIRECT (p.55). This mode reduces the electrical noise from other circuitry to allow you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound quality. ZONE B SCENE BD DVD TV NET I want to enjoy enhanced bass sounds. RADIO • Enable Extra Bass by pressing BASS (p.55). SLEEP HDMI 1 2 1 2 3 4 PROGRAM AV 3 MUTE VOLUME PROGRAM I want to enjoy listening to compressed music. AUDIO 2 3 BLUETOOTH USB NET FM 1 AM ZONE A AUX • Enable Compressed Music Enhancer by pressing ENHANCER (p.55). ZONE B SCENE BD DVD TV PROGRAM NET RADIO TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU This mode lets you enjoy listening to compressed music from Bluetooth devices, USB devices, etc. as it gives the music additional depth and breadth (p.55). VOLUME MUTE SETUP OPTION POP-UP/MENU TOP MENU SETUP OPTION ENTER RED Note DISPLAY RETURN GREEN YELLOW BLUE MEMORY RED GREEN YELL YELLOW BLUE ▪ The sound mode can be applied separately to each input source. HOME MEMORY TUNING PRESET HOME STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER ▪ You can check which speakers are currently outputting sound by looking at the speaker indicators on the unit’s front panel (p.12). BASS TUNING STRAIGHT DIRECT PRESET ENHANCER BASS Precaution for enjoying Dolby Atmos® STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS ▪ Dolby Atmos contents are decoded as Dolby TrueHD or Dolby Digital Plus in the following situations. (Dolby Atmos PCM format is always decoded as Dolby Atmos.) – Any of CINEMA DSP programs is selected. – Neither surround back nor presence speakers are used. I want to enjoy viewing video sources such as movies, TV programs, or games. – Headphones are used (2-channel playback). ▪ When the Dolby Atmos decoder is working, virtual surround processing (such as Virtual CINEMA FRONT) (p.52) or Compressed Music Enhancer (p.55) does not work. • Select a sound program suitable for each video source by pressing PROGRAM repeatedly (p.52). Precaution for enjoying DTS:X™ I want to enjoy listening to music sources or stereo playback. ▪ DTS:X contents are decoded as DTS-HD format when any of CINEMA DSP programs is selected. • Select a sound program suitable for music or stereo playback by pressing PROGRAM repeatedly (p.53). ▪ When the DTS:X decoder is working, virtual surround processing (such as Virtual CINEMA FRONT) (p.52), Dialogue Level (p.102), Extra Bass (p.96) or Compressed Music Enhancer (p.55) does not work. I want to enjoy multichannel playback from 2-channel sources. ▪ When DTS:X contents are played back, you can adjust the volume of dialogue sounds in “DTS Dialogue Control” (p.102) in the “Setup” menu. • Select a surround decoder in the “Option” menu (p.87). I want to enjoy unprocessed sounds in original channels. • Switch to the straight decode mode by pressing STRAIGHT (p.54). 51 En Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP 3D) The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs that utilize Yamaha's original DSP technology (CINEMA DSP 3D). It allows you to easily create sound fields like actual movie theaters or concert halls in your room and enjoy natural stereoscopic sound fields. Drama This program features stable reverberations that match a wide range of movie genres, from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The reverberations are modest, but suitably stereophonic. The sound effects and background music are reproduced with a gentle echo that does not impinge on the articulation of the dialogue. You’ll never get tired listening for long periods. Mono Movie This program reproduces monaural video sources, such as classic movies, in an atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program creates a pleasant space with depth, by adding breadth and the appropriate reverberation to the original audio. Sports This program allows listeners to enjoy the rich vividness of sport broadcasts and light entertainment programs. In sports broadcasts, the commentators’ voices are positioned clearly at the center, while the atmosphere inside the stadium is realistically conveyed by the peripheral delivery of the sounds of the fans in a suitable space. Action Game This program is suitable for action games, such as car racing and fighting games. The reality of, and emphasis on, various effects makes the player feel like they are right in the middle of the action, allowing for greater concentration. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music Enhancer for a more dynamic and strong sound field. Roleplaying Game This program is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. This program adds depth to the sound field for natural and realistic reproduction of background music, special effects, and dialogue from a wide variety of scenes. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music Enhancer for a clearer and more spatial sound field. Sound program category “CINEMA DSP” lights up LINK MASTER OUT 2 ECO STEREO TUNED ZONE SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC Sci-Fi VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL FPL FPR SL SW SR SBL SB SBR Sound program Note ▪ You can adjust the sound field effect level in “DSP Level (DSP Level)” (p.88) in the “Option” menu. ▪ To use the conventional CINEMA DSP, set “CINEMA DSP 3D Mode” (p.101) in the “Setup” menu to “Off”. n Sound programs suitable for movies (MOVIE) The following sound programs are optimized for viewing video sources, such as movies, TV programs, and games. Standard This program creates a sound field that emphasizes the surround feeling without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multichannel audio, such as Dolby Digital and DTS. Its design is based on the concept of the ideal movie theater, in which the audience is surrounded by beautiful reverberations from the left, right, and rear. Spectacle This program delivers the scale and grandeur of spectacular movie productions. It delivers an expansive sound space to match the cinemascope wide-screen, and boasts a broad dynamic range, providing everything from small delicate sounds to powerful loud booms. Sci-Fi This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the latest Sci-Fi and SFX movies. You can enjoy a variety of cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear separation between dialogue, sound effects, and background music. Adventure This program is ideal for reproducing the sound design of action and adventure movies precisely. The sound field restrains reverberations, but puts emphasis on reproducing a sensation of expansiveness on both sides, powerful space expanded widely to the left and right. The restrained depth creates a clear and powerful space, while also maintaining the articulation of the sounds and the separation of the channels. 52 En n Sound programs suitable for music (MUSIC) n Sound programs suitable for stereo playback (STEREO) The following sound programs are optimized for listening to music sources. You can select stereo playback. Hall in Munich This program simulates a Munich concert hall with approximately 2,500 seats that uses stylish wood for the interior finishing. Fine, beautiful reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the arena. Hall in Vienna This program simulates a 1700-seat, middle-sized concert hall with a shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reverberations from all around the audience, producing a very full, rich sound. Chamber This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling, like an audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable for courtly music and chamber music. Cellar Club This program simulates an intimate concert venue with a low ceiling and homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field delivers powerful sounds that make you feel as if you are sitting in the front row in front of a small stage. The Roxy Theatre This program creates the sound field of a 460-seat rock music concert venue in Los Angeles. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the hall. The Bottom Line This program creates the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a famous New York jazz club once. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound. Music Video This program allows you to enjoy videos of pop, rock, and jazz concerts, as if you were there yourself. Immerse yourself in the hot concert atmosphere thanks to the vividness of the singers and solos on stage, a presence sound field that emphasizes the beat of rhythm instruments, and a surround sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall. 2ch Stereo Use this program to mix down multichannel sources to 2 channels. When multichannel signals are input, they are down mixed to 2 channels and output from the front speakers (this program does not utilize CINEMA DSP). 7ch Stereo Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back multichannel sources, the unit mixes down the source to 2 channels, and then outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger sound field and is ideal for background music at parties. Note CINEMA DSP 3D (p.52) and Virtual CINEMA DSP (p.53) do not work when “2ch Stereo” or “7ch Stereo” is selected. n Enjoying sound field effects without surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP) If you select one of the sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo) when no surround speakers are connected, the unit automatically creates the surround sound field using the front-side speakers. n Enjoying surround sound with 5 speakers placed in front (Virtual CINEMA FRONT) You can enjoy the surround sound even when the surround speakers are placed in front. When “Virtual CINEMA FRONT” (p.97) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, the unit creates the virtual surround speakers in the rear side to allow you to enjoy multichannel surround sound with the 5 speakers placed in the front. n Enjoying surround sound with headphones (SILENT CINEMA) You can enjoy surround or sound field effects, like a multichannel speaker system, with stereo headphones by connecting the headphones to the PHONES jack and selecting a sound program or a surround decoder. 53 En Enjoying unprocessed playback SLEEP HDMI 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 BLUETOOTH USB NET You can play back input sources without any sound field effect processing. FM AM ZONE A 4 3 ZONE A SCENE SCENE n Playing back in original channels (straight decode) TV PROGRAM NET BD DVD RADIO SETUP OPTION PROGRAM RED GREEN YELLOW TUNING PROGRAM PRESET TOP MENU STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER POP-UP/MENU BASS SETUP STRAIGHT VOLUME BLUE MEMORY HOME OPTION “SUR. DECODE” appears STEREO TUNED ZONE SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC LINK MASTER OUT 2 ECO †‡ Dsur VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL FPL FPR SL SW SR SBL SB SBR Note n Playing back 2-channel sources in multichannel (surround decoder) The surround decoder enables unprocessed multichannel playback from 2-channel sources. When a multichannel source is input, it works the same way as the straight decode mode. The previously selected surround decoder is selected. You can change the surround decoder in “Sur.Decode” (p.87) in the “Option” menu. FPL FPR SL SW SR SBL SB SBR Uses the decoder automatically selected by input source. The DTS Neural:X decoder is selected for DTS sources and the Dolby Surround decoder is selected for other sources. bDsur Use the Dolby Surround decoder suitable for all sources. A real acoustic space (including overhead) will be created especially when object-based audio (such as Dolby Atmos content) is played. Neural:X Use the DTS Neural:X decoder suitable for all sources. A real acoustic space (including overhead) will be created especially when object-based audio (such as DTS:X content) is played. Neo:6 Cinema Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder (or DTS-ES Matrix decoder) suitable for movies. Sounds will be output from the surround/ surround back speakers. Neo:6 Music Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder (or DTS-ES Matrix decoder) suitable for music. Sounds will be output from the surround/ surround back speakers. For details on each decoder see “Glossary” (p.127). Press PROGRAM repeatedly to select a surround decoder. VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL Auto If “Virtual CINEMA FRONT” (p.97) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, Virtual CINEMA FRONT (p.53) works when multichannel source is played back. 1 MUTE DISPLAY RETURN STEREO TUNED ZONE SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC 2 RADIO ENTER Each time you press the key, the straight decode mode is enabled or disabled. OUT NET POP-UP/MENU Press STRAIGHT. ECO TV VOLUME MUTE TOP MENU When the straight decode mode is enabled, the unit produces stereo sound from the front speakers for 2-channel sources such as CDs, and produces unprocessed multichannel sounds for multichannel sources. LINK MASTER ZONE B AUX ZONE B BD DVD 1 3 AV AUDIO Note ▪ You can adjust the surround decoder parameters in “DSP Parameter” (p.101) in the “Setup” menu. ▪ When the Dolby Surround decoder is selected, virtual surround processing (such as Virtual CINEMA FRONT) (p.52) or Compressed Music Enhancer (p.55) does not work. ▪ If the Dolby Surround decoder is selected when only one surround back speaker is used, no sound is output from the surround back speaker (except when a Dolby Atmos content is played). ▪ When the Neural:X decoder is selected, Dialogue Level (p.102), Extra Bass (p.96) or Compressed Music Enhancer (p.55) does not work. ▪ The selected surround decoder may not work for some input sources. 54 En Playing back digitally compressed formats (such as MP3, etc.) with enriched sound (Compressed Music Enhancer) Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (direct playback) When the direct playback mode is enabled, the unit plays back the selected source with the least circuitry in order to reduce the electrical noise from other circuitry (such as the front display). It allows you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound quality. 1 Press DIRECT. Compressed Music Enhancer adds depth and breadth to the sound, allowing you to enjoy a dynamic sound close to the original sound before it was compressed. This function can be used along with any other sound modes. Each time you press the key, the direct playback mode is enabled or disabled. STEREO TUNED ZONE SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC LINK MASTER OUT 2 ECO DIRECT 1 VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL FPL FPR SL SW SR SBL SB SBR Press ENHANCER. Each time you press the key, Compressed Music Enhancer is enabled or disabled. Note When the direct playback mode is enabled, the following functions are not available. “ENHANCER” lights up ▪ Selecting sound programs ▪ Adjusting the tone control OUT 2 ECO ▪ Operating the on-screen and “Option” menus Enhancer On ▪ Viewing information on the front display (when not in operation) VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL FPL FPR SL SW SR SBL SB SBR Note Enhancing the bass (Extra Bass) ▪ Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on the following audio sources. – Signals whose sampling frequency is over 48 kHz Extra Bass allows you to enjoy enhanced bass sounds, regardless of the size of the front speakers and the presence or absence of the subwoofer. 1 STEREO TUNED ZONE SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC LINK MASTER – DSD audio ▪ You can also use “Enhancer (Enhancer)” (p.89) in the “Option” menu to enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer. Press BASS. Each time you press the key, Extra Bass is enabled or disabled. Note You can also use “Extra Bass” (p.96) in the “Setup” menu to enable/disable Extra Bass. 55 En Listening to FM/AM radio (Except for U.K., Europe, Australia and Russia models) You can tune into a radio station by specifying its frequency or selecting from registered radio stations. 2 Note Press TUNING repeatedly to set a frequency. Hold down the key for about a second to search stations automatically. If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the direction of the FM/AM antennas. SLEEP HDMI 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 BLUETOOTH USB NET 3 4 FM AM AV 3 AUDIO Selecting a frequency for reception ZONE A AUX YELL YELLOW BLUE MEMORY TV PROGRAM Press FM or AM to select a band. GREEN HOME SCENE 1 RED ZONE B BD DVD NET RADIO VOLUME MUTE POP-UP/MENU TOP MENU SETUP TUNING PRESET OPTION ENTER TUNING “TUNER” is selected as the input source and then the frequency currently selected is displayed. LINK MASTER OUT ECO 2 RED GREEN YELLOW BLUE STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS MEMORY HOME TUNING STEREO TUNED ZONE SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC FM 87.50MHz DISPLAY RETURN STRAIGHT DIRECT PRESET ENHANCER BASS VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL LINK MASTER OUT 2 ECO STEREO TUNED ZONE SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC FM 98.50MHz VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL FPL FPR SL SW SR SBL SB SBR “TUNED” lights up when the unit is receiving an FM/AM radio station signal. “STEREO” lights up when the unit is receiving a stereo FM radio signal. Note ▪ You can switch between “Stereo” (stereo) and “Mono” (monaural) for FM radio reception by selecting “FM Mode” in the “Option” menu. When the signal reception for an FM radio station is unstable, switching to monaural may improve it. ▪ You can watch videos input from external devices while listening to radio by selecting the video input jack in “Video Out (Video Out)” (p.90) in the “Option” menu. 56 En Registering favorite radio stations (presets) 4 You can register up to 40 radio stations as presets. Once you have registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their preset numbers. To start the Auto Preset process, press ENTER. “SEARCH” appears during Auto Preset STEREO TUNED ZONE SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC LINK MASTER OUT n Registering radio stations automatically (Auto Preset) 01:FM 87.50MHz Automatically register FM radio stations with strong signals (up to 40 stations). ▪ To specify the preset number from which to start the registration, press cursor keys (e/r) or PRESET to select a preset number. Press FM to select “TUNER” as the input source. ▪ To cancel the Auto Preset process, press RETURN. When the Auto Preset process finishes, “FINISH” appears and the “Option” menu closes automatically. Press OPTION. LINK MASTER Use the cursor keys to select “Preset” and press ENTER. OUT 2 ECO Preset FPL FPR SL SW SR SBL SB SBR Note To register AM radio stations, follow “Registering a radio station manually” (p.58). LINK MASTER VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL Preset number from which to start the registration Note 1 2 3 2 ECO OUT ECO 2 STEREO TUNED ZONE SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC Auto Preset STEREO TUNED ZONE SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL FPR FPL SL SW SR SBL SB SBR 57 En VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL FPR FPL SL SW SR SBL SB SBR n Registering a radio station manually n Selecting a preset station Select a radio station manually and register it to a preset number. Tune into a registered radio station by selecting its preset number. 1 2 1 2 Follow “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.56) to tune into the desired radio station. Hold down MEMORY for a few seconds. Press FM or AM to select “TUNER” as the input source. Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired radio station. SLEEP HDMI The first time that you do register a station, the selected radio station will be registered to the preset number “01”. Thereafter, each radio station you select will be registered to the next empty (unused) preset number after the most recently registered number. 1 2 3 4 AV 1 2 3 AUDIO 1 2 3 BLUETOOTH USB NET FM AM ZONE A AUX GREEN YELL YELLOW BLUE MEMORY HOME SCENE TV PROGRAM NET RADIO VOLUME MUTE POP-UP/MENU TOP MENU SETUP SLEEP RED ZONE B BD DVD TUNING PRESET PRESET OPTION HDMI 1 2 3 4 ENTER AV 1 2 1 2 3 3 BLUETOOTH USB NET FM AM AUDIO DISPLAY RETURN ZONE A AUX RED GREEN YELL YELLOW GREEN YELLOW BLUE STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS MEMORY HOME TV NET TUNING MEMORY HOME SCENE BD DVD RED BLUE MEMORY ZONE B RADIO STRAIGHT PROGRAM PRESET DIRECT ENHANCER BASS VOLUME MUTE POP-UP/MENU TOP MENU SETUP TUNING PRESET OPTION ENTER RED LINK MASTER DISPLAY RETURN GREEN YELLOW BLUE STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS OUT MEMORY TUNING STRAIGHT DIRECT STEREO TUNED ZONE SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC 01:FM 98.50MHz PRESET ENHANCER 2 ECO HOME BASS VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL FPL FPR SL SW SR SBL SB SBR Note “No Presets” appears when no radio stations are registered. LINK MASTER OUT 2 ECO STEREO TUNED ZONE SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC 01:FM 98.50MHz VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL FPL FPR SL SW SR SBL SB SBR Preset number Note To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning into the desired radio station, press PRESET to select a preset number, and then press MEMORY again. LINK MASTER OUT 2 ECO 02:Empty STEREO TUNED ZONE SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL FPL FPR SL SW SR SBL SB SBR “Empty” (not in use) or the frequency currently registered 58 En n Clearing preset stations Clear radio stations registered to the preset numbers. 1 2 3 Press FM or AM to select “TUNER” as the input source. Press OPTION. Use the cursor keys to select “Preset” and press ENTER. LINK MASTER OUT 2 ECO STEREO TUNED ZONE SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL Preset 4 5 FPR FPL SL SW SR SBL SB SBR Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “CLEAR”. Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a preset station to be cleared and press ENTER. LINK MASTER OUT 2 ECO STEREO TUNED ZONE SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC 01:FM 98.50MHz VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL FPL FPR SL SW SR SBL SB SBR Preset station to be cleared If the preset station is cleared, “Cleared” appears and then the next in-use preset number is displayed. 01:Cleared 6 7 Repeat step 5 until all desired preset stations are cleared. To exit from the menu, press OPTION. 59 En Listening to DAB radio (U.K., Europe, Australia and Russia models) DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) uses digital signals for clearer sound and more stable reception compared to analog signals. The unit can also receive DAB+ (an upgraded version of DAB) that allows for more stations using MPEG-4 HE-AAC v2 audio codec, which has a more efficient transmission method. Preparing the DAB tuning Before tuning into DAB radio stations, follow the procedure below to perform an initial scan. Note 1 ▪ The unit supports Band III (174 to 240 MHz) only. ▪ Be sure to check the DAB coverage in your area in that not all areas are currently being covered. For a list of nationwide DAB statuses and worldwide DAB frequencies, check WorldDMB online at http://www.worlddab.org/. Press DAB to select the DAB band. The following message appears on the front panel if you have not performed an initial scan yet. ▪ For details on the antenna connection, see “Connecting the radio antennas” (p.30). LINK MASTER OUT 2 ECO STEREO TUNED ZONE SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC Press [ENTER] 2 VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL FPL FPR SL SW SR SBL SB SBR Press ENTER to start an initial scan. LINK MASTER OUT 2 ECO STEREO TUNED ZONE SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC >>>------- 30% VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL FPL FPR SL SW SR SBL SB SBR When the initial scan finishes, the unit automatically tunes into the first DAB radio station as stored in station order. LINK MASTER OUT 2 ECO STEREO TUNED ZONE SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC BBC Radio 4 VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL FPL FPR SL SW SR SBL SB SBR Note ▪ If no DAB radio stations are found by an initial scan, the message in Step 1 appears again. Press ENTER to start an initial scan again. ▪ You can check reception strength of each DAB channel label (p.64). ▪ To perform an initial scan again after some DAB radio stations are stored, select “Init Scan” (p.87) in the “Option” menu. If you perform an initial scan again, the DAB radio stations currently registered to the preset numbers will be cleared. 60 En Selecting a DAB radio station for reception Note You can select a DAB radio station from the stations stored by the initial scan. ▪ When the unit is receiving a secondary station, “2” appears next to “DAB”. 1 ▪ “Off Air” appears when the selected DAB radio station is currently not available. Secondary station Press DAB to select the DAB band. LINK MASTER OUT ECO “TUNER” is selected as the input source and then the DAB radio station currently selected is displayed. 2 HDMI 2 2 1 2 3 3 4 BLUETOOTH USB NET FM DAB AV 3 AUDIO ZONE A AUX RED GREEN YELL YELLOW BLUE MEMORY ZONE B HOME SCENE BD DVD TV PROGRAM NET RADIO VOLUME MUTE TUNING POP-UP/MENU TOP MENU SETUP PRESET OPTION ENTER TUNING DISPLAY RETURN RED GREEN YELLOW STRAIGHT BLUE DIRECT ENHANCER BASS MEMORY HOME TUNING STRAIGHT DIRECT PRESET ENHANCER BASS (U.K., Europe, Australia and Russia models) LINK MASTER OUT ECO 2 STEREO TUNED ZONE SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC Daily Service VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL FPL FPR SL SW SR SBL SB SBR ▪ You can watch videos input from external devices while listening to radio by selecting the video input jack in “Video Out (Video Out)” (p.90) in the “Option” menu. SLEEP 1 STEREO TUNED ZONE SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC BBC National Press TUNING repeatedly to select a DAB radio station. 1 2 VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL FPL FPR SL SW SR SBL SB SBR 61 En Registering favorite DAB radio stations (presets) OUT 2 Note You can register up to 40 favorite radio stations each for DAB and FM bands. To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning into the desired radio station, press PRESET to select a preset number, and then press MEMORY again. n Registering a DAB radio station as presets OUT 2 “Empty” (not in use) or “Overwrite?” (in use) Tune into a registered DAB radio station by selecting its preset number. The first time that you do register a station, the selected radio station will be registered to the preset number “01”. Thereafter, each radio station you select will be registered to the next empty (unused) preset number after the most recently registered number. 1 2 SLEEP HDMI 2 2 2 3 3 BLUETOOTH USB NET FM DAB FPL FPR SL SW SR SBL SB SBR n Selecting a preset DAB radio station Hold down MEMORY for a few seconds. 1 VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL 02:Empty Follow “Selecting a DAB radio station for reception” (p.61) to tune into the desired DAB radio station. 1 STEREO TUNED ZONE SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC LINK MASTER ECO Select a DAB radio station and register it to a preset number. 1 FPL FPR SL SW SR SBL SB SBR Preset number Note 2 VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL 01:BBC Radio 4 You can register up to 40 DAB radio stations as presets. Once you have registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their preset numbers. 1 STEREO TUNED ZONE SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC LINK MASTER ECO 4 AV Press DAB to select “TUNER” as the input source. Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired DAB radio station. 3 AUDIO SLEEP HDMI ZONE A AUX RED GREEN YELL YELLOW 2 2 1 2 3 TV NET 4 BLUETOOTH USB NET FM DAB 3 AUX RED RADIO ZONE A PROGRAM 3 AV AUDIO MEMORY HOME SCENE BD DVD 1 1 BLUE MEMORY ZONE B GREEN YELL YELLOW BLUE MEMORY ZONE B VOLUME MUTE HOME SCENE BD DVD POP-UP/MENU TOP MENU SETUP TUNING TV NET RADIO PRESET OPTION PROGRAM VOLUME MUTE ENTER SETUP RED TUNING POP-UP/MENU TOP MENU PRESET PRESET DISPLAY RETURN GREEN YELLOW BLUE STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER OPTION BASS ENTER MEMORY HOME DISPLAY RETURN TUNING PRESET RED GREEN YELLOW STRAIGHT BLUE DIRECT ENHANCER BASS MEMORY STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER HOME BASS TUNING STRAIGHT DIRECT PRESET ENHANCER BASS (U.K., Europe, Australia and Russia models) (U.K., Europe, Australia and Russia models) LINK MASTER OUT 2 ECO PRESET:01 STEREO TUNED ZONE SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL FPL FPR SL SW SR SBL SB SBR Note “No Presets” appears when no DAB radio stations are registered. 62 En n Clearing preset DAB radio stations Displaying the DAB information Clear DAB radio stations registered to the preset numbers. The unit can receive various types of DAB information when it is tuned into a DAB radio station. 1 2 3 Press DAB to select “TUNER” as the input source. 1 2 Press OPTION. Use the cursor keys to select “Preset” and press ENTER. Tune into the desired DAB radio station. Press INFO repeatedly to select between the various display items. STEREO TUNED ZONE SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC LINK MASTER LINK MASTER OUT 2 ECO STEREO TUNED ZONE SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC Preset 4 OUT 2 ECO Program Type VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL FPR FPL SL SW SR SBL SB SBR FPL FPR SL SW SR SBL SB SBR Item name Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a preset station to be cleared and press ENTER. About 3 seconds after a display item is selected, its corresponding information appears. STEREO TUNED ZONE SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC LINK MASTER 01:Clear? OUT 2 ECO Classic Music Preset station to be cleared If the preset station is cleared, “Cleared” appears and then the next in-use preset number is displayed. VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL FPL FPR SL SW SR SBL SB SBR Information 01:Cleared 5 6 VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL Repeat step 4 until all desired preset stations are cleared. To exit from the menu, press OPTION. Service Label Station name DLS (Dynamic Label Segment) Information on the current station Ensemble Label Ensemble name Program Type Station genre Date And Time Current date and time Audio Mode Audio mode (monaural/stereo) and bit rate CH Label/Freq. Channel label and frequency Signal Quality Signal reception quality (0 [none] to 100 [best]) DSP Program Sound mode name Audio Decoder Decoder name Note Some information may not be available depending on the selected DAB radio station. 63 En Checking reception strength of each DAB channel label You can check reception strength of each DAB channel label (0 [none] to 100 [best]). 1 2 3 4 Press DAB to select “TUNER” as the input source. Press OPTION. Use the cursor keys to select “Tune AID” and press ENTER. Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select the desired DAB channel label. STEREO TUNED ZONE SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC LINK MASTER OUT 2 ECO 5A Level: 80 DAB channel label 5 VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL FPL FPR SL SW SR SBL SB SBR Reception strength To exit from the menu, press OPTION. n DAB frequency information The unit supports Band III (174 to 240 MHz) only. Frequency Channel label 232.496 MHz 13B 234.208 MHz 13C Frequency Channel label 235.776 MHz 13D 174.928 MHz 5A 237.488 MHz 13E 176.640 MHz 5B 239.200 MHz 13F 178.352 MHz 5C 180.064 MHz 5D 181.936 MHz 6A 183.648 MHz 6B 185.360 MHz 6C 187.072 MHz 6D 188.928 MHz 7A 190.640 MHz 7B 192.352 MHz 7C 194.064 MHz 7D 195.936 MHz 8A 197.648 MHz 8B 199.360 MHz 8C 201.072 MHz 8D 202.928 MHz 9A 204.640 MHz 9B 206.352 MHz 9C 208.064 MHz 9D 209.936 MHz 10A 211.648 MHz 10B 213.360 MHz 10C 215.072 MHz 10D 216.928 MHz 11A 218.640 MHz 11B 220.352 MHz 11C 222.064 MHz 11D 223.936 MHz 12A 225.648 MHz 12B 227.360 MHz 12C 229.072 MHz 12D 230.784 MHz 13A 64 En Listening to FM radio (U.K., Europe, Australia and Russia models) You can tune into an FM radio station by specifying its frequency or selecting from registered radio stations. Note ▪ You can switch between “Stereo” (stereo) and “Mono” (monaural) for FM radio reception from “FM Mode” (p.87) in the “Option” menu. When the signal reception for an FM radio station is unstable, switching to monaural may improve it. Selecting a frequency for reception 1 ▪ You can watch videos input from external devices while listening to radio by selecting the video input jack in “Video Out (Video Out)” (p.90) in the “Option” menu. Press FM to select the FM band. Registering favorite FM radio stations (presets) “TUNER” is selected as the input source and then the frequency currently selected is displayed. OUT 2 FM 87.50MHz 2 You can register up to 40 FM radio stations as presets. Once you have registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their preset numbers. STEREO TUNED ZONE SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC LINK MASTER ECO VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL Note You can register up to 40 favorite radio stations each for DAB and FM bands. Press TUNING repeatedly to set a frequency. n Registering FM radio stations automatically (Auto Hold down the key for about a second to search stations automatically. Preset) SLEEP HDMI 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 3 4 BLUETOOTH USB NET FM DAB AV Automatically register FM radio stations with strong signals (up to 40 stations). 3 AUDIO ZONE A AUX RED GREEN YELL YELLOW Note HOME SCENE BD DVD BLUE MEMORY ZONE B TV PROGRAM NET RADIO (U.K. and Europe models only) Only Radio Data System broadcasting stations are stored automatically by the Auto Preset function. VOLUME MUTE TUNING POP-UP/MENU TOP MENU SETUP PRESET OPTION ENTER 1 2 3 TUNING DISPLAY RETURN RED GREEN YELLOW STRAIGHT BLUE DIRECT ENHANCER BASS MEMORY HOME TUNING STRAIGHT DIRECT PRESET ENHANCER BASS (U.K., Europe, Australia and Russia models) LINK MASTER OUT ECO 2 STEREO TUNED ZONE SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC FM 98.50MHz Press FM to select “TUNER” as the input source. Press OPTION. Use the cursor keys to select “Preset” and press ENTER. LINK MASTER OUT VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL 2 ECO FPL FPR SL SW SR SBL SB SBR Preset “TUNED” lights up when the unit is receiving an FM radio station signal. “STEREO” lights up when the unit is receiving a stereo FM radio signal. 65 En STEREO TUNED ZONE SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL FPR FPL SL SW SR SBL SB SBR 4 n Registering an FM radio station manually To start the Auto Preset process, press ENTER. Select an FM radio station manually and register it to a preset number. “SEARCH” appears during Auto Preset OUT 1 STEREO TUNED ZONE SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC LINK MASTER 2 ECO 01:FM 87.50MHz VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL FPL FPR SL SW SR SBL SB SBR 2 Preset number from which to start the registration Follow “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.56) to tune into the desired FM radio station. Hold down MEMORY for a few seconds. The first time that you do register an FM radio station, the selected radio station will be registered to the preset number “01”. Thereafter, each radio station you select will be registered to the next empty (unused) preset number after the most recently registered number. Note ▪ To specify the preset number from which to start the registration, press cursor keys (e/r) or PRESET to select a preset number. ▪ To cancel the Auto Preset process, press RETURN. When the Auto Preset process finishes, “FINISH” appears and the “Option” menu closes automatically. LINK MASTER OUT ECO 2 SLEEP HDMI 2 2 1 2 3 BLUETOOTH USB NET 3 4 FM DAB AV 3 AUDIO STEREO TUNED ZONE SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC Auto Preset 1 1 ZONE A AUX RED GREEN YELL YELLOW BLUE MEMORY ZONE B TV MEMORY HOME SCENE BD DVD NET RADIO VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL FPR FPL SL SW SR SBL SB SBR PROGRAM VOLUME MUTE TUNING POP-UP/MENU TOP MENU SETUP PRESET OPTION ENTER DISPLAY RETURN RED GREEN YELLOW STRAIGHT BLUE DIRECT ENHANCER BASS MEMORY HOME TUNING STRAIGHT DIRECT PRESET ENHANCER BASS (U.K., Europe, Australia and Russia models) LINK MASTER OUT 2 ECO STEREO TUNED ZONE SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC 01:FM 98.50MHz VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL FPL FPR SL SW SR SBL SB SBR Preset number Note To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning into the desired radio station, press PRESET to select a preset number, and then press MEMORY again. LINK MASTER OUT 2 ECO 02:Empty STEREO TUNED ZONE SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL FPL FPR SL SW SR SBL SB SBR “Empty” (not in use) or the frequency currently registered 66 En n Selecting a preset FM radio station n Clearing preset FM radio stations Tune into a registered FM radio station by selecting its preset number. Clear FM radio stations registered to the preset numbers. 1 2 1 2 3 Press FM to select “TUNER” as the input source. Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired FM radio station. SLEEP HDMI 1 2 3 4 AV 1 2 3 AUDIO 1 2 3 BLUETOOTH USB NET FM DAB ZONE A AUX RED GREEN YELL YELLOW BLUE Press FM to select “TUNER” as the input source. Press OPTION. Use the cursor keys to select “Preset” and press ENTER. LINK MASTER MEMORY ZONE B OUT TV PROGRAM NET RADIO TUNING POP-UP/MENU SETUP PRESET PRESET OPTION 4 5 ENTER DISPLAY RETURN GREEN YELLOW STRAIGHT BLUE DIRECT ENHANCER BASS MEMORY HOME TUNING STRAIGHT DIRECT PRESET ENHANCER BASS 2 ECO 2 ECO STEREO TUNED ZONE SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC 01:FM 98.50MHz STEREO TUNED ZONE SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC 01:FM 98.50MHz FPR FPL SL SW SR SBL SB SBR Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a preset station to be cleared and press ENTER. OUT OUT VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “CLEAR”. LINK MASTER (U.K., Europe, Australia and Russia models) LINK MASTER STEREO TUNED ZONE SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC Preset VOLUME MUTE TOP MENU RED 2 ECO HOME SCENE BD DVD VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL FPL FPR SL SW SR SBL SB SBR Preset station to be cleared VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL FPL FPR SL SW SR SBL SB SBR If the preset station is cleared, “Cleared” appears and then the next in-use preset number is displayed. Note “No Presets” appears when no FM radio stations are registered. 01:Cleared 6 7 67 En Repeat step 5 until all desired preset stations are cleared. To exit from the menu, press OPTION. Radio Data System tuning (U.K. and Europe models only) Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM stations in many countries. The unit can receive various types of Radio Data System data, such as “Program Service”, “Program Type”, “Radio Text” and “Clock Time”, when it is tuned into a Radio Data System broadcasting station. n Displaying the Radio Data System information 1 Tune into the desired Radio Data System broadcasting station. Note We recommend using “Auto Preset” to tune into the Radio Data System broadcasting stations (p.57). 2 Press INFO repeatedly to select between the various display items. STEREO TUNED ZONE SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC LINK MASTER OUT 2 ECO Program Type VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL FPL FPR SL SW SR SBL SB SBR Item name About 3 seconds after a display item is selected, its corresponding information appears. STEREO TUNED ZONE SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC LINK MASTER OUT 2 ECO CLASSICS VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL FPL FPR SL SW SR SBL SB SBR Information Program Service Program service name Program Type Current program type Radio Text Information on the current program Clock Time Current time DSP Program Sound mode name Audio Decoder Decoder name Frequency Frequency Note “Program Service”, “Program Type”, “Radio Text”, and “Clock Time” are not displayed if the radio station does not provide the Radio Data System service. 68 En Playing back music stored on a Bluetooth® device You can play back music files stored on a Bluetooth device (such as smartphones) on the unit. Also, you can enjoy audio played back on the unit using Bluetooth speakers/ headphones. Playback Bluetooth® device music on the unit Follow the procedure below to establish a Bluetooth connection between a Bluetooth device (such as smartphones) and the unit, and play back music stored the Bluetooth device on the unit. Note The unit The unit does not support video playback via Bluetooth. Bluetooth device (such as smartphones) 1 2 Press BLUETOOTH to select “Bluetooth” as the input source. On the Bluetooth device, select the unit (network name of the unit) from the available device list. A connection between the Bluetooth device and the unit will be made. The unit If the pass key is required, enter the number “0000”. Bluetooth speakers/headphones 3 Note On the Bluetooth device, select a song and start playback. The playback screen (artist name, album name and song title) is displayed on the TV. ▪ To use the BLUETOOTH function, set “Bluetooth” (p.110) in the “Setup” menu to “On”. ▪ You cannot make Bluetooth connections to a Bluetooth device (such as smartphones) and Bluetooth speakers/headphones at the same time. Note ▪ For details on supported Bluetooth devices, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.130). ▪ If the unit detects the Bluetooth device previously connected, the unit automatically connects to the Bluetooth device after Step 1. To establish another Bluetooth connection, first terminate the current Bluetooth connection. ▪ Stand the wireless antenna upright for connecting to a Bluetooth device wirelessly. For details, see “Preparing a wireless antenna” (p.31). ▪ To terminate the Bluetooth connection, perform one of the following operations. – Perform the disconnect operation on the Bluetooth device. – Select an input source other than “Bluetooth” on the unit. – Select “Disconnect” in “Audio Receive” (p.92) in the “Setup” menu. ▪ You can use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the remote control to control playback. 69 En Enjoying audio using Bluetooth® speakers/ headphones Follow the procedure below to establish a Bluetooth connection between Bluetooth speakers/headphones and the unit. 1 Use the input selection keys on the remote control to select an input source. Select an input source other than Bluetooth. 2 3 4 5 Press SETUP. Use the cursor keys to select “Bluetooth” and press ENTER. Use the cursor keys to set “Bluetooth” to “On”, and then set “Transmitter” to “On” in the same way. Use the cursor keys to select “Device Search” to search the Bluetooth devices. The list of Bluetooth devices is displayed. 6 Select the Bluetooth speakers/headphones to be connected with the unit and press ENTER. When the connection process finishes, audio played back on the unit will be reproduced from the Bluetooth speakers/headphones. Note ▪ If the desired Bluetooth device is not displayed on the list, set the Bluetooth device to the pairing mode and then select “Device Search”. ▪ Follow one of the procedures below to terminate the Bluetooth connection. – Perform the disconnect operation on the Bluetooth speakers/headphones. – Press the SETUP key, then use the cursor keys to select "Bluetooth", then "Transmitter", and then "Off". 70 En Playing back music with AirPlay The AirPlay function allows you to play back iTunes or iPhone/iPad/iPod touch music on the unit via network. Playback of iTunes/iPhone music contents Follow the procedure below to play back iTunes/iPhone music contents on the unit. iTunes 1 PC Router Turn on the unit, and start iTunes on the PC or display the playback screen on the iPhone. If the iTunes/iPhone recognizes the unit, the AirPlay icon appears. The unit iOS 10 (example) iOS 9 (example) iTunes (example) (Wired network or wireless network) iPhone/iPad/iPod touch Note If the icon does not appear, check whether the unit and PC/iPhone are connected to the router properly. Note ▪ To use this function, the unit and your PC or iPhone must be connected to the same router (p.31). You can check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Information” (p.108) in the “Setup” menu. 2 ▪ If the iPhone does not recognize the unit, check your network environment (p.31). ▪ For details on supported iPhone devices, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.130). 3 On the iTunes/iPhone, click (tap) the AirPlay icon and select the unit (network name of the unit) as the audio output device. Select a song and start playback. The unit automatically selects “AirPlay” as the input source and starts playback. The playback screen is displayed on the TV. 71 En Note n Playback screen ▪ The playback screen is available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. ▪ You can turn on the unit automatically when starting playback on iTunes or iPhone by setting “Network Standby” (p.109) in the “Setup” menu to “On”. 1 ▪ You can edit the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on iTunes/iPhone in “Network Name” (p.110) in the “Setup” menu. ▪ You can adjust the unit’s volume from the iTunes/iPhone during playback. To disable volume controls from iTunes/iPhone, set “Volume Interlock (Vol.Interlock)” (p.90) in the “Option” menu to “Off”. 2 Notice ▪ When you use iTunes/iPhone controls to adjust volume, the volume may be unexpectedly loud. This could result in damage to the unit or speakers. If the volume suddenly increases during playback, stop playback on the iTunes/iPhone immediately. 1 2 Playback indicator Playback information Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time/song length. Use the following remote control keys to control playback. SLEEP HDMI 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 BLUETOOTH USB NET 3 4 FM AM AV 3 AUDIO ZONE A AUX RED GREEN YELL YELLOW BLUE MEMORY ZONE B HOME SCENE BD DVD TV PROGRAM NET RADIO External device operation keys VOLUME MUTE TUNING POP-UP/MENU TOP MENU SETUP PRESET OPTION ENTER DISPLAY RETURN RED GREEN YELLOW STRAIGHT BLUE DIRECT ENHANCER BASS MEMORY HOME TUNING STRAIGHT DIRECT PRESET ENHANCER BASS External device operation keys a Resumes playback from pause. s Stops playback. d Stops playback temporarily. f g 72 En Function Skips forward/backward. Playing back music stored on a USB storage device You can play back music files stored on a USB storage device on the unit. Playback of USB storage device contents Note For details on playable USB devices, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.130). Follow the procedure below to operate the USB storage device contents and start playback. Connecting a USB storage device You can control the USB memory device with the menu displayed on the TV screen. 1 Note ▪ Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. Connect the USB storage device to the USB jack. ▪ “_” (underscore) will be displayed for characters not supported by the unit. The unit (front) AUX USB AUDIO 5V 1 STRAIGHT Press USB to select “USB” as the input source. The browse screen (p.74) is displayed on the TV. (CONNECT) 1A Note If playback is ongoing on your USB storage device, the playback screen is displayed. 2 Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback screen (p.74) is displayed. Note USB storage device ▪ To return to the previous screen, press RETURN. ▪ To return to the top level while on the browse screen, hold down RETURN. ▪ To switch the screen mode browse/playback/off, press DISPLAY. ▪ Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected. Note ▪ If the USB storage device contains many files, it may take time to load them. In this case, “Loading…” appears in the front display. ▪ Stop playback of the USB storage device before disconnect it from the USB jack. ▪ Connect a USB storage device directly to the USB jack of the unit. Do not use extension cables. ▪ The unit cannot charge USB devices while it is in standby mode. 73 En n Playback screen n Browse screen 1 4 1 2 5 2 3 1 List name 2 Contents list 1 Displays the list of USB storage device contents. Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection. 3 4 Status indicators Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.75) and playback status (such as play/pause). 2 Playback information Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time. Item number/total Status indicators Use the following remote control keys to control playback. Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.75) and playback status (such as play/pause). SLEEP HDMI 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 BLUETOOTH USB NET 3 4 FM AM AV 3 AUDIO 5 Operation menu Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. ZONE A RED YELL YELLOW BLUE MEMORY HOME SCENE TV PROGRAM Function GREEN ZONE B BD DVD NET RADIO External device operation keys VOLUME MUTE TUNING POP-UP/MENU TOP MENU Icon AUX SETUP PRESET OPTION ENTER Moves 10 pages backward. DISPLAY RETURN RED GREEN YELLOW STRAIGHT BLUE DIRECT ENHANCER BASS MEMORY HOME TUNING Moves to the previous page of the list. STRAIGHT DIRECT PRESET ENHANCER BASS Moves to the next page of the list. Moves 10 pages forward. External device operation keys Moves to the playback screen. Note A content selected by the cursor is displayed on the front display. Function a Resumes playback from pause. s Stops playback. d Stops playback temporarily. f g Skips forward/backward. Note A content name of a current playback is displayed on the front display. To switch the displayed item, press INFO (p.49). 74 En n Shuffle/repeat settings You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for playback of USB storage device contents. 1 2 When “USB” is selected as the input source, press OPTION. Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or “Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER. Note ▪ To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. ▪ Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display. 3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting. Item Setting Function Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function. On (On) Plays back songs in the current album (folder) in random order. “x” appears on the TV screen. Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function. One (One) Plays back the current song repeatedly. “c” appears on the TV screen. All (All) Plays back all songs in the current album (folder) repeatedly. “v” appears on the TV screen. Shuffle (Shuffle) Repeat (Repeat) 4 To exit from the menu, press OPTION. 75 En Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) You can play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible NAS on the unit. Note n For a PC or a NAS with other DLNA server software installed ▪ To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the same router (p.31). You can check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Information” (p.108) in the “Setup” menu. Refer to the instruction manual for the device or software and configure the media sharing settings. ▪ The audio may be interrupted while using the wireless network connection. In this case, use the wired network connection. ▪ For details on playable file formats, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.130). Media sharing setup To play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible NAS, first you need to configure the media sharing setting on each music server. n For a PC with Windows Media Player 12 installed 1 2 3 4 5 Start Windows Media Player 12 on your PC. Select “Stream”, then “Turn on media streaming”. Click “Turn on media streaming”. Select “Allowed” from the drop-down list next to the unit’s model name. Click “OK” to exit. Note For details on media sharing settings, refer to Windows Media Player help. 76 En n Browse screen Playback of PC music contents Follow the procedure below to operate the PC music contents and start playback. 1 4 2 5 You can control the PC/NAS with the menu displayed on the TV screen. Note ▪ Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. If not, carry out operations while viewing the front display. ▪ “_” (underscore) will be displayed for characters not supported by the unit. 1 2 3 Press NET repeatedly to select “SERVER” as the input source. The browse screen (p.77) is displayed on the TV. 3 Note 1 If playback of a music file selected from the unit is ongoing on your PC, the playback screen is displayed. 2 Use the cursor keys to select a music server and press ENTER. 3 List name Contents list Displays the list of PC content. Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection. 4 Item number/total Status indicators Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.78) and playback status (such as play/pause). Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. 5 If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback screen (p.78) is displayed. Operation menu Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. Note Icon ▪ To return to the previous screen, press RETURN. Function ▪ To return to the top level while on the browse screen, hold down RETURN. Moves 10 pages backward. ▪ To switch the screen mode browse/playback/off, press DISPLAY. Moves to the previous page of the list. ▪ Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected. Moves to the next page of the list. Moves 10 pages forward. Moves to the playback screen. 77 En n Shuffle/repeat settings n Playback screen You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for the playback of PC music content. 1 1 2 2 When “SERVER” is selected as the input source, press OPTION. Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or “Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER. Note ▪ To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. ▪ Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display. 1 3 Status indicators Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.78) and playback status (such as play/pause). 2 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting. Item Playback information (Shuffle) Use the following remote control keys to control playback. SLEEP HDMI 1 2 2 1 2 3 BLUETOOTH USB NET 3 FM AM Function Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function. On (On) Plays back songs in the current album (folder) in random order. “x” appears on the TV screen. Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function. One (One) Plays back the current song repeatedly. “c” appears on the TV screen. All (All) Plays back all songs in the current album (folder) repeatedly. “v” appears on the TV screen. Shuffle Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time. 1 Setting 4 AV 3 AUDIO ZONE A AUX RED GREEN YELL YELLOW BLUE Repeat MEMORY ZONE B HOME SCENE BD DVD TV PROGRAM NET RADIO TUNING POP-UP/MENU TOP MENU SETUP (Repeat) External device operation keys VOLUME MUTE PRESET OPTION ENTER DISPLAY RETURN RED GREEN YELLOW STRAIGHT BLUE DIRECT ENHANCER 4 BASS MEMORY HOME TUNING STRAIGHT DIRECT PRESET ENHANCER BASS External device operation keys Function a Resumes playback from pause. s Stops playback. d Stops playback temporarily. f g Skips forward/backward. Note You can also use a DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control playback. For details, see “DMC Control” (p.109). 78 En To exit from the menu, press OPTION. Listening to Internet radio You can listen to Internet radio stations from all over the world. n Browse screen Note ▪ Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. If not, carry out operations while viewing the front display. ▪ To use this function, the unit must be connected to the Internet (p.31). You can check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Information” (p.108) in the “Setup” menu. ▪ You may not be able to receive some Internet radio stations. 1 4 2 5 ▪ The unit uses the airable.Radio service. airable is a service of Tune In GmbH. ▪ This service may be discontinued without notice. ▪ Folder names are different depending on the language. 3 Playback of Internet radio 1 2 Follow the procedure below to select an Internet radio station and start playback. Press NET repeatedly to select “NET RADIO” as the input source. The browse screen (p.79) is displayed on the TV. 2 Contents list Displays the list of Internet radio content. Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection. You can control the Internet radio with the menu displayed on the TV screen. 1 List name 3 Item number/total 4 Playback indicator 5 Operation menu Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. Icon If an Internet radio station is selected, playback starts and the playback screen (p.80) is displayed. Function Moves 10 pages backward. Note Moves to the previous page of the list. ▪ To return to the previous screen, press RETURN. Moves to the next page of the list. ▪ To return to the top level while on the browse screen, hold down RETURN. Moves 10 pages forward. ▪ To switch the screen mode browse/playback/off, press DISPLAY. Moves to the playback screen. 79 En n Playback screen Registering favorite Internet radio stations You can register your favorite Internet radio stations to the “Favorites” folder. 1 Note Station You can also register up to 40 favorite USB, Bluetooth and network contents as shortcuts (p.85). 2 n Registering the station with the Option menu Follow the procedure below to register your favorite station to the “Favorites” folder. 1 Playback indicator 2 Playback information 1 2 Displays the station name, album name, song title, and elapsed time. While listening to Internet radio, press OPTION. Use the cursor keys to select “Add to favorites” and press ENTER. Note Note ▪ On the playback screen, the current station is added to the “Favorites” folder. On the browse screen, the station selected in the list is added to the “Favorites” folder. ▪ Use the external device operation key (s) to stop playback. ▪ Radio stations registered to favorites are displayed with “«”. ▪ Some information may not be available depending on the station. ▪ To remove a station that is registered to favorites, select the station and then select “Remove from favorites”. 80 En Playing back more high-quality sounds with bi-amp connections HDMI OUT NETWORK HDMI (HDCP2.2) 1 ARC (BD/DVD) (NET) 4 The unit (rear) FM AUDIO 1 (TV) 3 2 (HDCP2.2) Using the four internal amplifiers for front speakers allows you to have more highquality sounds. ANTENNA (RADIO) SPEAKERS AM 75 Ω For example, you can use 2-way bi-amp speakers with a woofer and tweeter for front speakers. It produces expansive sound in a bi-amp system featuring a woofer and tweeter. By directly driving each speaker individually, it produces powerful sound while maintaining the feeling of a high S/N ratio. OPTICAL AUDI0 2 COAXIAL AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO MONITOR OUT FRONT COAXIAL CENTER SURROUND PRE OUT SUBWOOFER AUDI0 3 1 SINGLE 2 Note When using the four internal amplifiers in bi-amp system, the unit supports only 2- to 5.1-channel speaker system. Connecting front speakers that support bi-amp connections 1 2 3 When using front speakers that support bi-amp connections, connect them to the FRONT terminals and SURROUND BACK/PRESENCE/BI-AMP/ZONE B terminals. 9 To enable the bi-amp function, set “Power Amp Assign” (p.94) in the “Setup” menu to “BI-AMP” after connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet. 4 5 Note ▪ Surround back speakers, presence speakers, bi-amp speakers or Zone B speakers cannot be connected simultaneously. ▪ The FRONT terminals and SURROUND BACK/PRESENCE/BI-AMP/ZONE B terminals output the same signals. Notice ▪ Before making bi-amp connections, remove any brackets or cables that connect a woofer with a tweeter. Refer to the instruction manual of the speakers for details. If you are not making bi-amp connections, make sure that the brackets or cables are connected before connecting the speaker cables. 81 En Playing back music in multiple rooms The Zone A/B function allows you to play back an input source in the room where the unit is installed (Zone A) and in another room (Zone B). Connecting Zone B speakers For example, you can turn on Zone A (turn off Zone B) when you are in the living room, and turn on Zone B (turn off Zone A) when you are in the study room. Also, you can turn on both zones when you want to enjoy the same input source in those rooms simultaneously. Connect the device that will be used in Zone B to the unit. Notice ▪ Remove the unit’s power cable from the AC wall outlet before connecting speakers. ▪ Ensure that the bare wires of the speaker cable do not touch one another or come into contact with the unit’s metal parts. Doing so may damage the unit or the speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit, “Check SP Wires” will appear on the front display when the unit is turned on. Connect the speakers placed in Zone B to the unit with speaker cables. To utilize the SURROUND BACK/PRESENCE/BI-AMP/ZONE B terminals for Zone B speakers, set “Power Amp Assign” (p.94) in the “Setup” menu to “Zone B” after connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet. HDMI OUT NETWORK HDMI (HDCP2.2) (HDCP2.2) 1 ARC (BD/DVD) 3 2 (NET) 4 The unit (rear) Study room (Zone B) FM AUDIO 1 (TV) ANTENNA (RADIO) SPEAKERS AM 75 Ω OPTICAL AUDI0 2 COAXIAL Living room (Zone A) AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO MONITOR OUT FRONT COAXIAL CENTER SURROUND PRE OUT SUBWOOFER AUDI0 3 1 Note SINGLE 2 ▪ Multichannel sources are mixed down to 2 channels and output to the Zone B. ▪ The same input source is applied to both Zone A and Zone B. ▪ By default, the volume for Zone B changes in conjunction with the volume for Zone A. If there is volume difference between Zone A/B, you can correct it in “ZoneB Trim” in the “Option” menu (p.84). Also, you can adjust the volume for Zone B separately (p.84). 1 1 ▪ You can automatically enable/disable the audio output to Zone A/B in conjunction with a scene selection (p.50) 9 2 2 3 4 5 Zone B Zone A Note Surround back speakers, presence speakers, bi-amp speakers or Zone B speakers cannot be connected simultaneously. 82 En Operating the Zone B 3 n Basic playback procedure 1 Use the input selection keys to select an input source. SLEEP HDMI 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 BLUETOOTH USB NET 3 4 FM AM AV 3 AUDIO ZONE A SLEEP AUX HDMI ZONE B 1 Slide the Zone switch to “ZONE B”. 2 3 4 SCENE BD DVD TV PROGRAM NET RADIO VOLUME MUTE AV 1 2 1 2 3 3 BLUETOOTH USB NET FM AM AUDIO SLEEP Input selection keys POP-UP/MENU TOP MENU HDMI 1 2 3 4 SETUP OPTION AV 1 2 1 2 3 3 BLUETOOTH USB NET FM AM ENTER AUDIO ZONE A SLEEP DISPLAY RETURN AUX HDMI RED GREEN YELLOW 1 2 4 3 HOME SCENE BD DVD AUX BLUE MEMORY ZONE B TV PROGRAM NET RADIO TUNING AV 1 2 1 2 3 BLUETOOTH USB NET FM AM VOLUME MUTE 3 STRAIGHT DIRECT PRESET ENHANCER BASS ZONE A ZONE B AUDIO POP-UP/MENU TOP MENU SETUP OPTION ENTER DISPLAY RETURN RED GREEN YELLOW AUX BLUE ZONE A ZONE B 4 5 MEMORY HOME TUNING STRAIGHT 2 DIRECT PRESET ENHANCER ZONE A BASS ZONE B To adjust the volume for Zone B separately, see “Adjusting the volume for Zone B separately” (p.84). Each time you press the key, the ZONE B audio output is on or off. “ZONE B” lights up OUT STEREO TUNED ZONE SLEEP PARTY Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC 2 ECO HDMI1 Press VOLUME to adjust the volume. Note Press z (receiver power). LINK MASTER Start playback on the external device or select a radio station. VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL FPL FPR SL SW SR SBL SB SBR 83 En n Adjusting the volume for Zone B separately n Correcting volume difference between Zone A and Zone B You can separately adjust the volume for Zone B using the remote control when “ZoneB Volume” (p.103) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Async.”. If you are bothered by volume difference between Zone A/B, follow the procedure below to adjust the volume for Zone B. 1 1 2 Press OPTION. Note Slide the Zone switch to “ZONE A” in menu operations. 2 To mute the audio output to Zone B, press MUTE. Use the cursor keys to select “Volume Trim” (Volume Trim) and press ENTER. ▪ To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. ▪ Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “ZoneB Trim” (ZB.Trim) and the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the setting. Setting range -10.0 dB to +10.0 dB (0.5 dB increments) Default 0.0 dB 4 Press VOLUME to adjust the volume for Zone B. Note Note 3 Slide the Zone switch to “ZONE B”. To exit from the menu, press OPTION. Note This setting is not effective when “ZoneB Volume” (p.103) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Async.”. 84 En Useful functions Registering favorite items (shortcut) n Registering an item You can register up to 40 favorite USB, Bluetooth and network contents as shortcuts and access them directly by selecting the shortcut numbers. Select a desired item and register it to a shortcut number. 1 2 Note ▪ You can also use the “Favorites” feature to register Internet radio stations (p.80). ▪ The unit registers Bluetooth or AirPlay as an input source. No individual content can be registered. Play back a song or a radio station to be registered. Hold down MEMORY for 3 seconds. SLEEP HDMI 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 BLUETOOTH USB NET 3 4 FM AM AV 3 AUDIO ZONE A AUX RED GREEN YELL YELLOW BLUE MEMORY ZONE B TV PROGRAM MEMORY HOME SCENE BD DVD NET RADIO VOLUME MUTE POP-UP/MENU TOP MENU SETUP TUNING PRESET OPTION ENTER DISPLAY RETURN RED GREEN YELLOW BLUE STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS MEMORY HOME TUNING STRAIGHT DIRECT PRESET ENHANCER BASS LINK MASTER OUT 2 ECO STEREO TUNED ZONE SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL 01:Empty FPL FPR SL SW SR SBL SB SBR Shortcut number (flashes) Note To change a shortcut number to which the item will be registered, use PRESET to select the shortcut number after step 2. LINK MASTER OUT 2 ECO 02:Empty STEREO TUNED ZONE SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL FPL FPR SL SW SR SBL SB SBR “Empty” (not in use) or item currently registered 3 85 En To confirm the registration, press MEMORY. n Recalling a registered item Note Recall a registered item by selecting the shortcut number. ▪ The registered item cannot be recalled in the following cases. 1 ▪ “No Presets” appears when no items are registered. – A USB storage device which contains the registered item is not connected to this unit. Press BLUETOOTH, NET or USB. – A PC which contains the registered item is turned off or not connected to the network. – The registered network content is temporarily unavailable or out of service. SLEEP HDMI 1 2 1 2 3 – The registered item (file) has been deleted or moved to another location. 4 AV 3 AUDIO SLEEP 1 2 3 BLUETOOTH USB NET FM AM ZONE A – A Bluetooth connection cannot be established. AUX HDMI ▪ When you register music files stored on a USB storage device or a PC, this unit memorizes the relative position of the music files in the folder. If you have added or deleted any music files to or from the folder, this unit may not recall the music file correctly. In such cases, register the items again. ZONE B 1 2 1 2 4 3 SCENE BD DVD TV NET PROGRAM RADIO VOLUME MUTE AV 3 AUDIO POP-UP/MENU TOP MENU SETUP OPTION 1 2 3 BLUETOOTH USB NET FM AM ENTER DISPLAY RETURN RED GREEN YELLOW AUX BLUE MEMORY HOME TUNING STRAIGHT 2 PRESET DIRECT ENHANCER BASS ZONE A ▪ The registered content (songs and Internet radio stations) can be displayed as a list and easily recalled by using MusicCast CONTROLLER (p.47) on your mobile device. BLUETOOTH USB NET ZONE B Press PRESET repeatedly to select a desired item. SLEEP HDMI 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 BLUETOOTH USB NET 3 4 FM AM AV 3 AUDIO ZONE A AUX RED GREEN YELL YELLOW BLUE MEMORY ZONE B HOME SCENE BD DVD TV PROGRAM NET RADIO VOLUME MUTE POP-UP/MENU TOP MENU SETUP TUNING PRESET PRESET OPTION ENTER DISPLAY RETURN RED GREEN YELLOW BLUE STRAIGHT DIRECT ENHANCER BASS MEMORY HOME TUNING STRAIGHT DIRECT PRESET ENHANCER BASS LINK MASTER OUT 2 ECO 01:USB STEREO TUNED ZONE SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL FPL FPR SL SW SR SBL SB SBR 86 En Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) You can configure separate playback settings for different playback sources. This menu is available on the front panel (or on the TV screen), allowing you to easily configure settings during playback. 1 Option menu items Note ▪ Available items vary depending on the selected input source. Press OPTION. LINK MASTER OUT 2 ECO ▪ Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display. ▪ Default settings are underlined. STEREO TUNED ZONE SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC Input Select VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL ▪ Depending on the region of purchase, some menu items for audio streaming services are also available. For details, refer to each manual on the supplied CD-ROM. FPL FPR SL SW SR SBL SB SBR Front display Item Function Input Select (Input Select) Switches the input source. p.88 Tone Control (Tone Control) Adjusts the level of high-frequency range and lowfrequency range individually. p.88 Program (PRG) Select the sound programs and stereo playback. p.52 Sur.Decode (SrDec) Select which surround decoder is used when Sur.Decode is selected as the program. p.54 Adjusts the sound field effect level. p.88 Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is automatically adjusted when the volume is adjusted. p.88 Enhancer (Enhancer) Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer. p.89 Input Trim (In.Trim) Corrects volume differences between input sources. p.89 DSP Level DSP/Surround (DSP Level) (DSP/ Surround) Adaptive DRC (A.DRC) Volume Trim Subwoofer Trim Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume. (Volume Trim) (SW.Trim) TV screen 2 ZoneB Trim (ZB.Trim) To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. 3 4 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting. To exit from the menu, press OPTION. 87 p.89 Corrects volume differences between Zone A/B. p.84 Lipsync (Lipsync) Enables/disables the “Lipsync” setting in the “Setup” menu. p.89 Signal Info. (Signal Info.) Displays information about the video/audio signal. p.89 Audio In (Audio In) Combines the video jack of the selected input source with an audio jack of others. p.90 Video Out (Video Out) Selects a video to be output with the selected audio source. p.90 FM Mode (FM Mode) Switches between “Stereo” and “Mono” for FM radio reception. p.56, p.65 Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. Note Page En Item Function p.57, p.65 Clear radio stations registered to preset numbers. p.59, p.63, p.67 Shuffle (Shuffle) Configures the shuffle setting for the USB storage device (p.75) or media server (p.78). — Repeat (Repeat) Configures the repeat setting for the USB storage device (p.75) or media server (p.78). — Volume Interlock (Vol.Interlock) Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPhone via AirPlay. p.90 Adds your favorite Internet radio station to the “Favorites” folder, or removes it from the “Favorites” folder. p.80 Auto Preset Preset (Preset) Clear Preset Add to favorites (Add to Fav.) Remove from favorites (RemovefromFav.) Init Scan (Init Scan) Tune AID (Tune AID) (U.K., Europe, Australia and Russia models) Performs an initial scan for DAB radio reception. (U.K., Europe, Australia and Russia models) Checks reception strength of each DAB channel. n Tone Control (Tone Control) Page Automatically registers FM radio stations with strong signals as presets. Adjusts the level of high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass) individually. Choices Treble (Treble), Bass (Bass) Setting range -6.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments) Note ▪ When both “Treble” and “Bass” are 0.0 dB, “Bypass” appears. ▪ You can also adjust the tone with the front panel controls. Press TONE CONTROL to select “Treble” or “Bass”, then press PROGRAM to make an adjustment. ▪ If you set an extreme value, sounds may not match those from other channels. p.60 n DSP/Surround (DSP/Surround) p.64 Configures the sound field program and surround settings. DSP Level (DSP Level) n Input Select (Input Select) Adjusts the sound field effect level. Switches the input source. Press ENTER to switch to the selected input source. Setting range -6 dB to 0 dB to +3 dB (1 dB increments) Adaptive DRC (A.DRC) Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is automatically adjusted when the volume level is adjusted. When it is set to “On”, it is useful for listening to playback at a low volume at night. Settings On (On) Automatically adjusts the dynamic range. Off (Off) The dynamic range is not automatically adjusted. If “On” is selected, the dynamic range becomes narrow at a low volume and wide at a high volume. 88 En n Lipsync (Lipsync) Enhancer (Enhancer) Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer (p.55). Enables/disables the adjustment configured in “Lipsync” (p.101) in the “Setup” menu. Note Note This setting is applied separately to each input source. ▪ This setting is applied separately to each input source. ▪ You can also use ENHANCER on the remote control to enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer (p.55). Settings Off (Off) Disables Compressed Music Enhancer. On (On) Enables Compressed Music Enhancer. Settings Off (Off) Disables the “Lipsync” adjustment. On (On) Enables the “Lipsync” adjustment. n Signal Info. (Signal Info.) Default Displays information about the video/audio signal. TUNER, (network sources), AirPlay, SERVER, NET RADIO, Bluetooth, USB: On (On) Choices Format (FORMAT) Others: Off (Off) Audio format of the input signal The number of source channels in the input signal (front/surround/LFE) n Volume Trim (Volume Trim) Channel (CHANNEL) Fine-adjusts volume difference between input sources or subwoofer volume. For example, “3/2/0.1” means 3 front channels, 2 surround channels, and LFE. For example, “7.1.4” denotes “standard 7.1-channel plus 4 for overhead speaker channels”. Input Trim (In.Trim) Sampling (SAMPLING) The number of samples per second of the input digital signal Corrects volume differences between input sources. If you are bothered by volume differences when switching between input sources, use this function to correct it. Note Video In (VIDEO IN) Type and resolution of the input digital signal Video Out (VIDEO OUT) Type and resolution of the output digital signal Note This setting is applied separately to each input source. To switch the information on the front display, press the cursor keys (q/w) repeatedly. Setting range -6.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments) Subwoofer Trim (SW.Trim) Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume. Setting range -6.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments) 89 En n Audio In (Audio In) Combines the video jack of the selected input source with an audio jack of others. For example, use this function in the following cases. • Connecting a playback device that supports HDMI video output, but not HDMI audio output Input sources HDMI 1-4, AV 1-3 Settigns AV 1-3, AUDIO 1-3 Setup procedure See “Changing the combination of video/audio input jacks” (p.28). n Video Out (Video Out) Selects a video to be output with the selected audio source. For example, you can watch the video while listening to the radio. Input sources AUX, AUDIO 1-3, TUNER, (network sources), AirPlay, MusicCast Link, SERVER, NET RADIO, Bluetooth, USB Settings Off(Off) Does not output video. HDMI 1-4, AV 1-3 Outputs video input through the corresponding video input jacks. n Volume Interlock (Vol.Interlock) Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPhone via AirPlay. Settings Off (Off) Disables volume controls from iTunes/iPhone. Limited(Ltd) Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPhone within the limited range (-80 dB to -20 dB and mute). Full (Full) Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPhone in the full range (-80 dB to +16.5 dB and mute). 90 En CONFIGURATIONS Configuring various functions (Setup Menu) You can configure the unit’s various function with the menu displayed on the TV screen. 5 Note ▪ Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. If not, carry out operations while viewing the front display. ▪ If new firmware is available, the message screen appears. For details, see “Updating the unit’s firmware via the network” (p.115). ▪ If new firmware is available, the envelope icon (p) appears in the screen. 1 2 3 Press SETUP. Use the cursor keys to select a menu and press ENTER. Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. Note To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. 4 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting and press ENTER. 91 En To exit from the menu, press SETUP. Setup menu items Menu Item Configuration Speaker HDMI Function Page Power Amp Assign Selects a speaker system. Subwoofer Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected. p.94 p.94 Front Selects the size of the front speakers. p.94 Center Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size. p.95 Surround Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their size. p.95 Surround Back Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their size. p.95 Presence Selects whether or not presence speakers are connected and their size. p.95 p.96 Layout Selects the layouts of the presence speakers. Crossover Sets the lower limit of the low-frequency component that can be output from speakers whose size is set to “Small”. p.96 Subwoofer Phase Sets the phase of the subwoofer. p.96 Extra Bass Enables/disables Extra Bass. p.96 Virtual CINEMA FRONT Selects whether to use the front 5-channel speaker (Virtual CINEMA FRONT) configuration. p.97 p.97 Distance Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position. Level Adjusts the volume of each speaker. p.97 Equalizer Adjusts the tone with an equalizer. p.97 Test Tone Enables/disables the test tone output. p.98 HDMI Control Enables/disables HDMI Control. p.99 Audio Output Enables/disables the audio output from a TV. p.99 Standby Through Selects whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in standby mode. p.99 4K Upscaling Enables/disables the upscaling function. p.99 TV Audio Input Selects an audio input jack of the unit to be used for TV audio input. p.99 Standby Sync Selects whether to use HDMI control to link the standby behavior of the TV and the unit. p.100 ARC Enables/disables ARC. p.100 SCENE Enables/disables SCENE link playback. p.100 92 En Menu Item DSP Parameter Lipsync Sound Dialogue Volume ECO Function Network Bluetooth Page Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D. p.101 Center Spread Selects whether to spread the center channel signals to left and right when 2-channel source is played. p.101 Center Image Adjusts the center localization (broadening effect) of the front sound field. p.101 Select Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output. p.101 Adjustment Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually. p.101 Dialogue Level Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds. p.102 p.102 DTS Dialogue Control Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds for DTS contents. Dialogue Lift Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds. p.102 Scale Switches the scale of the volume display. p.103 Dynamic Range Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS signals) playback. p.103 Max Volume Sets the limit value of the volume. p.103 Initial Volume Sets the initial volume for when this receiver is turned on. p.103 ZoneB Volume Selects whether to adjust the volume for Zone B in conjunction with the volume for Zone A. p.103 Auto Power Standby Set the amount of time for the auto-standby function. p.104 ECO Mode Enables/disables the eco mode (power saving mode). p.104 Input Rename Changes the input source name displayed on the front display. p.105 Input Skip Set which input source is skipped when operating the INPUT knob. p.106 Dimmer Adjusts the brightness of the front display. p.106 Memory Guard Prevents accidental changes to the settings. p.106 p.107 Remote Color Key Set the unit's functions for the RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE key of the remote control. Information Displays the network information on the unit. p.108 Network Connection Selects the network connection method. p.108 IP Address Configures the network parameters (such as IP address). p.108 MAC Address Filter Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices. p.109 DMC Control Selects whether to allow a DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control playback. p.109 Network Standby Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from other network devices. p.109 Network Name Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network devices. p.110 MusicCast Link Power Interlock Selects whether turning on the power of the master device of the MusicCast network (this unit) also turns on the power of other devices of the network. p.110 Network Update Updates the firmware via the network. p.110 Bluetooth Enables/disables the Bluetooth functions. p.110 Audio Receive Audio Send Language Function CINEMA DSP 3D Mode Disconnect Terminates the Bluetooth connection between the Bluetooth device (such as smartphones) and the unit. p.69 Bluetooth Standby Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from Bluetooth devices (Bluetooth standby). p.110 Transmitter Enables/disables the Bluetooth audio transmitter function. p.111 Device Search Searches available Bluetooth devices (speakers/headphones) when the unit is used as a Bluetooth audio transmitter. p.70 Select an on-screen menu language. p.111 93 En Speaker Configures the speaker settings manually. Subwoofer Note Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected. Default settings are underlined. Settings n Configuration Select this option when a subwoofer is connected. Use Configures the output characteristics of the speakers. Note The subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and low-frequency components from other channels. Select this option when no subwoofer is connected. When configuring the speaker size, as a general guideline, select “Large” if the woofer diameter of your speaker is 16 cm (6‑1/4”) or larger, or “Small” if it is smaller than 16 cm (6‑1/4”). None Power Amp Assign The front speakers will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and low-frequency components from other channels. Front Selects a speaker system. Selects the size of the front speakers. In addition to the 5.1- or 7.1-channel speaker system, various speaker configurations are possible using the presence speakers, Zone B speakers or biamp connections. Settings Select this option for small speakers. Small Settings Presence Select this option when you use presence speakers in the 5.1.2 system. Sur.Back Select this option when you use a normal speaker system (not using the presence speakers, Zone B speakers or bi-amp connections). BI-AMP Select this option when you connect front speakers that support biamp connections (p.81). Zone B Select this option when you use Zone B speakers (p.82) in addition to the speaker system in the main zone (Zone A). 5.1ch Select this option when you don't use the SURROUND BACK/ PRESENCE/BI-AMP/ZONE B terminals. The subwoofer will produce front channel low-frequency components (configurable in “Crossover”). Select this option for large speakers. Large The front speakers will produce all of the front channel frequency components. Note “Front” is automatically set to “Large” when “Subwoofer” is set to “None”. 94 En Center Surround Back Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size. Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their sizes. Settings Settings Select this option when one small speaker is connected. Select this option for small speakers. Small Small x1 The subwoofer or front speakers will produce center channel lowfrequency components (configurable in “Crossover”). Select this option for large speakers. Large None Select this option when two small speakers are connected. Small x2 The center speaker will produce all of the center channel frequency components. Select this option when no center speaker is connected. The surround back speakers will produce all of the surround back channel frequency components. Select this option when no surround back speakers are connected. Settings None Select this option for small speakers. The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround channel lowfrequency components (configurable in “Crossover”). The surround speakers and subwoofer (or front speakers) will produce surround back channel audio. Note ▪ “Surround Back” is automatically set to “None” when “Power Amp Assign” is set to other than “Sur.Back”, or when “Surround” is set to “None”. Select this option for large speakers. The surround speakers will produce all of the surround channel frequency components. ▪ “Surround Back” is not available when “Virtual CINEMA FRONT” is set to “On”. Select this option when no surround speakers are connected. None The surround back speaker will produce all of the surround back channel frequency components. Select this option when two large speakers are connected. Large x2 Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their sizes. Large The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel low-frequency components (configurable in “Crossover”). Select this option when one large speaker is connected. Large x1 The front speakers will produce center channel audio. Surround Small The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel low-frequency components (configurable in “Crossover”). Presence The front speakers will produce surround channel audio. Virtual CINEMA DSP works when you select a sound program. Selects whether or not presence speakers are connected and their size. Settings Small Select this option for small speakers. Large Select this option for large speakers. None Select this option when no presence speakers are connected. Note “Presence” is automatically set to “None” when “Power Amp Assign” is set to other than “Presence”. 95 En Layout Subwoofer Phase Selects a presence layout when presence speakers are used. This setting facilitates the optimization of the sound field effect. Sets the phase of the subwoofer. When the bass sound is lacking or unclear, switch the subwoofer phase. Settings Settings Front Height Select this option when presence speakers are installed on the front side wall. Overhead Select this option when presence speakers are installed to the ceiling. Dolby Enabled SP Select this option when using the Dolby Enabled speakers as the presence speakers. Normal Does not reverse the subwoofer phase. Reverse Reverses the subwoofer phase. Extra Bass Enables/disables Extra Bass. When Extra Bass is enabled, you can enjoy enhanced bass sounds, regardless of the size of the front speakers and the presence or absence of the subwoofer. Note ▪ This setting is not available when “Presence” is set to “None”. ▪ To play Dolby Atmos contents using the presence speakers, see “Presence speaker layout” (p.21). Settings Crossover Sets the lower limit of the low-frequency components that can be output from a speaker whose size is set to “Small”. A frequency sound lower than the specified value will be produced from the subwoofer or front speakers. Off Disables Extra Bass. On Enables Extra Bass. Note You can also use BASS on the remote control to enable/disable Extra Bass (p.55). Settings 40 Hz, 60 Hz, 80 Hz, 90 Hz, 100 Hz, 110 Hz, 120 Hz, 160 Hz, 200 Hz Note If the volume and crossover frequency are adjustable on your subwoofer, set the volume to half and crossover frequency to maximum. 96 En n Level Virtual CINEMA FRONT Selects whether to use the front 5-channel speaker (Virtual CINEMA FRONT) configuration. Adjusts the volume of each speaker. Settings Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R, Presence L, Presence R, Subwoofer Off Disables the front 5-channel speaker configuration. On Enables the front 5-channel speaker configuration. Choices Setting range -10.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +10.0 dB (0.5 dB increments) Note n Equalizer ▪ Select “On” only when utilizing the Virtual CINEMA FRONT configuration (p.19). ▪ This setting is not available when “Surround” is set to “None”. Adjusts the tone with an equalizer. n Distance EQ Select Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position so that sounds from the speakers reach the listening position at the same time. First, select the unit of distance from “Meter” or “Feet”. Selects the type of equalizer to be used. Settings Choices PEQ Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R, Presence L, Presence R, Subwoofer GEQ Setting range 0.30 m to 3.00 m to 24.00 m (1.0 ft to 10.0 ft to 80.0 ft), 0.05 m (0.2 ft) increments Off Applies the parametric equalizer values obtained by the YPAO measurement (p.35). Select this option when you want to adjust the equalizer manually. For details, see “Manual equalizer adjustment”. Does not use the equalizer. Note “PEQ” is available only when the YPAO has been performed (p.35). 97 En n Manual equalizer adjustment 1 2 3 Set “EQ Select” to “GEQ”. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Channel” and the cursor keys (e/r) to select the desired speaker channel. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select the desired band (frequency) and the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the gain. Setting range -6.0 dB to +6.0 dB 4 To exit from the menu, press SETUP. n Test Tone Enables/disables the test tone output. Test tone output helps you to adjust the speaker balance or equalizer while confirming its effect. Settings Off Does not output test tones. On Outputs test tones automatically when you adjust the speaker balance or equalizer. 98 En HDMI Configures the HDMI settings. n Standby Through Note Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in standby mode. If this function is set to “On” or “Auto”, you can use the input selection keys (HDMI 1–4) to select an HDMI input even when the unit is in standby mode (the standby indicator on the unit blinks). Default settings are underlined. n HDMI Control Settings Enables/disables HDMI Control (p.132). Settings Off On Off Disables HDMI Control. (When “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”) Does not output videos/audio to the TV. Enables HDMI Control. Auto Configure the settings in “TV Audio Input”, “Standby Sync”, “ARC”, and “SCENE”. Automatically selects whether to output videos/audio depending on the status of the connected device. On Outputs videos/audio to the TV. (The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.) Note n 4K Upscaling To use HDMI control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.132) after connecting HDMI Control-compatible devices. Enables/disables the upscaling function. When it is enabled, 1080p content is displayed at 4K resolution. n Audio Output Settings Enables/disables the audio output from a TV connected to the HDMI OUT jack. Settings Off Disables the audio output from the TV. On Enables the audio output from the TV. Off Disables the upscaling function. On Enables the upscaling function. n TV Audio Input Note Selects an audio input jack of the unit to be used for TV audio input when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”. The unit’s input source automatically switches to TV audio when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner. This setting is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”. Settings AV 1–3, AUDIO 1–3 Default AUDIO1 Note When using ARC to input TV audio to the unit, you cannot use the input jacks selected here for connecting an external device because the input will be used for TV audio input. 99 En n Standby Sync n SCENE Select whether to use HDMI control to link the unit's standby mode to the TV's power when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”. Enables/disable SCENE link playback when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”. When SCENE link playback is enabled, HDMI Control-compatible devices connected to the unit via HDMI automatically works as follows, with a scene selection. Settings Off Does not set the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off. On Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off. Auto • TV: turning on and displaying video from the playback device • Playback device: starting playback Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off only when the unit is receiving TV audio or HDMI signals. Choices (SCENE keys) BD / DVD, TV, NET, RADIO Settings n ARC Enables/disables ARC (p.26) when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”. Settings Off Disables SCENE link playback for the selected SCENE key. On Enables SCENE link playback for the selected SCENE key. Default Off Disables ARC. BD / DVD, TV: On On Enables ARC. NET, RADIO: Off Note You do not need to change this setting normally. In case noises are produced from the speakers connected to the unit because TV audio signals input to the unit via ARC are not supported by the unit, set “ARC” to “Off” and use the TV’s speakers. 100 Note SCENE link playback may not work properly due to the compatibility between devices. We recommend using TV and playback devices from the same manufacturer so that HDMI Control works more effectively. En Sound Configures the audio output settings. n Lipsync Note Adjusts the delay between video and audio output. Default settings are underlined. Note You can enable/disable the Lipsync function by input sources in “Lipsync (Lipsync)” (p.89) in the “Option” menu. n DSP Parameter Configures the surround decoder settings. Select CINEMA DSP 3D Mode Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output. Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D (p.52). If this function is set to “On”, CINEMA DSP 3D functions with the selected sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo). Setting range Manual Settings Select this option when you want to adjust the delay between video and audio output manually. Adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”. Off Disables CINEMA DSP 3D. On Enables CINEMA DSP 3D. Auto Center Spread Adjusts the delay between video and audio output automatically when a TV that supports an automatic lipsync function is connected to the unit via HDMI. If necessary, you can fine-adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”. Selects whether to spread the center channel signals to left and right when 2channel source is played. If you feel the center sound is too strong, set this function to “On”. This setting is effective when “bDsur” is selected. Note “Select” is automatically set to “Manual” depending on the TV connected to the unit. Settings Adjustment Off Disables Center Spread. On Enables Center Spread. Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually when “Select” is set to “Manual”. You can fine-adjust the audio output timing when “Select” is set to “Auto”. Center Image Setting range Adjusts the center localization (broadening effect) of the front sound field. Adjust this higher to strengthen the center localization (less broadening effect) or lower to weaken it (more broadening effect). This setting is effective when “Neo:6 Music” is selected. 0 ms to 500 ms (1 ms increments) Setting range 0.0 to 0.3 to 1.0 101 En n Dialogue Dialogue Lift Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds. Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds. If the dialogue sounds as if it is coming from below the TV screen, you can raise its perceived height by increasing this setting. Dialogue Level Note Adjusts the volume of the center orientation sounds such as dialogue. This setting is available only when one of the following conditions is met. Setting range 0 to 3 (higher to strengthen) ▪ One of the sound programs (except for 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo) is selected when presence speakers are used. Note ▪ Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) (p.8) is working. (You may hear dialogue sounds from the surround speakers depending on the listening position.) This setting is not available when DTS:X content is played back, or when the Dolby Surround or Neural:X decoder is working. Setting range 0 to 5 (The bigger the value the higher the position) DTS Dialogue Control Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds for DTS contents. Ideal position Setting range 0 to 6 (higher to strengthen) Note This setting is available only when DTS:X content which supports the DTS Dialogue Control feature is played back. 102 En n Volume Max Volume Configures the volume settings. Sets the limit value of the volume. Setting range Scale -30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB [50.0 to 95.0 (5.0 increments), 97.0] Switches the scale of the volume display. Settings Initial Volume dB Displays the volume in the “dB” unit. 0-97 Displays the volume in the numeric value (0.5 to 97.0). Sets the initial volume when the receiver is turned on. Settings Dynamic Range Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS signals) playback. Produces audio without adjusting the dynamic range. Standard Optimizes the dynamic range for regular home use. Min/Auto Sets the level to the volume level of the unit when it last entered standby mode. Mute Sets the unit to mute the audio output. -80.0 dB to +16.5 dB (0.5 dB increments) Sets the level to the specified volume level. [0.5 to 97.0 (0.5 increments)] Settings Maximum Off ZoneB Volume Sets the dynamic range for clear sound even at night or at low volumes. When playing back Dolby TrueHD signals, the dynamic range is automatically adjusted based on the input signal information. Selects whether to adjust the volume for Zone B in conjunction with the volume for Zone A. Settings Sync. Adjusts the volume for Zone B in conjunction with the volume for Zone A. Async. Does not adjust the volume for Zone B in conjunction with the volume for Zone A. Adjust the volume for Zone B separately (p.84). Note If “ZoneB Volume” is set to “Async.”, the volume for Zone B is temporarily set to -40 dB. As necessary, adjust the volume using the remote control (p.84). 103 En ECO Configures the power supply settings. Note Default settings are underlined. n Auto Power Standby Set the amount of time for the auto-standby function. Settings Off Does not set the unit to standby mode automatically. 20 minutes Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit and the unit has not detected any input signal for the specified time. 2 hours, 4 hours, 8 hours, 12 hours Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit for the specified time. Default U.K. and Europe models: 20 minutes Other models: Off Note Just before the unit enters standby mode, “AutoPowerStdby” appears and then countdown starts in the front display. n ECO Mode You can reduce the unit’s power consumption by setting the eco mode to “On”. After setting, be sure to press ENTER to restart the unit. When the eco mode is enabled, you can reduce the unit’s power consumption. Settings Off Disables the eco mode. On Enables the eco mode. Note ▪ When “ECO Mode” is set to “On”, the front panel display may become dark. ▪ If you want to play audio at high volume, set “ECO Mode” to “Off”. 104 En Function Configures the functions that make the unit easier to use. Procedure to rename manually Note Default settings are underlined. 1 n Input Rename 2 Changes the input source name displayed on the front display. You can also select a name created by the Auto Rename function. 3 Default HDMI 1-4: Auto Others: Manual (For AUX, AUDIO 3, TUNER, MusicCast Link, SERVER, NET RADIO, Bluetooth, USB only “Manual” can be selected.) ▪ To cancel the entry, select “CANCEL”. ▪ If you select "RESET", the default input name will be inserted into the editing area. 4 5 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an input source to be renamed. Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Auto”. The unit creates a name automatically according to the connected device. 3 4 Use the cursor keys and ENTER key to edit the name, and then select “OK” and press ENTER. Note Procedure to rename automatically 2 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Manual” and press ENTER. The edit screen is displayed. Input sources HDMI 1-4, AV 1-3, AUX, AUDIO 1-3, TUNER, MusicCast Link, SERVER, NET RADIO, Bluetooth, USB 1 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an input source to be renamed. To change another input source, repeat steps 1 to 2. To exit from the menu, press SETUP. Note During selecting “Auto”, the created name is saved even after the device connection is terminated. To reset to the default setting, switch the setting to “Manual” at once and then set it again to “Auto”. 105 En To change another input source name, repeat steps 1 to 4. To exit from the menu, press SETUP. n Input Skip n Dimmer Set which input source is skipped when operating the INPUT knob. Adjusts the brightness of the front display. You can select the desired input source quickly by using this function. Setting range Input sources -4 to 0 (higher to brighten) HDMI 1-4, AV 1-3, AUX, AUDIO 1-3, TUNER, NET, Bluetooth, USB Note Settings The front display may become dark when “ECO Mode” (p.104) is set to “On”. Off Does not skip the selected input source. On Skips the selected input source. n Memory Guard Prevents accidental changes to the settings. Settings Off Does not protect the settings. On Protects the settings until “Off” is selected. Note When “Memory Guard” is set to “On”, the lock icon (o) is displayed on the menu screen. 106 En n Remote Color Key Set the unit's functions for the RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE key of the remote control. Settings Default Assigns the functions of playback devices connected to the unit with an HDMI cable. Assigns the unit's input sources to each key. The assigned input sources can be set separately. Input Input sources HDMI 1-4, AV 1-3, AUX, AUDIO 1-3, TUNER, NET, Bluetooth, USB Default RED: HDMI2, GREEN: HDMI4, YELLOW: AV 2, BLUE: AUX Assigns the functions of sound mode to each key. RED: MOVIE GREEN: MUSIC Program YELLOW: STEREO BLUE: SUR.DECODE For example, if you press the RED key repeatedly, you can select your favorite sound program from the sound programs (MOVIE) (p.52) suitable for the video source. 107 En Network Configures the network settings. n IP Address Note Configures the network parameters (such as IP address). Default settings are underlined. DHCP n Information Select whether to use a DHCP server. Displays the network information on the unit. Status The connection status of the NETWORK jack Connection Connection method SSID The access point to which the unit is connected Security The encryption method for your network MusicCast Network Readiness or not for the MusicCast Network MAC Address (Ethernet) MAC Address (Wi-Fi) Settings IP address Subnet Mask Subnet mask Default Gateway The IP address of the default gateway DNS Server (P) The IP address of the primary DNS server DNS Server (S) The IP address of the secondary DNS server Does not use a DHCP server. Configure the network parameters manually. For details, see “Manual network settings”. On Uses a DHCP server to automatically obtain the unit’s network parameters (such as IP address). n Manual network settings MAC address IP Address Off 1 2 n Network Connection Selects the network connection method. Choices Wired Select this option when you want to connect the unit to a network with a commercially-available network cable. Wireless(Wi-Fi) Select this option when you want to connect the unit to a network via the wireless router (access point). For details on settings, see “Connecting the unit to a wireless network” (p.40). Wireless Direct Select this option when you want to connect a mobile device to the unit directly. For details on settings, see “Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly (Wireless Direct)” (p.45). 3 4 108 En Set “DHCP” to “Off”. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a parameter type. IP Address Specifies an IP address. Subnet Mask Specifies a subnet mask. Default Gateway Specifies the IP address of the default gateway. DNS Server (P) Specifies the IP address of the primary DNS server. DNS Server (S) Specifies the IP address of the secondary DNS server. Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to select a value. To exit from the menu, press SETUP. n MAC Address Filter n DMC Control Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices. Selects whether to allow DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control playback. Note Settings Operation of the AirPlay function (p.71) or the DMC is not limited by this setting. Filter Disable Does not allow DMCs to control playback. Enable Allows DMCs to control playback. Enables/disables the MAC address filter. Note Settings Off Disables the MAC address filter. A Digital Media Controller (DMC) is a device that can control other network devices through the network. When this function is enabled, you can control playback of the unit from DMCs (such as Windows Media Player 12) on the same network. On Enables the MAC address filter. In “MAC Address 1–10”, specify the MAC addresses of the network devices that will be permitted access to the unit. n Network Standby Selects whether the unit can be turned on from other network devices (network standby). MAC Address 1–10 Specifies the MAC addresses (up to 10) of the network devices that will be permitted access to the unit when “Filter” is set to “On”. Settings n Procedure On 1 2 3 Off Disables the network standby function. Enables the network standby function. (The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.) Enables the network standby function. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an MAC address number (1 to 10). Auto (If “Network Connection” is set to “Wired”, the unit is set to the power saving mode when the network cable is disconnected.) Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to select a value. With an advanced energy saving design, this product achieves a low power consumption of not more than two watts when in Network Standby mode. To exit from the menu, press SETUP. 109 En n Network Name Bluetooth Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network devices. Configures the Bluetooth settings. n Bluetooth Procedure 1 2 3 Enables/disables the Bluetooth function (p.69). Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen. Settings Use the cursor keys and ENTER key to edit the name, and then select “OK” to confirm the new name. Off Disables the Bluetooth function. On Enables the Bluetooth function. n Audio Receive To exit from the menu, press SETUP. Configures the Bluetooth settings when the unit is used as the Bluetooth audio receiver. n MusicCast Link Power Interlock Bluetooth Standby Selects whether turning on the power of the master device of the MusicCast network (this unit) also turns on the power of other devices of the network. Off Disables the power interlock from the unit (MusicCast master). Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from Bluetooth devices (Bluetooth standby). If this function is set to “On”, the unit automatically turns on when a connect operation is performed on the Bluetooth device. On Enables the power interlock from the unit (MusicCast master). Settings Settings n Network Update Updates the firmware via the network. Off Disables the Bluetooth standby function. On Enables the Bluetooth standby function. (The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.) Note Perform Update This setting is not available when “Network Standby” (p.109) is set to “Off”. Starts the process to update the unit’s firmware. Firmware Version Displays the version of the firmware installed on the unit. System ID Displays the system ID number. 110 En n Audio Send Language Configures the Bluetooth settings when the unit is used as the Bluetooth audio transmitter. Select an on-screen menu language. Note Transmitter Default settings are underlined. Enables/disables the Bluetooth audio transmitter function. Settings When this function is enabled, you can enjoy audio played back on the unit using Bluetooth speakers/headphones (p.70). English English 日本語 Japanese Settings Français French Deutsch German Español Spanish Русский Russian Italiano Italian 中文 Chinese Off Disables the Bluetooth audio transmitter function. On Enables the Bluetooth audio transmitter function. Note The information on the front display is provided in English only. 111 En Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) Configure the system settings of the unit while viewing the front display. 1 2 ADVANCED SETUP menu items Set the unit to standby mode. Note Default settings are underlined. While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press z (power). Item SP IMP. z (power) PROGRAM 3 4 5 STRAIGHT Press PROGRAM to select an item. Press STRAIGHT to select a setting. Function Page (U.S.A. and Canada models only) Changes the speaker impedance setting. p.112 REMOTE ID Selects the unit’s remote control ID. p.113 TV FORMAT Switches the video signal type of HDMI output. p.113 4K MODE Selects the HDMI 4K signal format. p.113 DTS MODE This setting informs the player about the DTS formats that the unit supports. p.114 INIT Restores the default settings. p.114 UPDATE Updates the firmware. p.114 VERSION Checks the version of firmware currently installed on the unit. p.114 Changing the speaker impedance setting (SP IMP.) Press z (power) to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on again. (U.S.A. and Canada models only) LINK MASTER The new settings take effect. OUT 2 ECO STEREO TUNED ZONE SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC SP IMP.••8¬MIN VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL FPR FPL SL SW SR SBL SB SBR Change the unit’s speaker impedance settings depending on the impedance of the speakers connected. Settings 112 6 Ω MIN Select this option when you connect 6-ohm speakers to the unit. 8 Ω MIN Select this option when you connect 8-ohm or higher speakers to the unit. En Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE ID) STEREO TUNED ZONE SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC LINK MASTER OUT Selecting the HDMI 4K signal format (4K MODE) 2 ECO REMOTE ID••ID1 LINK MASTER OUT 2 ECO VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL Change the unit’s remote control ID so that it matches the remote control’s ID (default: ID1). When using multiple Yamaha AV receivers, you can set each remote control with a unique remote control ID for its corresponding receiver. STEREO TUNED ZONE SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC 4K MODE•MODE 1 FPR FPL SL SW SR SBL SB SBR VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL FPR FPL SL SW SR SBL SB SBR Selects the format of signals input/output at the unit when HDMI 4K compatible TV and playback device are connected to the unit. Settings Settings ID1, ID2 MODE 1 n Changing the remote control ID of the remote control Inputs/outputs 4K signals shown in the table below. Depending on the connected device or HDMI cables, video may not be displayed correctly. In this case, select “MODE 2”. MODE 2 Inputs/outputs 4K signals shown in the table below. 1 Note To select ID1, while holding down the cursor key (e), hold down SCENE (BD/DVD) for more than 3 seconds. To select ID2, while holding down the cursor key (e), hold down SCENE (TV) for more than 3 seconds. When “MODE 1” is selected, use a Premium High Speed HDMI Cable or Premium High Speed Cable with Ethernet. Format MODE 1 Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT) LINK MASTER OUT 2 ECO 8 bit STEREO TUNED ZONE SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC TV FORMAT•NTSC 4K/60, 50 Hz VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL RGB 4:4:4 4 YCbCr 4:4:4 4 MODE 2 10 bit 12 bit 8 bit 10 bit – – – – 12 bit YCbCr 4:2:2 4 Switch the video signal type of HDMI output so that it matches to the format of your TV. YCbCr 4:2:0 4 4 Since the unit automatically selects the video signal type so that it matches to the TV, it is unnecessary to change the setting normally. Change the setting only when images on the TV screen do not appear correctly. RGB 4:4:4 4 4 – YCbCr 4:4:4 4 4 – YCbCr 4:2:2 4 FPR FPL SL SW SR SBL SB SBR 4K/30, 25, 24 Hz Settings NTSC, PAL Default U.S.A. and Canada models: NTSC Other models: PAL 113 En – – 4 DTS Format Notification Setting (DTS MODE) LINK MASTER OUT ECO 2 STEREO TUNED ZONE SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC DTS MODE•MODE1 Updating the firmware (UPDATE) OUT UPDATE•••••USB This mode conforms to the DTS:X standard. Use this setting under normal circumstances. LINK MASTER OUT 2 Do not perform this procedure unless firmware update is necessary. Also, make sure you read the information supplied with updates before updating the firmware. 1 STEREO TUNED ZONE SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC INIT••••CANCEL VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL FPR FPL SL SW SR SBL SB SBR Choices Restores the default settings for the unit. CANCEL Does not perform an initialization. Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “USB” or “NETWORK” and press INFO to start firmware update. Choices Restores the default settings for the unit. ALL FPR FPL SL SW SR SBL SB SBR n Firmware update procedure Use this setting if the player fails to properly output a DTS signal even when it is playing back DTS-HD or DTS:X content. Restoring the default settings (INIT) ECO VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL New firmware that provides additional features or product improvements will be released as needed. Updates can be downloaded from our website. If the unit is connected to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network. For details, refer to the information supplied with updates. Settings MODE 2 2 FPL FPR SW SR SL SBL SB SBR This setting informs the player about the DTS formats that the unit supports. MODE 1 STEREO TUNED ZONE SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC LINK MASTER ECO VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL USB Update the firmware using a USB memory device. NETWORK Update the firmware via the network. Checking the firmware version (VERSION) LINK MASTER OUT 2 ECO STEREO TUNED ZONE SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC VERSION••xx.xx VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL FPR FPL SL SW SR SBL SB SBR Check the version of firmware currently installed on the unit. Note ▪ You can also check the firmware version in “Network Update” (p.110) in the “Setup” menu. ▪ It may take a while until the firmware version is displayed. 114 En Updating the unit’s firmware via the network New firmware that provides additional features or product improvements will be released as needed. If the unit is connected to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network and update it. Updating the unit’s firmware immediately 1 2 Notice ▪ Do not operate the unit or disconnect the power cable or network cable during firmware update. Firmware update takes about 20 minutes or more (depending on your Internet connection speed). ▪ If the Internet connection speed is slow, or the unit is connected to the wireless network, network update may not be possible depending on the condition of the wireless connection. In this case, update the firmware using the USB memory device (p.114). Read the on-screen description and press the cursor key (w). To start the firmware update, press ENTER. The on-screen display turns off. 3 ▪ To perform the following procedure, your TV must be connected to the unit via HDMI. If not, perform the update from the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu (p.114). ▪ For details on update, visit the Yamaha website. If “UPDATE SUCCESS PLEASE POWER OFF!” appears on the front display, press z (power) on the front panel. The firmware update is complete. Note Updating the unit’s firmware at power off ▪ You can also update the firmware using the USB memory device from the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu (p.114). 1 ▪ The firmware update indicator on the front display lights up when a firmware update is available via the network. Read the on-screen description and press the cursor key (w). The next screen appears on the TV. A firmware update is available if the following message is displayed after SETUP is pressed. 2 3 4 Read the on-screen description and press the cursor key (w). To set the firmware to update at power off, press ENTER. Press z (receiver power) to turn off the unit. A screen asking you to confirm the firmware update is displayed. LINK MASTER OUT ECO 2 STEREO TUNED ZONE SLEEP PARTY 2 A 3 B Hi -Res ENHANCER YPAO VOL. A- DRC UPDATE ENTER You can switch the language. 115 En VOL. MUTE VIRTUAL FPR FPL SL SW SR SBL SB SBR 5 To start the firmware update, press ENTER. After the firmware update is complete, the unit will turn off automatically. Note ▪ The firmware update can be started by pressing INFO on the front panel. ▪ The unit turns off automatically without performing the firmware update if two minutes pass after the screen to confirm the firmware update is displayed. ▪ To cancel the firmware update process, press RETURN, and the unit will turn off. ▪ The unit turns off without performing the firmware update if you turn off the unit with AV CONTROLLER or MusicCast CONTROLLER. 116 En APPENDIX Frequently asked questions I want to change the input source name... The frequently asked questions from customers and the answers are shown below. The new speaker system does not provide an ideal sound balance... If you have changed speakers or have a new speaker system, use YPAO to optimize the speaker settings again (p.35). If you want to adjust the speaker settings manually, use “Speaker” in the “Setup” menu (p.94). By default, input source names (such as “HDMI1” and “AV 1”) are displayed on the front display when an input source is selected. If you want to rename them as you like, use “Input Rename” (p.105) in the “Setup” menu. I want to prevent accidental changes to the settings... You can protect the settings configured on the unit (such as speaker settings) by utilizing “Memory Guard” in the “Setup” menu (p.106). We want to set limitations on the volume control... If someone accidentally operates the controls on the main unit or remote control, the volume may suddenly increase. This may also cause injury or damage the unit or speakers. We recommend using “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the maximum volume level for the unit in advance (p.103). The unit’s remote control is simultaneously controlling another Yamaha product as well as the unit... When using multiple Yamaha products, the remote control may work on another Yamaha product or another remote control may work on the unit. If this happens, register different remote control IDs for the devices that you want to control with each remote control (p.113). I want to fix the volume when turning on the unit... By default, the volume level when the unit last entered standby mode is automatically applied. If you want to fix the volume, use “Initial Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the volume to be applied when the receiver is turned on (p.103). I want to enjoy videos/audio played back on the video device even when the unit is in standby mode… The volume varies depending on the input sources... If you have connected a video device to the unit with HDMI, you can output videos/ audio played back on the video device to the TV even when the unit is in standby mode. To use this function, set “Standby Through” (p.99) in the “Setup” menu to “On” or “Auto”. You can also switch the input source using the remote control of the unit when this function is enabled. You can correct volume differences between input sources by utilizing “Input Trim” in the “Option” menu (p.89). HDMI Control does not work at all... To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.132). After connecting HDMI Control-compatible devices (such as BD/DVD players) to the unit, enable HDMI Control on each device and perform the HDMI Control link setup. This setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system. For information on how HDMI Control works between your TV and playback devices, refer to the instruction manuals for each device. The combination of video/audio input jacks does not match an external device... Use “Audio In” in the “Option” menu to change the combination of video/audio input jacks so that it matches the output jack(s) of your external device (p.28). Video and audio are not synchronized... Use “Lipsync” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the delay between video and audio output (p.101). 117 En I want to hear audio from the TV speakers... Use “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu to enable audio output from the TV speakers (p.99). I want to change the on-screen menu language... Use “Language” in the “Setup” menu to select a language from English, Japanese, French, German, Spanish, Russian, Italian and Chinese (p.33). I want to update the firmware... Use “UPDATE” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to update the unit’s firmware (p.114). 118 En Troubleshooting Refer to the table below when the unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instructions below do not help, turn off the unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. First, check the following: 1 2 3 The power cables of the unit, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are connected to AC wall outlets securely. The unit, subwoofer, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are turned on. The connectors of each cable are securely inserted in to jacks on each device. Power, system and remote control Problem Cause Remedy The power does not turn on. The protection circuitry has been activated three times consecutively. If the unit is in this condition, the standby indicator on the unit blinks when you try to turn on the power. As a safety precaution, capability to turn on the power is disabled. Contact your nearest Yamaha dealer or service center to request repair. The power does not turn off. The internal microcomputer has frozen, due to an external electric Hold down z (power) on the front panel for more than 15 seconds to reboot the shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet in the power supply voltage. and plug it again.) The power turns off (standby mode) immediately. The unit was turned on while a speaker cable was shorted. The sleep timer worked. The unit enters standby mode automatically. The unit is not reacting. Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and speakers (p.24). Turn on the unit and start playback again. The auto-standby function activated because the unit was not used To disable the auto-standby function, set “Auto Power Standby” in the “Setup” for the specified time. menu to “Off” (p.104). The speaker impedance setting is incorrect. Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers (p.112). The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short circuit. Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and speakers (p.24). Hold down z (power) on the front panel for more than 15 seconds to reboot the The internal microcomputer is frozen, due to an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet in the power supply voltage. and plug it again.) 119 En Problem The unit cannot be controlled using the remote control. Cannot select the desired input source even if “INPUT” is pressed. The RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE keys of the remote control do not operate. Cause Remedy The unit is out of the operating range. Use the remote control within the operating range (p.6). The batteries are weak. Replace with new batteries. The unit’s remote control sensor is exposed to direct sunlight or strong lighting. Adjust the lighting angle, or reposition the unit. The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not identical. Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.113). The remote control is set to the Zone B operation mode. Set the remote control to the Zone A operation mode (p.84). The function which skips some input sources is set. Set “Input Skip” of the desired input source in the “Setup” menu to “Off” (p.106). The device which is connected to the unit via HDMI does not support the operation of the RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE keys. Use a device which supports the operation of the RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE keys. The settings of the RED/GREEN/YELLOW/BLUE keys of the unit's remote control have been changed. Set the “Remote Color Key” settings in the “Setup” menu to “Default” (p.107). Audio Problem Cause Remedy Another input source is selected. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys. Signals that the unit cannot reproduce are being input. Some digital audio formats cannot be played back on the unit. To check the audio format of the input signal, use “Signal Info.” in the “Option” menu (p.89). Audio output to Zone A (or Zone B) is disabled. Slide the Zone switch to “ZONE A” (or “ZONE B”), and then enable audio output to Zone A (or Zone B). The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable. The maximum volume is set. Use “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the maximum volume (p.103). No sound. The volume cannot be increased. No sound is coming from a specific speaker. A device connected to the output jacks of the unit is not turned on. Turn on all devices connected to the output jacks of the unit. (This may happen due to the nature of AV receivers.) The playback source does not contain a signal for the channel. To check it, use “Signal Info.” in the “Option” menu (p.89). The currently selected sound program/decoder does not use the speaker. To check it, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu (p.98). Audio output of the speaker is disabled. Perform YPAO (p.35) or use “Configuration” in the “Setup” menu to change the speaker settings (p.94). The volume of the speaker is set too low. Perform YPAO (p.35) or use “Level” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the speaker volume (p.97). Audio output to Zone A (or Zone B) is disabled. Slide the Zone switch to “ZONE A” (or “ZONE B”), and then enable audio output to Zone A (or Zone B). The speaker cable connecting the unit and the speaker is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another speaker cable. The speaker is malfunctioning. To check it, replace with another speaker. If the problem persists, the unit may be malfunctioning. 120 En Problem No sound is coming from the surround back speaker. Cause Remedy “Power Amp Assign” is set to “Presence”, “BI-AMP”, “Zone B” or “5.1ch”. When “Power Amp Assign” in the “Setup” menu is set to “Presence”, “BI-AMP”, “Zone B” or “5.1ch”, you cannot use the surround back speakers. To use the surround back speakers, set “Power Amp Assign” to “Sur.Back” (p.94). The playback source does not contain Low Frequency Effect (LFE) To check it, set “Extra Bass” in the “Setup” menu to “On”, in order to output the or low-frequency signals. front channel low-frequency components from the subwoofer (p.96). No sound is coming from the subwoofer. Subwoofer output is disabled. Perform YPAO (p.35) or set “Subwoofer” in the “Setup” menu to “Use” (p.94). The volume of the subwoofer is too low. Adjust the volume on the subwoofer. The subwoofer has been turned off by its auto-standby function. Disable the auto-standby function of the subwoofer or adjust its sensitivity level. The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content No sound from the playback device (connected to Protection). the unit with HDMI). The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack exceeds the limit. No sound from the TV (when HDMI Control is used). Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications. Disconnect some of the HDMI devices. The TV is set to output audio from the TV speakers. Change the audio output setting on your TV so that the TV audio is output from the speakers connected to the unit. A TV that does not support ARC is connected to the unit only with an HDMI cable. Use a digital optical cable to make an audio connection (p.26). (If the TV is connected to the unit with an audio cable) The TV audio input setting does not match the actual connection. (If you are trying to use ARC) Use “TV Audio Input” in the “Setup” menu to select the correct audio input jack (p.99). Set “ARC” in the “Setup” menu to “On” (p.100). Also, enable ARC on the TV. ARC is disabled on the unit or TV. When playing back DSD audio, the unit disables the audio output from a TV. The unit does not support DSD audio output from a TV. Change the audio output setting on the playback device to PCM. Only the front speakers work on multichannel audio. The playback device is set to output 2-channel audio (such as PCM) only. To check it, use “Signal Info.” in the “Option” menu (p.89). If necessary, change the digital audio output setting on the playback device. Noise/hum is heard. The sound is distorted. The unit is too close to another digital or radio frequency device. Move the unit further away from the device. The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable. The volume of the unit is too high. Turn down the volume. If “ECO Mode” in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, set it to “Off” (p.104). A device connected to the unit’s output jacks is not turned on. Turn on all devices connected to the unit’s output jacks. 121 En Video Problem No video. No video from the playback device (connected to the unit with HDMI). No image (contents required the HDCP 2.2 compatible HDMI device) from the playback device connected to the unit with HDMI. The menu of the unit is not displayed on the TV. Cause Remedy Another input source is selected on the unit. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys. Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit. The video signal output from the unit is not supported by the TV. Check the video output setting of the playback device. For information about video signals supported by the TV, refer to the instruction manuals for the TV. The cable connecting the unit and TV (or playback device) is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable. The input video signal (resolution) is not supported by the unit. To check the information about the current video signal (resolution), use “Signal Info.” in the “Option” menu (p.89). For information about video signals supported by the unit, see “HDMI signal compatibility” (p.134). The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection). Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications. The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack is over the limit. Disconnect some of the HDMI devices. The TV (HDMI input jack) does not support HDCP 2.2. (The Warning message can be displayed on the TV screen.) Connect the unit to the TV (HDMI input jack) that supports HDCP 2.2. The TV is not connected to the unit via HDMI. You can display the menu of the unit on the TV only when they are connected with an HDMI cable. If necessary, use an HDMI cable to connect them (p.26 to p.27). Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack). 122 En FM/AM radio (AM radio feature is available except for U.K., Europe, Australia and Russia models) Problem FM radio reception is weak or noisy. Cause Remedy There is multi-path interference. Adjust the FM antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location. Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter. To select monaural FM radio reception “FM Mode” in the “Option” menu to “Mono” (p.56). The noises may be caused by fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats, or other electrical equipment. It is difficult to completely eliminate noise. It may be reduced by using an outdoor AM antenna. Use an outdoor FM antenna. AM radio reception is weak or noisy. Select the station manually (p.56). Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter. Use an outdoor antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element antenna. Radio stations cannot be selected automatically. Adjust the AM antenna orientation. The AM radio signal is weak. Select the station manually (p.56). Use an outdoor AM antenna. AM radio stations cannot be registered as presets. Auto Preset is for registering FM radio stations only. Register AM radio stations manually (p.58). Auto Preset has been used. DAB radio (U.K., Europe, Australia and Russia models) Problem Cause Remedy No DAB radio reception. An initial scan has not been performed. Perform an initial scan to receive DAB radio (p.60). Reception strength of DAB radio is poor. Check reception strength in “Tune AID” in the “Option” menu (p.64), and adjust the antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location. There is no DAB coverage in your area. Check with your dealer or WorldDMB online at “http://www.worlddab.org” for a listing of the DAB coverage in your area. There is multi-path interference. Check reception strength in “Tune AID” in the “Option” menu (p.64), and adjust the antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location. Your area is too far from the DAB station transmitter. Use an outdoor antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element antenna. DAB information is not available or is inaccurate. The selected DAB radio station may be temporarily out of service or may not provide information. Contact the DAB broadcaster. No DAB radio sound. The selected DAB radio station may be temporarily out of service. Try the station later or select another station. No DAB radio reception even after performing an initial scan. DAB radio reception is weak or noisy. 123 En USB and network Problem The unit does not detect the USB device. Cause Remedy The USB device is not connected to the USB jack securely. Turn off the unit, reconnect your USB device, and turn the unit on again. The file system of the USB device is not FAT16 or FAT32. Use a USB device with FAT16 or FAT32 format. Folders and files in the USB device cannot be viewed. The data in the USB device is protected by the encryption. Use a USB device without an encryption function. The network feature does not function. The network parameters (IP address) have not been obtained properly. Enable the DHCP server function on your router and set “DHCP” in the “Setup” menu to “On” on the unit (p.108). If you want to configure the network parameters manually, check that you are using an IP address which is not used by other network devices in your network (p.108). The media sharing setting is not correct. Configure the sharing setting and select the unit as a device to which music contents are shared (p.76). The unit does not detect the PC. Some security software installed on your PC is blocking the access Check the settings of security software installed on your PC. of the unit to your PC. The unit and PC are not in the same network. Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the unit and the PC to the same network. The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit. In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or specify the MAC address of your PC to allow it to access to the unit (p.109). The files are not supported by the unit or the media server. Use the file format supported by both the unit and the media server. For information about the file formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.76). The selected Internet radio station is currently not available. There may be a network problem at the radio station, or the service may have been stopped. Try the station later or select another station. The selected Internet radio station is currently broadcasting silence. Some Internet radio stations broadcast silence at certain of times of the day. Try the station later or select another station. Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of your network devices (such as the router). Check the firewall settings of your network devices. The Internet radio can be played only when it passes through the port designated by each radio station. The port number varies depending on the radio station. The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit. In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or specify the MAC address of your smartphone/tablet to allow it to access to the unit (p.109). The unit and smartphone/tablet are not in the same network. Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the unit and smartphone/tablet to the same network. Firmware update via the network is failed. It may not be possible depending on the condition of the network. Update the firmware via the network again or use a USB memory device (p.114). The mobile device does not recognize the unit when using AirPlay or AV CONTROLLER. The unit and the mobile device are connected to different SSID when using a multiple SSID router. Connect them to the Primary SSID (at the top of the list). The files in the PC cannot be viewed or played back. The Internet radio cannot be played. The application for smartphone/tablet “AV CONTROLLER” does not detect the unit. 124 En Problem The unit cannot connect to the Internet via a wireless router (access point). Wireless network is not found. Cause Remedy The wireless router (access point) is turned off. Turn on the wireless router. The unit and the wireless router (access point) are too far apart. Place the unit and the wireless router (access point) closer to each other. There is an obstacle between the unit and the wireless router (access point). Move the unit and the wireless router (access point) in a location where there are no obstacles between them. Microwave ovens or other wireless devices in your neighborhood might disturb the wireless communication. Turn off these devices. Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of the wireless router (access point). Check the firewall setting of the wireless router (access point). Bluetooth® Problem A Bluetooth connection cannot be established. No sound is produced, or the sound is interrupted during playback. Cause Remedy The Bluetooth function of the unit is disabled. Enable the Bluetooth function (p.110). Another Bluetooth device is already connected to the unit. Terminate the current Bluetooth connection and then establish a new connection (p.69). The unit and the Bluetooth device are too far apart. Move the Bluetooth device closer to the unit. There is a device (such as microwave oven and wireless LAN) that Move the unit away from those devices. outputs signals in the 2.4 GHz frequency band nearby. The Bluetooth device does not support A2DP. Use a Bluetooth device that supports A2DP. The connection information registered on the Bluetooth device is not working for some reason. Delete the connection information on the Bluetooth device, and then establish a connection between the Bluetooth device and the unit again (p.69). The volume of the Bluetooth device is set too low. Turn up the volume of the Bluetooth device. The Bluetooth device is not set to send audio signals to the unit. Switch the audio output of the Bluetooth device to the unit. The Bluetooth connection has been terminated. Establish a Bluetooth connection between the Bluetooth device and the unit again (p.69). The unit and the Bluetooth device are too far apart. Move the Bluetooth device closer to the unit. There is a device (such as microwave oven and wireless LAN) that Move the unit away from those devices. outputs signals in the 2.4 GHz frequency band nearby. 125 En Error indications on the front display Refer to the table below when the error message is indicated on the front display. Message Cause Remedy Access denied Access to the PC is denied. Configure the sharing settings and select the unit as a device to which music contents are shared (p.76). The unit cannot access the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device. Access error There is a problem with the signal path from the network to the unit. Make sure your router and modem are turned on. Check the connection between the unit and your router (or hub) (p.31). Check SP Wires The speaker cables short circuit. Twist the bare wires of the cables firmly and connect to the unit and speakers properly. Internal Error An internal error has occurred. Contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. No content There are no playable files in the selected folder. Select a folder that contains files supported by the unit. No device The unit cannot detect the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device. The network cable is not connected. Connect the network cable properly. The wireless router (access point) is not found. Make sure the wireless router (access point) is turned on. Please wait The unit is preparing for connecting to the network. Wait until the message disappears. If the message stays more than 3 minutes, turn off the unit and turn it on again. RemID Mismatch The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not identical. Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.113). Not connected The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the iPhone for some Check the song data. If it cannot be played on the iPhone itself, the song data or storage area may be reason. defective. Unable to play The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the PC for some reason. Ensure that the files are types that the unit is able to play back. For information about the formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.76). If the unit supports the file format, but still cannot play back any files, the network may be overloaded with heavy traffic. USB Overloaded An overcurrent is flowing through the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device. Version error Firmware update is failed. Update the firmware again. Update failed. Firmware update is failed. Press STRAIGHT and select a firmware updating method, then press INFO to update the firmware again. 126 En Glossary This is a glossary of the technical terms used in this manual. DTS Dialog Control DTS Dialog Control allows you to boost the dialog. This can be useful in noisy environments to help make the dialog more intelligible. People with impaired hearing may also benefit. Note that the content creator may disable the use of this feature in the mix, so that DTS Dialog Control may not always be available. Note that updates to your AVR may add more functionality to DTS Dialog Control or increase the range of the feature. Audio information n Audio decoding format DTS Digital Surround Dolby Atmos DTS Digital Surround is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports 5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs. Introduced first in the cinema, Dolby Atmos brings a revolutionary sense of dimension and immersion to the Home Theater experience. Dolby Atmos is an adaptable and scalable object based format that reproduces audio as independent sounds (or objects) that can be accurately positioned and move dynamically throughout the 3 dimensional listening space during playback. A key ingredient of Dolby Atmos is the introduction of a height plane of sound above the listener. DTS-ES DTS-ES creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with DTS-ES. This decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound. In the DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 format, a surround back sound is recorded in the surround channels, and in the DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 format, a discrete surround back channel is recorded. Dolby Atmos Stream Dolby Atmos content will be delivered to your Dolby Atmos enabled AV receiver via Dolby Digital Plus or Dolby TrueHD on Blu-ray Disc, downloadable files and streaming media. A Dolby Atmos stream contains special metadata that describes the positioning of sounds within the room. This object audio data is decoded by a Dolby Atmos AV receiver and scaled for optimum playback through Home Theater speaker systems of every size and configuration. DTS Express DTS Express is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel audio and allows a higher compression rate than the DTS Digital Surround format developed by DTS, Inc. This technology is developed for audio streaming services on the Internet and secondary audio on BD (Blu-ray Disc). Dolby Digital DTS-HD High Resolution Audio Dolby Digital is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports 5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD disc. Dolby Digital Plus Dolby Digital Plus is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports 7.1-channel audio. Dolby Digital Plus remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support Dolby Digital. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray Disc). Dolby Surround Dolby surround is a next generation surround technology that intelligently up mixes stereo; 5.1 and 7.1 content for playback through your surround speaker system. Dolby surround is compatible with traditional speaker layouts, as well as Dolby Atmos enabled playback systems that employ in-ceiling speakers or products with Dolby speaker technology. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports 7.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This technology is used for audio on most BD (Blu-ray Disc). DTS-HD Master Audio DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio format developed to offer a high-definition home theater experience with the quality of the studio master by DTS, Inc. DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray Disc). DTS Neo: 6 Dolby TrueHD Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. to offer a high-definition home theater experience with the quality of the studio master. Dolby TrueHD can carry up to eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray Disc). DTS 96/24 DTS 96/24 is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. This format remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This technology is used for music DVDs, etc. 127 DTS Neo: 6 enables 6-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are two modes available: “Music mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources. This technology provides discrete full-bandwidth matrix channels of surround sound. DTS:X DTS:X is the next generation object-based, multi-dimensional audio technology from DTS. Unbound from channels, DTS:X conveys the fluid movement of sound to create an incredibly rich, realistic and immersive soundscape - in front of, behind, beside and above the audience - more accurately than ever before. DTS:X offers the ability to automatically adapt the audio to the speaker layout that best fits the space, from a television’s built-in speakers to a home surround theater system to a dozen or more speakers in a commercial cinema. Immerse yourself at www.dts.com/dtsx En DSD (Direct Stream Digital) DSD (Direct Stream Digital) technology stores audio signals on digital storage media, such as SACD (Super Audio CDs). The signals are stored at a high-frequency sampling rate (such as 2.8224 MHz and 5.6448 MHz). The highest frequency response is equal to or higher than 100 kHz, with a dynamic range of 120 dB. This technology offers better audio quality than that used for CDs. n Others Bi-amplification connection (Bi-amp) A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker. When you use the bi-amplification connection, the unit drives the tweeter and woofer in a speaker with the discrete amplifiers. As a consequence, the tweeter and woofer provide clear audio signal without the interference. FLAC LFE (Low Frequency Effects) 0.1 channel FLAC is a file format for lossless audio data compression. FLAC is inferior to lossy compressed audio formats in compression rate but provides higher audio quality. This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals and has a frequency range from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is added to the channels for all bands with Dolby Digital or DTS to enhance low frequency audio effects. This channel is labeled 0.1 because it is limited to only low frequency audio. MP3 One of the compressed digital audio format used by MPEG. With psychoacoustic technologies, this compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of compressing data quantity by about 1/10 maintaining a certain level of audio quality. Lip sync Video output sometimes lags behind audio output due to the complexity of signal processing caused by an increase in video signal capacity. Lip sync is a technique for automatically correcting the timing lag between audio and video output. MPEG-4 AAC An MPEG-4 audio standard. It is used for mobile telephones, portable audio players, and audio streaming services on Internet because it allows a high compression rate of data while maintaining better audio quality than MP3. HDMI and video information Neural:X Neural:X is the latest downmixing/upmixing and spatial remapping technology from DTS. It is built in to DTS:X to provide upmix of Neural:X-encoded and non-encoded (PCM) data. In DTS:X for AVRs and Sound Bars, Neural:X can produce up to 11.x channels. Composite video signal PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) Deep Color PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded, and transmitted. This technology is the basis of all other audio format. This technology is used as a lossless audio format called Linear PCM for audio on a variety of media, including CDs and BD (Blu-ray Disc). Sampling frequency/Quantization bit Sampling frequency and quantization bits indicate the quantity of information when an analog audio signal is digitized. These values are noted as in the following example: “48 kHz/24-bit”. With the composite video signal system, color, brightness, and synchronization data signals are combined and transmitted with a single cable. Deep Color is a technology that HDMI specification supports. Deep Color increases the number of available colors within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space. Conventional color systems process the color using 8 bits. Deep Color processes the color with 10, 12, or 16 bits. This technology allows HDTVs and other displays to increase from millions of colors to billions of colors and eliminate on-screen color banding for smooth tonal transitions and subtle gradations between colors. HDMI • Sampling frequency Sampling frequency (the number of times the signal is sampled per second) is called the sampling rate. When the sampling frequency is higher, the range of frequencies that can be played back are wider. HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the world-wide standard interface for digital audio/ video signal transmission. This interface transmits both digital audio and digital video signals using a single cable without any loss. HDMI complies with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) and provides a secure audio/video interface. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at “http://www.hdmi.org/”. • Quantization bit The number of quantization bits indicate the degree of accuracy when converting the sound level into a numeric value. When the number of quantized bits is higher, the expression of the sound level is more accurate. x.v.Color “x.v.Color” is a technology that the HDMI specification supports. It is a more extensive color space than sRGB and allows the expression of colors that were not hitherto possible. While remaining compatible with the color gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color space, and thus can produce more vivid, natural images. WAV Windows standard audio file format, which defines the method of recording the digital data obtained by converting audio signals. By default, the PCM method (no compression) is used, but you can also use other compression methods. WMA (Windows Media Audio) One of the compressed digital audio formats developed by Microsoft Corporation. With psychoacoustic technologies, this compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of compressing data quantity by about 1/20 maintaining a certain level of audio quality. 128 En Network information YPAO (Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer) The Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) function detects speaker connections, measures the distances from them to your listening position(s), and then automatically optimizes the speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit your room. SSID SSID (Service Set Identifier) is a name that identifies a particular wireless LAN access point. Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) Wi-Fi Virtual Surround Back Speaker allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround back speakers with surround speaker. Even if the surround back speakers are not connected, the unit adds a sense of depth to the rear sound filed of CINEMA DSP. Wi-Fi (Wireless Fidelity) is a technology that allows an electronic device to exchange data or connect to the Internet wirelessly using radio waves. Wi-Fi offers the advantage of eliminating the complexity of making connections with LAN cables by using wireless connection. Only products that complete Wi-Fi Alliance interoperability tests can carry the “Wi-Fi Certified” trademark. WPS WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) is a standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance, which allows easy establishment of a wireless home network. Yamaha technologies CINEMA DSP (Digital Sound Field Processor) Since the surround sound systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best experienced in a theater that has many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions (such as room size, wall material, and number of speakers) can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in the sound that you hear. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, CINEMA DSP, Yamaha’s original DSP technology provides the audiovisual experience of a movie theater in your own home. CINEMA DSP 3D The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA DSP 3D mode achieves the reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so that it creates the accurate and intensive 3D sound fields in a listening room. Compressed Music Enhancer The Compressed Music Enhancer feature compensates for missing harmonics in compression music formats (such as MP3). As a result, this technology provides improved performance for the overall sound system. SILENT CINEMA Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound program, so that accurate representations of all the sound programs can be enjoyed on headphones. Virtual CINEMA DSP Virtual CINEMA DSP allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers with front left and right speakers. Even if the surround speakers are not connected, the unit creates the realistic sound field in a listening room. Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) Virtual Presence Speaker allows the system to virtually reproduce the height of the 3D sound field without front presence speakers. Even if the front presence speakers are not connected, the unit creates the 3D sound field in your room. 129 En File formats Supported devices and file formats The following devices and file formats can be used by the unit. n USB, PC/NAS Supported devices n Bluetooth® devices • Bluetooth devices that support A2DP can be used. • Operation of all Bluetooth devices cannot be guaranteed. File Sampling frequency (kHz) WAV * 32/44.1/48/ 88.2/96/ 176.4/192 quantization bit (bit) 16/24 Bitrate (kbps) - Number of channels 2 Support for gapless playback 4 MP3 32/44.1/48 - 8 to 320 2 - WMA 32/44.1/48 - 8 to 320 2 - MPEG-4 AAC 32/44.1/48 - 8 to 320 2 - FLAC 32/44.1/48/ 88.2/96/ 176.4/192 16/24 - 2 4 ALAC 32/44.1/48/ 88.2/96 16/24 - 2 4 • Operation of all USB devices cannot be guaranteed. AIFF 32/44.1/48/ 88.2/96/ 176.4/192 16/24 - 2 4 n AirPlay DSD 2.8 MHz/ 5.6 MHz 1 - 2 - AirPlay works with iPhone, iPad, and iPod touch with iOS 4.3.3 or later, Mac with OS X Mountain Lion or later, and PC with iTunes 10.2.2 or later. * Linear PCM format only n USB devices • This unit supports USB mass storage class devices (e.g., flash memories or portable audio players) using FAT16 or FAT32 format. • Do not connect devices other than USB mass storage class devices (such as USB chargers or USB hubs), PCs, card readers, an external HDD, etc. • USB devices with encryption cannot be used. Made for. iPhone 7 Plus, iPhone 7, iPhone SE, iPhone 6s Plus, iPhone 6s, iPhone 6 Plus, iPhone 6, iPhone 5s, iPhone 5c, iPhone 5, iPhone 4s • To play back FLAC files stored on your PC/NAS, you need to install server software that supports sharing of FLAC files via DLNA on your PC or use a NAS that supports FLAC files. • Digital Rights Management (DRM) contents cannot be played back. iPad Pro (9.7" and 12.9"), iPad mini 4, iPad Air 2, iPad mini 3, iPad Air, iPad mini 2, iPad mini, iPad (3rd and 4th generation), iPad 2 iPod touch (5th and 6th generation) (as of February 2017) 130 En Video signal flow Video signals input from a video device to the unit are output to a TV as shown below. Video device The unit TV HDMI connection HDMI in HDMI HDMI out HDMI HDMI HDMI Composite video connection VIDEO in VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO out VIDEO VIDEO 131 En Information on HDMI (Example) The additional information on HDMI is as follows. HDMI Control HDMI Control HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV that supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit (such as power and volume) with TV remote control operations. You can also control playback devices (such as HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players) connected to the unit with an HDMI cable. Playback starts Turns on and displays video from the playback device Press SCENE (BD/DVD) To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the following HDMI Control link setup after connecting the TV and playback devices. n Operations available from the TV’s remote control For details on settings and operating your TV, refer to the instruction manual for the TV. • Standby synchronization Note • Volume control including mute This setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system. • Switching to input audio from the TV when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner 1 2 • Switching to input video/audio from the selected playback device • Switching between audio output devices (the unit or TV speaker) (Example) HDMI Control HDMI Control HDMI Control Turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices. Configure the settings of the unit. 1 2 Switch the TV input to display video from the unit. Press SETUP. SLEEP HDMI 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 3 4 BLUETOOTH USB NET FM AM AV 3 AUDIO Playback device also turns off The unit turns off (standby) ZONE A AUX ZONE B POP-UP/MENU TOP MENU SETUP SCENE BD DVD TV NET RADIO SETUPP Turn off the TV PROGRAM OPTION O VOLUME MUTE POP-UP/MENU TOP MENU SETUP OPTION Cursor keys ENTER ENTER n Operations available from the unit’s remote control RED ENTER DISPLAY RETURN GREEN YELLOW BLUE MEMORY HOME DISPLAY RETURN TUNING • Starting playback on the playback device and turning on the TV with a scene selection (p.50) STRAIGHT DIRECT PRESET ENHANCER BASS RED GREEN YELL YELLOW BLUE MEMORY • Switching the TV input to display the “Setup” menu (when SETUP is pressed) • Controlling the playback device (playback and menu operations) 132 En 3 8 Use the cursor keys to select “HDMI” and press ENTER. Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning off the TV or adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control. Note ▪ If HDMI Control does not work properly, the problem may be solved by turning the playback device off and on again, or by unplugging the power plug and plugging it in again. Also, HDMI Control may not work properly if the number of connected devices exceeds the limit. In this case, disable HDMI Control on devices not in use. ▪ If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on the TV. ▪ If you reconnect the HDMI cable, perform the procedure 5-8 again. ▪ We recommend using TV and playback devices from the same manufacturer so that HDMI Control works more effectively. 4 5 6 3 4 5 6 7 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “HDMI Control” and the cursor keys (e/r) to select “On” as shown below. If you made a digital optical cable connection between the TV and the unit, use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “TV Audio Input” and the cursor keys (e/r) to select “AUDIO1”. Press SETUP. Enable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (such as HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players). Turn off the main power of the TV and then turn off the unit and playback devices. Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit. Check the followings. On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected. If not, select the input source manually. On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed. 133 En Audio Return Channel (ARC) HDMI signal compatibility ARC allows you to input TV audio to the unit with the HDMI cable which transmits video signal to the TV. • When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video/audio signals may not be output, depending on the type of the DVD player. Check the following after the HDMI Control settings. • The unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI devices. For details, refer to the instruction manual for each device. 1 2 Select a TV program with the TV remote control. Check that the input source of the unit will be automatically switched to “AUDIO1” and the TV audio will be played back on the unit. • To decode audio bitstream signals on the unit, set the input source device appropriately so that the device outputs the bitstream audio signals directly (does not decode the bitstream signals on the playback device). For details, refer to the instruction manual for the playback device. If you cannot hear the TV audio, check the following: ▪ “ARC” (p.100) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”. ▪ The HDMI cable is connected to the ARC-compatible HDMI jack (HDMI jack marked “ARC”) on the TV. Some HDMI jack on the TV is not compatible with ARC. For details, refer to the instruction manual for the TV. Note ▪ If the audio is interrupted while using ARC, set “ARC” (p.100) in the “Setup” menu to “Off” and use a digital optical cable to input TV audio to the unit (p.26). ▪ When using ARC, connect a TV with an HDMI cable that supports ARC. ▪ “AUDIO1” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the AUDIO 1 jacks, use “TV Audio Input” (p.99) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input assignment. To use the SCENE function (p.50), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE (TV). 134 En Trademarks The trademarks used in this manual are as follows. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Dolby Atmos, Dolby Surround, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. DLNA™ and DLNA CERTIFIED™ are trademarks or registered trademarks of Digital Living Network Alliance. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited. Windows™ Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries. For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under license from DTS, Inc. DTS, the Symbol, DTS in combination with the Symbol, DTS:X, and the DTS:X logo are registered trademarks or trademarks of DTS, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Internet Explorer, Windows Media Audio and Windows Media Player are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Android™ Google Play™ Android and Google Play are trademarks of Google Inc. Supports iOS 7 or later for setup using Wireless Accessory Configuration. “Made for iPod,” “Made for iPhone,” and “Made for iPad” mean that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod, iPhone, or iPad, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards. App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc. The Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ Identifier Mark is a certification mark of Wi-Fi Alliance®. This Font Software is licensed under the SIL Open Font License, Version1.1. This license is available with a FAQ at: http://scripts.sil.org/OFL Explanations regarding GPL ® The Bluetooth word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Yamaha Corporation is under license. Bluetooth protocol stack (Blue SDK) All rights reserved. All unpublished rights reserved. The terms HDMI, the HDMI Logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries. “x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation. Google Noto Fonts This product uses the following fonts. Copyright © June 2015, Google (https://www.google.com/get/noto/help/cjk/), with Reserved Font Name Noto Sans CJK Version 1.004. Copyright 1999-2014 OpenSynergy GmbH x.v.Color™ Yamaha Eco-Label is a mark that certifies products of high environmental performance. The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED™ Logo is a certification mark of Wi-Fi Alliance®. Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod, iPhone, or iPad may affect wireless performance. iPad Air and iPad mini are trademarks of Apple Inc. MusicCast is a trademark or registered trademark of Yamaha Corporation. Copyright © June 2015, Google (https://www.google.com/get/noto/#sans-lgc), with Reserved Font Name Noto Sans Version 1.004. Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards. iTunes, AirPlay, iPad, iPhone, iPod, and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. “SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation. (For U.K., Europe, Australia and Russia models) The unit supports DAB/DAB+ tuning. 135 En This product utilizes GPL/LGPL open-source software in some sections. You have the right to obtain, duplicate, modify, and redistribute this open-source code only. For information on GPL/ LGPL open source software, how to obtain it, and the GPL/LGPL license, refer to the Yamaha Corporation website (http://download.yamaha.com/sourcecodes/musiccast/). Specifications The specifications of this unit are as follows. HDMI Input jacks HDMI Features: • 4K UltraHD Video (include 4K/60, 50Hz 10/12bit), 3D Video, ARC (Audio Return Channel), HDMI Control (CEC), Auto Lip Sync, Deep Color, “x.v.Color”, HD audio playback, Selectable HDMI input in HDMI standby mode, 21:9 Aspect Ratio, BT.2020 Colorimetry, HDR Compatible Analog Audio • Audio x 4 Video Format (Repeater Mode) • VGA • 480i/60 Hz • 576i/50 Hz • 480p/60 Hz • 576p/50 Hz • 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz • 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz • 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz • 4K/60Hz, 50Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz Digital Audio (Supported frequencies: 32 kHz to 96 kHz) • Optical x 1 • Coaxial x 2 Video • Composite x 3 HDMI Input • HDMI x 4 Other jacks • USB x 1 (USB2.0) • NETWORK (Wired) x 1 (100Base-TX/10Base-T) • NETWORK (Wireless) x 1 (IEEE802.11b/g/n) Audio Format • Dolby Atmos • Dolby TrueHD • Dolby Digital Plus • Dolby Digital • DTS:X • DTS-HD Master Audio • DTS-HD High Resolution Audio • DTS Express • DTS • DSD 2-ch to 6-ch • PCM 2-ch to 8-ch (Max. 192 kHz/24-bit) Output jacks Analog Audio • Speaker Out x 7 (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R, SURROUND BACK L/R*) * Note: assignment is possible. [SURROUND BACK, PRESENCE, BI-AMP (FRONT L/R), ZONE B] • Subwoofer Out x 2 (mono x 2) • Headphone x 1 Video • Composite x 1 Content Protection: HDCP 2.2 compatible Link Function: CEC supported HDMI Output • HDMI OUT x 1 Other jacks YPAO MIC x 1 136 En TUNER Network Analog Tuner • [Except for U.K., Europe, Australia and Russia models] FM/AM x 1 (TUNER) • [U.K. and Europe models] DAB/FM with Radio Data System x 1 (TUNER) • [Australia and Russia models] DAB/FM x 1 (TUNER) PC Client Function Compatible with DLNA ver. 1.5 AirPlay supported Internet Radio Wi-Fi function • Capable of WPS by PIN Method and Push-Button-Method • Capable of sharing with iOS devices by wireless connection • Capable of Direct Connection with Mobile Device • Available Security Method: WEP, WPA2-PSK (AES), Mixed Mode • Wireless LAN Standards: IEEE 802.11 b/g/n • Radio Frequency (Operational Frequency): 2412 MHz to 2472 MHz • Maximum Output Power (E.I.R.P): 17.42 dBm (55.2 mW) USB Capable of Mass Storage Class USB Memory Current Supply Capacity: 1.0 A Bluetooth Sink Function • Source Device to AVR (ex. Smartphone/Tablet) • Supported profile – A2DP, AVRCP • Supported codec – SBC, AAC Compatible Decoding Formats Decoding Format • Dolby Atmos • Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus • Dolby Digital • DTS:X • DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, DTS Express • DTS, DTS 96/24, DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 Source Function • AVR to Sink Device (ex. Bluetooth Headphone) • Supported profile – A2DP, AVRCP • Supported codec – SBC Post Decoding Format • Dolby Surround • DTS Neo: 6 Music, DTS Neo: 6 Cinema • Neural:X Capable of Play/Stop Operation from Sink Device Audio Section Bluetooth version • Ver. 2.1+EDR Rated Output Power (2-channel driven) Wireless output • Bluetooth Class 2 • [U.S.A. and Canada models] (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.09% THD, 8 Ω) • [Other models] (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.09% THD, 6 Ω) Radio Frequency (Operational Frequency) • 2402 MHz to 2480 MHz • [U.S.A. and Canada models] (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω) – Front L/R – Front L/R Maximum Output Power (E.I.R.P) • 3.91 dBm (2.46 mW) – Center Maximum communication distance • 10 m (33 ft) without interference 137 En 80 W+80 W 95 W+95 W 95 W – Surround L/R 95 W+95 W – Surround Back L/R 95 W+95 W Rated Output Power (1-channel driven) Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) • [U.S.A. and Canada models] (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω) • [Other models] (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 6 Ω) • AV 2 etc. (DIRECT) (Input 1 kΩ Shorted, Speaker Out) – Front L/R 115 W/ch Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) – Center 115 W/ch • Front L/R (Speaker Out) – Surround L/R 115 W/ch – Surround Back L/R 115 W/ch Maximum Effective Output Power (1-channel driven) Channel Separation • AV 2 etc. (Input 1 kΩ Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz) • Range (1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω) – Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R, Surround Back L/R 140 W/ch • Step (1 kHz, 10% THD, 6 Ω) – Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R, Surround Back L/R 145 W/ch Tone Control Characteristics • Bass Boost/Cut • [Other models] (1 kHz, 10% THD, 6 Ω) 135 W/ch • [U.S.A. and Canada models] 120/140/170/190 W • [Other models] – Front L/R (6/4/2 Ω) 140/170/190 W Damping Factor • Front L/R, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω 100 or more 200 mV/47 kΩ Maximum Input Signal • AV 2 etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD, Effect On) 2.3 V Output Level / Output Impedance • SUBWOOFER 1 V/1.2 kΩ Headphone Jack Rated Output / Impedance • AV 2 etc. (1 kHz, 50 mV, 8 Ω) • Treble Boost/Cut MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB 0.5 dB ±6 dB/0.5 dB Step at 50 Hz 350 Hz ±6 dB/0.5 dB Step at 20 kHz 3.5 kHz Filter Characteristics (fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz) • H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround) 12 dB/oct. • L.P.F. (Subwoofer) 24 dB/oct. Video Section 100 mV/470 Ω • [U.S.A. and Canada models] • [Other models] • Composite PAL 1 Vp-p/75 Ω Video Maximum Input Level 1.5 Vp-p or more Video Signal to Noise Ratio 50 dB or more +0/-3 dB 138 NTSC Video Signal Level Frequency Response • AV 2 etc. to Front (10 Hz to 100 kHz) 70 dB/50 dB or more Video Signal Type Input Sensitivity / Input Impedance • AV 2 etc. (1 kHz, 100 W/6 Ω) • Bass Turnover • Treble Turnover Dynamic Power (IHF) – Front L/R (8/6/4/2 Ω) 150 μV or less Volume Control • [U.S.A. and Canada models] – Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R, Surround Back L/R 110 dB or more En FM Section General Tuning Range • [U.S.A. and Canada models] Power Supply 87.5 MHz to 107.9 MHz • [U.S.A. and Canada models] AC 120 V, 60 Hz • [U.K. and Europe models] 87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz • [Australia model] AC 240 V, 50 Hz • [Other models] 87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz • [U.K., Europe and Russia models] AC 230 V, 50 Hz 50 dB Quiet Sensitivity (IHF, 1 kHz, 100% MOD.) Power Consumption • Mono 3 μV (20.8 dBf) Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF) 260 W Standby Power Consumption • Mono 65 dB • HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off, Network Standby Off 0.1 W • Stereo 64 dB • HDMI Control On, Standby Through On (No Signals), Network Standby Off 1.1 W • HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off, Network Standby On, Bluetooth Standby Off Harmonic Distortion (IHF, 1 kHz) • Mono 0.5% – Wired 1.7 W • Stereo 0.6% – Wireless (Wi-Fi) 1.8 W – Wireless Direct 1.8 W Antenna Input 75 Ω unbalanced AM section Tuning Range • [U.S.A. and Canada models] • HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off, Network Standby On (Wired), Bluetooth Standby On 1.6 W • HDMI Control On, Standby Through On (No Signals), Network Standby On (Wireless Direct), Bluetooth Standby On 2.4 W Dimensions (W x H x D) 530 kHz to 1710 kHz DAB Section (U.K., Europe, Australia and Russia models) 435 x 161 x 330 mm (17-1/8” x 6-3/8” x 13”) Reference Dimensions (with wireless antenna upright) * Including legs and protrusions Tuning Range 435 x 225.5 x 330 mm (17-1/8” x 8-7/8” x 13”) 174 MHz to 240 MHz (Band III) Weight Support Audio Format MPEG 1 Layer II/MPEG-4 HE-AAC v2 Antenna 8.3 kg (18.3 lbs) * The contents of this manual apply to the latest specifications as of the publishing date. To obtain the latest manual, access the Yamaha website then download the manual file. 75 Ω unbalanced 139 En Yamaha Global Site http://www.yamaha.com/ Yamaha Downloads http://download.yamaha.com/ Manual Development Group © 2017 Yamaha Corporation Published 03/2017 NV-A0 YJ193A0/EN1